Home

User`s Manual - Tru

1. Rep Te ur ENTE NI 62 GPS Options Page siida a RR MI Mead uM MDM MEAM MUN ic diui ene 64 Mark Current GPS Position 3e cse cix on e Ier ER tesirinde Fe nA ia n RR ER EUR E MERE TM 4 FU ain E 64 SIRO iie E EEEO ERES a EEES E RENE peaseecopaniestagnestess 64 Mark now at all positions with a horizontal line sese 64 Mark here at all times with a vertical Ine omes trarre etu ES eoo ien eo err a aad 64 Show the current cycle UME eibi ore oe en LU EN esl D a PA Ia DAE 64 When zoomed in and the GPS marker goes off SCteen iiuuieu eee ette hn erra o sikt nd 65 When recording trip logs tolerate interruptions from the GPS data stream 65 Payer for Tip Log E Sel eiedeo ipie ivo pei ERU O RED ca ae 65 Disable Power Saving and if possible the Screen Saver sss 66 Make sounds when l m going to arrive WHEEL osse etse uario Into Een ra en bd ens bn epa ee oe nas 66 Make sounds when a trip lag point is recorded ete tor etrr tritt otro esa oc EI ebd d 66 Make sounds when an intersection coordinate is recorded eeeeeeeeseesss 67 Make sounds when I cross the center of an intersection sseseeseeseressssreereressssssrrrrerreeee 67 Sound just once per intersection even if GPS noise suggests multiple possible crossings there and th first one 1s probably a f
2. especially useful for helping in travel time and delay studies with Tru Traffic and they should get you going 208 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 amp S Google Earth File Edit View Tools Add Help v Search FiyTo FindBusinesses Directions Fly to e g Tokyo Japan v Places B BS My Places m amp Coordination along Crossin amp VIE Coordination along Cross I Coordination along Cros Places Photos JEE Roads 3D Buildings Ocean Street View E E Weather a 71d Gallery Global Awareness More E E E 209 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Importing Exporting UTDF Files Tru Traffic can import and export text files in the UTDF Universal Traffic Data Format either 2006 combined file or the older 5 file version 2 1 These files can be used to transfer diagram parameters to and from other programs supporting the UTDF such as Synchro and traffic signal control systems from Naztec Gardner Eagle and Peek See also Importing Exporting UTDF Files with Synchro in the help file for tips on working with these files in Synchro Import Export UTDF 2006 When sharing information specifically between Tru Traffic and Synchro you ll generally prefer the newer combined file as the procedure is simpler and the file contents are more complete and clearly defined To import
3. esee 204 Transfer Trip Logs to Trac Ease iones coner eot ten rri yo esto er mu ee esp en Ru n RR vUR X RA Sur pR Tug EFE 204 Transfer Instantaneous Average or Instantaneous Median or Link Average or Link Median of Top Logs to Google EArifi ie oe on vU E DII ot EX PRI SEM cc Rata Da UH ARQn DIT UEPIS 2 e cN p Ae bt NIE 204 Confirm or Correct Intersection CODITIIIALES ioo ese ob reno Eee voc es ost Dou Dre RUN 205 Collect Geographic Coordinates Tor Your etw Otke soe iru t c bi pet var ta EAT RECO ld 206 View Trip Logs or Play it Like MONI eoe rrr trii ure nnd PRU S ER ep nr PHP prO EIER TER DSEREUE 206 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination View Map of Instantaneous Average or Instantaneous Median or Link Average or Link Median Speed RTT RETO E D Enc 207 Importing Exporting UTDF Pres a ac p SERES EENSn LE NSNEBE REA on URN EUR ML UR DIEN RUN RUPIR CUM TIR RAT REM RES 210 Inport Export SURE OCTO cr 210 Import ei UTDF BON P 210 Notes and LIUM S CRTON TUTTO 212 AAP Files and Reference Pales se er i FN HR EP E E EN p MUI MED MI E 214 CopyFromDomPFile UTA TE 215 Usme Copy bou di TTE IET 215 How it WOrkS REORUM 216 E AA E AA B IE A PEA EO AA E E A T E A E EE 216 CollectCoordinates WY misisse ii e a ERE EE EEE EEE EEE 217 Using Collect non meibes siirros eee iiaa i eiae AEE EE Rs 217 Fr qu ntly Asked EOS GIVE as spe qoid ad ix n avec exch RE T a RUN XR ante QU E
4. 163 COTES eorom totins cease dir recy nena i epp tnus ntu acentos m tetina iunc u E 166 Fine Tung DITS eee a do ee M PRI ad SUV ip b 166 Minimize Timing Plon TEASE os oo oe oie e Ead Ovi died o ehe tuni th SEA dus tede v aS a EEEE 167 SRCA OES ECRIRE 169 File Ma agemieit TETTE ETT SENSU 170 NEw Dia BU ccs vs vazcatw sae eret rebar rium ver E abre aliu emer rre eave ener 170 Open Diagrami Data IC T 170 Merg Diagrami Data Pile ioi rei a aea EE A A EEEE T AE TEE 171 Save Diagram Data WII TITO OESTE 171 Save Diagram Data File AS issiron iia TUTO T 174 Extract Diagrami erein Eee EER Ei EEA EE EERE TEA E AE EREEREER 174 ENDI aal a Rn 174 Closing the Diagram Data File esinen E acne E Una UN uU Spei de 174 Lad HORS IRIS UE esere aenta COE 00 D Om 175 Exit Teu OU TEPORE 175 PIERDE gelesen oa eda tcs tute neca etes E tul dn aa ca eg e 176 1 3 0L odo tui mt oa iE Urt s eo tete Discipuli unto D b E RE 176 Layout Offsets casas eu dio Medi a ea fastu haga ace eae asd ae 176 BRN OF SES RITE aE AE iba docs EEE A AE ETE REET 176 Show Offsets on EE MO rc 177 Layout SPIS niers lt dn P CoD IRR Dc dt ES PN GUN cn ea 177 Show Arterial NOTTE TODOS 177 Show Side Street Splits TOTO 177 Show Minimum SSUES sse aec taea E E AK EE RGR 177 Total Splits or Green Yellow Times Only or Green Times Only 177 Show Spit UNMS sessirnir Tc 177 Split Labeli EE E R E AE E E E 178 Show Splits on Just One Cyle sristi extend cae assi t
5. Thereafter Tru Traffic will tentatively assign those placemarks accordingly when you paste them from the clipboard or when you import the KML file To transfer geographic coordinates in the other direction from Tru Traffic to Google Earth you may either export a GPS Exchange Format GPX or a KML file use File Save As and change the file type to Google KML or copy and paste from the clipboard use Edit Copy Geographic Coordinates 239 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Geographic Coordinates as Google KML Either way in Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then paste using Ctrl V or right click and choose Paste or import using File Open A new folder will appear called diagram data file name kml When you double click on that folder the map view will zoom in on the network You may also import export trip logs as GPS Exchange Format GPX or Google Earth KML files or copy them to the clipboard for importing pasting into Google Earth to watch as an animation Microsoft Bing Maps This one allows saving a set of geographic coordinates to a KML file for importing into Tru Traffic but as of this writing Oct 2008 it does not allow copying the set of coordinates to the clipboard in KML format and it does not import coordinates from a KML Microsoft Streets amp Trips This one tends to have considerably more accurate maps than the DeLorme product but the 2002 ve
6. Tru Traffic uses the platoon dispersion model developed for TRANSY T 7F Table 3 gives the values the TRANSYT 7F manual suggests using The higher the Dispersion Factor the more the platoon disperses as it travels downstream The platoon does not disperse if the Dispersion Factor is zero You may limit the time for which the Dispersion Factor is applied and thereby limit the long term platoon dispersion by setting the maximum Dispersion Time Dispersion Factor Roadway Condition Description 0 5 Heavy friction Combination of parking moderate to heavy turns or pedestrian traffic narrow lane width 0 35 Moderate friction Light turning and pedestrian traffic 11 to 12 foot lanes 3 4 to 3 7 meter possibly divided 0 25 Low friction No parking divided turning provisions 12 foot 3 7 meter lane width Table 3 The Platoon Dispersion Factors recommended by the TRANSYT 7F manual Refer to the TRANSYT 7F manual for a detailed description of the dispersion model It is available from the Center for Microcomputers in Transportation Mc Trans at the University of Florida Dispersion Time This is used on Platoon Progression diagrams only It is a means of limiting the arterial platoon dispersion Tru Traffic uses the platoon dispersion model developed for TRANSY T 7F Some traffic engineers feel that this model allows more dispersion between widely separated intersections than they observe in the field They
7. e the count interval the intersection ID e column labels and e the start time and turning movement counts for each direction The various counts are displayed in a list view with column header buttons that help you select 145 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination the desired count s Click a column header button to sort the list on that column You may sort the list by total approach count instead of individual lane count by clicking one of the column header buttons NB SB EB or WB Similarly to sort the list by total intersection volume count click the column header button Total Check the box corresponding to each count you wish to include If you selected more than one count Tru Traffic will use the average hourly volume of the selected counts Saturation Flows The saturation flow is the number of vehicles that would complete a movement in an hour if 1 There is a constant queue and 2 The movement has 100 green time No red time or opposing flow for permitted left or right turners The ideal Saturation Flow is measured in vehicles per hour green per lane Note that these are per lane averages not totals Tru Traffic uses the Saturation Flow only on Platoon Progression diagrams It calculates the actual total Saturation Flow not the per lane average based on the entered ideal Saturation Flow using the method prescribed in Chapter 9 of the Highway Capacity Manual HCM In the I
8. 31 NET QD Stop GPS Tracking 2 Hep Satellite Status dB 20 22 31 26 cJ few coordinates for the intersections either dropping placemarks in Google Earth see page 201 or using the CollectCoordinates utility page 217 we discuss here how to do it with Tru Traffic and a GPS receiver Open the Intersection Parameters for the intersection you ve traveled to Click the button to open the list of Geographic Coordinates measurements Stand at each corner of the intersection and click the button to add the current GPS coordinates to the list of measurements Travel to the next intersection in the artery repeating steps 8 and 9 for each intersection in the artery Note that it is also possible to perform these steps while in a moving vehicle For example you can drive the artery in both directions opening the Intersection Parameters and clicking the button or say Mark Point if voice command recognition is enabled as you cross the stop bar at each intersection But B Hoffman Name etc Iimings Green Bands Lanes Volumes Name Hoffman Distance from Drake 83 940 feet Get from Trip Logs ID Number 4 Notes controller etc 2 Previous is Two way x 2 Hep Latitude N 36 36 8164 Longitude W 121 54 1050 Northbound gt Control Traffic Both SR cR Nous Coordinates Adjusted Cycle Length Full 1 x 76 sec
9. Calculate the average speed between intersections Calculate the Start Up Lost Time for the through movements at an intersection 220 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 I have separate diagram files for two intersecting arteries in separate files How do I link them together at their common intersection Use the File Open command to open the first diagram then use the File Merge as New Diagrams command to merge the second diagram with the first Finally to link the two diagrams together at their common intersection open either the Outline View or the Network View and drag the intersection from one diagram to the common intersection in the other diagram linking Everything see page 159 How do I transfer my diagram to a document in my word processor or desk top publisher or graphics presentation program If your word processor supports pasting graphics from the Windows Clipboard then the easiest way is to copy using the Copy command under the Edit menu your diagram to the Clipboard then paste it in your word processor If your word processor does not support pasting graphics files then you might try reserving some white space on one page in your document and set your diagram size and margins so that when you may draw your diagram to the printer it fits in that white space Then run that page through your printer a second time to print the document How do I transfer data between Tru Traffic and Synchro Tru Traffic an
10. Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination User s Manual 1985 1989 1996 2000 2003 2006 2008 2011 2012 Gregory L Bullock User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Table of Contents Introd ctidn to t e US CRINE CN 9 License BOUT eo Ph ga Gs a Seat as toma and ti co cus Scb teret aes paca anaes mune EE 11 ELERT Ae eTe MM c 12 Creating your first arterial timings diagram Fro soie opo rh n PER UP peua Phr PA I Dr eens 12 Short Notes for Creating a New Time Space Platoon Progression Diagram for both Signal Coordination and Travektime amp Delay SEU isiin a e PORE S pus ba sie 13 Op r ting op od sos To eie ced eee enna eed 15 Pall Down Menus coord erue iEn eiim eiA AS SEREAS PEERAA pu mira e ttr dura 15 Th Help Syste om 15 Creatine a NetWork soiien rie tire ER EE E E E A EAE E eI UE FOU MR dU NE 16 How to Perform a Travel Time and Delay Sy ysccsesdencsvsnscnasnncssacatendvadanendoateanancdessasnannanenstanasncnns 20 Diagprari VATES esnea pect sees pce ia E RE rnc EEI DG EARE R LR EE Ru RU 24 Understanding the Diagrami Symbols ssie ier EEEE O EEEE Lo ben Ee Pa EEN IEE 28 NN Tad HL AEN 29 Del te Diagram WinNdOW ARCET COE TOO EA 30 Duplicate Diagrami WindOW eoe rsen x RES RATER CK rn ax FORE Rot TERIS FARO CHR RR ER REN EH ai IR EIER RR 30 STs Diagram WindOWS TETTE n TER 30 Splitting Diistam WMI 5 retire qus BRI PEEL ARR od E EEE BON UV U tas RE REEE 30 Tile Di grari WINdOWS NNDTTS OTT OLTCTETTUNSm 3
11. The end of walk time or beginning of flashing don t walk along the artery at this intersection regardless of the movement turning through Start of first protected turn movement Start of green time for first protected turn movement regardless of direction of travel Start of second protected turn movement Start of green time for second protected turn movement regardless of direction of travel Table 1 The choices for the Offset Reference Point and their meanings 104 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Mone Lead Lag Lead Lag Lead None None None Lead Lag Lag Offset Reference Point Start of first through movement Start of second through movement Start of arterial phase Start of last through movement yellow Start of first through d movement yellow E Start of arterial phase yellow Start of last through movement FDW Start of first through movement FDW Start of arterial phase FDW Start of first protected turn movement Start of second protected turn movement Table 2 The location of the Offset Reference Points for different lefi turn Phase Sequences The solid black lines indicate red time for the artery Time increases in the upward direction The walk and flashing don t walk phases are shown only implicitly not explicitly Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Example Suppose at a certain intersection the Adjusted Cycle Length is 80 s
12. 35 1 2048 256 StdDev 47 33 0 a 0 4f o 46 o a a 7 55 10 50 12 321 269 92 After n 8 Difference 24 38 0 24 gy 24 o 28 o 20 19 5 32 8 34 08 734 878 47 StdDev 53 58 g 0 53 o 54 O 50 50 10 59 15 56 t5 590 800 403 Difference Difference 9 096 0 37 0 37 NID 30 NID 35 34 2 26 6 11 796 31 6 67 6 30 0 22 4 m n Cumulative Summary Northbound Summary Southbound Summary Northbound Details Southbound Details m Se Eus iE The report is displayed in a multi tabbed window with separate pages for summaries and details e one page with an arterial wide summary showing just the cumulative numbers two pages with link by link summaries showing just the averages of all trip log runs and the differences one page for each direction of travel and two pages with the details for each run of each trip log one page for each direction of travel The user specified parameters Design Speed Design Distance Cumulative Number of Links and Volume are echoed unchanged in the Before amp After difference section their actual difference is not shown The actual difference for the user specified parameters would always be uninformatively zero and I believe having the actual user specified values present in this table can be more useful for further calculations Many users will wi
13. Azalea Garden Rd Virginia Beach Blvd amp VA Natural Gas Ent 101 79 307 242 VA Beach Blvd amp Kingwood Ave Norfolk Sq 102 Hj Virginia Beach Blvd amp Ingleside Rd ea Va Beach Blvd amp Scott St 103 ES 210 opi WE ds 4 Artery 2 i Virginia Beach Blvd amp Newtown Rd ul uc BER When you ve connected dots Newtown Rd amp Ethan Allen Ln 302 P er Newtown Rd amp Stoney Point Rd E 08 xis D 201 to make all your arteries EE aA eR sip 56 23213959 click the button to Create Newtown Rd amp Greenwich Rd I 44 E Wo E n ille Rd rtown Rd ao 5 ici nd I th eir corres po n d In g Arte ri al d rag coca Dr E so Click on a dot to start a new Diagrams i a rte ry Or ro ute s 199 7 Automatically Trace Routes 4 4 Ctrl click on a dot to append it ne SO qf Create Arterial Diagrams X Cancel 2Hep 3 to the current artery or route d T 26 _ gius If Tru Traffic can distinguish the names of the crossing streets then it can 26 RA automatically trace the m x complete set of routes for you 4 When you ve connected dots to make all your arteries click the button to create their corresponding Arterial Diagrams The arterial diagrams are created with distances and geographic coordinates of the intersections links are created for crossing arteries and if available the names and intersection ID numbers are set The distances are calculated as straight line distances so if your road
14. Bus Speed Light Rail Speed or Bicycle Speed in the speed type selection box near the upper right corner of the tabbed page in the Intersection Parameters dialog When using the option to automatically Optimize Arterial Offsets etc under the Optimize menu page 163 you may have the optimization algorithm consider the bands for more than one speed category using weighting factors to specify the relative import of the respective speed categories There are weighting factors for the Cars band which uses the Design Speed the Bus band the Light Rail band and the Bicycle band but there is not a separate weighting factor for the Posted Speed Limit band If you wish to coordinate the signals for the Posted Speed Limit then you should set the Design Speed to equal the posted speed limit This speed parameter is helpful on arteries where the average Design Speed is not constant 133 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination throughout the length of the diagram Click the button next to the speed to determine the actual travel speed using one or more travel time runs from Trip Logs page 51 This button is enabled only if there are trip logs involving travel between this and the neighboring intersections You may select which trip log runs to use in the calculation from a list of all trip log runs that include these two intersections Typically you ll want to set the speed using the fastest travel time run ever r
15. Intersection set the Green Band Action in the westbound direction to Continue This way the westbound band simply ignores the signal there and continues on through unaffected Similarly at the 221 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Westbound Intersection set the Green Band Action in the eastbound direction to Continue This method also has some annoyances e At these exclusive signals where the arteries are really one way they re declared as two way Again we just have to set the phantom through Split to match the through split in the one way direction and otherwise ignore that direction because it doesn t really exist e This method displays the two exclusive signals on the diagram as though both directions of travel saw them But we set the green band so it isn t affected by the nonexistent signals so maybe it s not too much trouble to mentally ignore one signal when you re thinking about a single direction of travel and then ignore the other signal when you re thinking about the other direction e Ifthe Eastbound Intersection and Westbound Intersection happened to be about the same distance from the common intersections then they would end up overlapping on the diagram and they might not be distinguishable there In this case Method A is probably preferred Troubleshooting The Lead Lead intersections are drawn in the wrong order with respect to the Lead Lag intersections on my diagram
16. Repeat Step 13 for each additional artery in the network At this point there is a diagram for each artery in your network but the diagrams are not yet linked together For linking two diagrams together at their common intersection it s usually best to collapse all but the two diagrams so that their intersections are hidden in the arterial outline list If there are many arteries you might want to click the button then click the icon in front of each of the two diagrams to expand just those two 18 16 17 18 19 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Identify the common intersection in each of the two arterial diagrams Select it in one of the arterial diagrams and drag it to the other one to establish a link between them If the intersection in one of these diagrams does not have correct signal timing information typically because it was created in Step 7 and the other does then select first the correct timings intersection and drag it to the incorrect one This will ensure that the correct timings are preserved as the link is established z You ll have a choice of which type of i link to create By default Offsets Only will be selected but change this to Everything before clicking the Link Intersections Make Link From Main St OK button Repeat Steps 15 17 for each of the intersecting arteries in the network You now have at least the skeleton of of Lincoln Blvd PM
17. Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Disable Power Saving and if possible the Screen Saver This check box gives the option to disable the power saving modes and if possible the screen saver while recording a trip log The power saving mode will obviously interrupt the connection to the GPS receiver if it kicks in while you re tracking and if you re recording a trip log the data travel is irretrievably lost during that interruption Although it may not be obvious it turns out that even the screen saver will also interrupt the GPS connection with a similar loss of data You ll want to ensure that neither one power saver or the screen saver interrupts the GPS connect Checking this box can help as it will automatically attempt to disable both the power saver and the screen saver while recording trip logs Be aware though that network group policies can determine whether it s possible for software or the user to actually disable the screen saver as the IT departments at some agencies view that as a security risk In these cases you may want to either talk with your IT department about making an exception to that group policy or connect a mouse to the laptop while driving your travel time runs The vehicle vibrations will usually jiggle the mouse cursor often enough to make your operating system see some user activity staving off the screen saver Make sounds when I m going to arrive within This check box gives t
18. Windows Clipboard In Tru Traffic right click on a Trip Log and choose Copy Copy Stops as Google KML In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then paste using Ctrl V or right click and choose Paste Use the settings on the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog to specify the color and size of the icons showing the Trip Log stops page 194 Transfer Trip Logs to Tru Traffic The trip log should be in a folder in Google Earth Select the folder to transfer its entire contents to Tru Traffic as follows l Google KML File Right click on the folder and choose Save Place As to save the folder to a KML File In Tru Traffic right click in the list of Trip Logs and choose Import Trip Log to import the KML file 2 Windows Clipboard Right click on the folder and choose Copy In Tru Traffic open the list of Trip Logs and either press Ctrl V or right click and choose Paste to paste the trip log Transfer Instantaneous Average or Instantaneous Median or Link Average or Link Median of Trip Logs to Google Earth In Tru Traffic make a Plot from Trip Logs including all the Trip Logs that you wish summarized e g averaged together and including also the type of summaries you desire e g Instantaneous Average Link Average Link Median etc l Google KML File Right click on the Plot and choose Save Save Instantaneous Average or Save Instantaneous Median or Save Link Average or Save Li
19. measurements taken on the opposite sides of the median or on opposite corners allow Tru Traffic to estimate the intersection width including the median and the standard deviation of the width from GPS readings See How Trip Logs are Processed page 196 for additional details Warning It is not safe to operate a computer including laptop and notebook computers while operating a vehicle If you wish to perform any of the above procedures while in a moving vehicle have someone else drive the vehicle while you operate the computer You take full responsibility and accept all liability for any damage or injury that may occur as a result of your operating a computer while driving a vehicle When taking measurements in a moving vehicle Tru Traffic tries to compensate for the lag time since the GPS receiver last reported the position Since the GPS receiver provides a reading only once every 1 or 2 seconds depending on the type of GPS receiver the reported position may be off by up to D Get GPS the distance traveled in that time To compensate for this possible error when you click the Lilla button or say Mark Point if voice command recognition is enabled Tru Traffic takes the last reported position and adds the last reported speed multiplied by the time elapsed since the reading Thus 117 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination the compensated measurement is accurate provided you re moving at a fairly
20. rev 2015 03 30 2 when there are no vehicles leaving the upstream intersection Restriction 2 means that at the time when the queue backs up into upstream intersection there are no vehicles arriving at the upstream intersection and there is no queue waiting at the upstream intersection These criteria are strict so a queue backing up into the upstream intersection usually indicates that you should not trust the diagram Unless you are sure these criteria are met you should either adjust the timing parameters of the diagram to prevent the back up or not use a Platoon Progression diagram at all for that artery Queue Lane Group Use this set of radio buttons to select the lane group for which you wish to see the queue on the Platoon Progression diagram You may choose Through Left Turn Right Turn or Maximum meaning whichever of the three is largest You may assign a color to each lane group s queue in the Colors page of the Preferences dialog This is useful when you have elected to the show the maximum queue and wish to distinguish which lane group is contributing the maximum queue The queue is determined from the actual Saturation Flow and the Number of Lanes of the lane group using the method prescribed in Chapter 9 of the Highway Capacity Manual You may edit the Queue Lane Group in the Intersection Parameters dialog or directly on the Diagram Window by selecting the intersection and clicking the right mouse button and selecting
21. undesired case the summary could show fractional values for the numeric LOS For example if there were two trip log runs one with a LOS calculated as 1 the other with LOS 2 then the summary would show an average LOS of 1 5 To avoid this you d specify that your column be summarized as the Calculation result at the averages for all trip logs 86 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Calculate at Each You have a choice of what types of quantities are available for reference in your user defined formulas Your formulas can involve either just link by link values e g Delay Average Speed Stops etc or second by second values e g instantaneous speed instantaneous acceleration etc Instantaneous formulas permit implementation of high fidelity modal emissions and fuel consumption models including CMEM which gives CO NO HC and C0 emissions along with fuel consumption Use this set of radio buttons to specify which type of formula informs this column by indicating whether the formula is evalutated at each Node along the Route or at each GPS Point along the Link In creating formulas with instantaneous values bear in mind that the time interval between GPS points is not necessarily constant and is not necessarily one second Some GPS receivers report only every two seconds by default some GPS readings may have been skipped altogether and you may have disabled GPS points in the trip log Be sure to define your formula
22. 1 Park Avenue has no protected cross traffic turning movement in the right bound direction and a leading protected turning movement in the left bound direction Lincoln Blvd has leading protected turning movements in both directions of travel Ridge Drive has no protected turning movement in the left bound direction and a lagging protected turning movement in the right bound direction Understanding the Diagram Symbols The vertical strips above the intersection names show the color of the signal along the artery for each direction of travel The solid lines represent red time green for the cross street and the clear sections represent green time Thus you can think of the lines that you can see as barriers to the through traffic If the diagram is not on a one way street then each strip is constituted of two vertical stripes The stripe on the left right represents the signal that the traffic moving to the right left sees Thus the traffic for each direction of travel sees only the side of the strip that 1s closest to it If at a particular intersection the traffic moving to the right has a protected cross traffic turning movement but the traffic moving to the left has none then on the signal strip of that intersection the stripe on the left will be shorter than the stripe on the right as indicated by region 8 in Figure 1 The additional red time for the left bound traffic represents the interval of time during which the right bo
23. Can you explain this Sure What you re thinking of as green time is actually the red time and vice versa The signals in Tru Traffic s diagrams may be drawn differently from those that you re used to They re not like PASSER s In Tru Traffic the green time is shown in the background color and the red time is shown in the foreground color This way the green time which does not impede traffic flow looks just the same as the space between the intersections which also does not impede traffic flow and you can think of the foreground color or red time the only thing that does impede traffic flow as obstacles or barriers to the through traffic What does this Splits sum not equal to Cycle Length warning mean This warning message occurs when the sum of the Splits through protected turn and exclusive pedestrian is not equal to the Cycle Length There are three common causes of this warning 1 You re not using the Splits Units you intend The splits may be measured in either percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length or seconds When using percent the sum of the splits must be 100 when using seconds the sum of the splits must be the Adjusted Cycle Length 2 You have a protected cross traffic turning movement in one direction and no protected cross traffic turn in the opposite direction but you forgot to include the turn split in the through split In this case the through split in the one direction should be equal to the opposing through
24. Cycle Length is not set to one of the Uncoordinated options page 122 or it s set to Uncoordinated specified but the user specified cycle length differs from the sum of the splits You may choose a strict test of the Splits of both rings summing to the Cycle Length or to allow the splits of just one ring to sum to the Cycle Length The option is on the Desktop page of the Preferences dialog box Whichever test you use the strict test or the more lenient test Tru Traffic will issue a warning to you if the test isn t passed I have a Lead None intersection which is being drawn as a Lead Lag intersection on the diagram You probably have Splits whose sum is not equal to the Cycle Length As explained in answer to the previous question the most common cause of this is forgetting that the through Split in the direction with the protected cross traffic turn phase is the total through Split in that direction that is it should be equal to the sum of the opposing through Split and the accompanying cross traffic turn Split You can think of these two numbers as cross sums While viewing the Splits in the intersection parameters window the through and turning Splits for opposing directions of travel are displayed in the four corners of a box Regardless of the Turn Phase Sequences Lead Lag or None the sums of the Splits in opposing corners of the box should always be equal That is cross sums should be equal Actually an exception to th
25. Distance and Design Speed In both cases you ll probably want to use relevant trip log runs to calculate the best Get from Trip Logs estimate To do this click the button next to the Design Distance entry box and click the button next to the Design Speed entry box In the case of the Design Distance you ll usually want to take the average of the trip log runs after excluding any far fetched outliers In the case of the Design Speed however you ll often want to take the average of just the fastest few runs or maybe even the fastest run on theory that the slower ones include an appreciable delay and shouldn t be used as a baseline for estimates of the true delay I ve just recorded some trip logs but I don t see them on the Network View There are several things that can cause this l Make sure you ve set the Geographic Coordinates of the intersections To display your trip logs on a diagram or the Network View Tru Traffic needs two pieces of information 1 your geographic position at a series of times and 2 where the intersections are geographically Comparing these two Tru Traffic can tell where you traveled in relation to the signals on the diagram and show your path The trip logs provide the first piece of information your geographic position at a series of times You must provide the second piece of information where the intersections are Coordinates 1 Q Coordinates button in the Intersection Parame
26. File is Open for Editing Lock it as Read only for all other Instances of Tru Traffic corone or EE 194 Exporting UTDF include Tru Traffic specific parameters e g geographic coordinates c rdinated cycle length jiire crre ipea avitum Aer um CR RR iE Ere ieSe a aTa p aie aere aE 194 Label Approaches along Arteries in Exporting UTDF Files using 194 Cri TE BIN PTT M 194 Color Bis RC EUCH RC N RRUON 195 Use Low Sneed Color for Speeds Belo iuo oc va oc oec HERD Er Rp D BAR I Ru 195 Joon Scale L8 relative SIDE oec ir eren enu RA nin er RR PA EFRON EYE YR T aean Ir x I FRE 195 Tu luce the Name ofeach Trip Log Point eeclesie aote SEP de uoti stia augus De quU edu 195 How Trip Loss dare Proc ss d osceni sa us bti DERI qp3 HIDE ETE UMP EEE E DANG E EO Idas 196 COMES Loco ten wo LIE IR ME MR ee ar 196 More Doetulled VIEW assa deo Ede adir ix Rd Eoo b rn enact M D Op d VE DOR YE BEP I UM 197 sine Google Earth with Tut TOSfDO ise Uc bcics evite thi dk Sae Do HAN e E PLAN Uo S IHRE o ed QVIS du dV eR eG badE 201 Transfer Intersection Locations to Google Barthius ero rttvoe rase xot ebn e heroes n uisa 201 Transfer Intersection Locations fram Google Bart us eee epa tie Ren be UM DR ERR Eel 201 Create Tru Traffic Network from Locations in Google Earth sess 202 iis bs RESTAURANT ETUR 203 Transfer Trip Log Stops from Tru Traffic to Google Earth
27. GPS position to the end of the List of Coordinates and Saves the entire List of Coordinates to the Coordinates Text file 1f the name is already specified 217 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination If the file already exists the coordinates are appended to the end of the file P Collect GP Coordinates Erime Coordinates File Position Satelites Options Setup Diagnostics Save or Append GPS Coordinates to File 36 6245000 121 9217367 9 243650 121 9217433 1f 26 6243733 121 9217233 36 6243800 121 9217300 36 6243667 121 9217217 36 6243667 121 9217217 36 6243683 121 9217250 36 6243750 121 9217217 IJ 36 6243867 121 9217250 36 6243933 121 9217517 Click this button to toggle When either the list of coordinates or the the GPS connection Mark Spot button has the input focus pressing a key any key on the keyboard adds the current GPS position to the list and saves the file in one step If you have a remote control USB Bluetooth or infrared then the enter buttons should also perform the same function If voice command recognition is enabled say Mark Point to perform this function When you import the Coordinates Text file Tru Traffic displays a window to allow you assign or reassign the coordinates to their respective intersections 218 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Frequently Asked Questions General Questions Are Tru Traffic 10 0 files backward com
28. Horizontal Scale so the entire diagram may be seen on the screen without any excess space As a result you shouldn t set the value of those parameters which will be altered by your later editing other parameters To facilitate this Tru Traffic puts the affected parameters somewhere below the affecting parameters so 1f you work from top to bottom Tru Traffic won t change any of your work The parameters which are affected by changes in other parameters are described herein along with the other intersection parameters and for convenient reference a table of these parameters is given in the section Affecting amp Affected Parameters page 242 Use the mE s isti button or press the PageDn PageUp key to advance the window to the next previous intersection in the forward reverse direction along the artery Name of the Intersection For maximum clarity Tru Traffic allows you to refer to the intersections by their true names The intersection name is displayed on the diagram window and in the report of the arterial timings diagram parameters as well as in the exported ASCII file 110 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The intersection name may be up to 63 characters in length You may use these characters to show any information useful to you name of cross street controller group number node number etc In the Arterial Diagram Parameters dialog you may select the size and style of the Font used for showing the Intersect
29. I m sure there are others out there I ve tried only four Google Earth This one allows copying pasting importing and exporting a set in a folder of geographic coordinates to a GPS Exchange Format GPX or a Google KML file or a for importing into or exporting from Tru Traffic A chapter on using Google Earth with Tru Traffic gives step by step details p 201 Here we give an overview In collecting coordinates of intersections from Google Earth you may either set placemarks at or drag paths around the intersections Either way it s best to create a folder in Google Earth where you store the set of placemarks or paths Thereafter you may select the folder to either copy its entire contents for pasting into Tru Traffic or to export to a KML file for importing into Tru Traffic When you either import or paste into Tru Traffic either into the geographic coordinates window or directly into an arterial timings diagram Tru Traffic displays the entire list of pasted coordinates along with their tentative intersection assignments You may assign the unassigned coordinates to intersections change the assignments or skip coordinates by not assigning them to any intersection before clicking OK to accept the list You can save yourself a step by assigning the Intersection ID Number directly to the placemark in Google Earth To do this in Google Earth add the ID number in the placemark name or description preceded with either the text ID or
30. M Shanteau s Using Cumulative Curves to Measure Saturation Flow and Lost Time ITE Journal Oct 88 or MJOJ S T This definition is the most accurate for the Clearance Lost Time on Platoon Progression diagrams For Time Space diagrams the Clearance Lost Time has a somewhat different definition analogous to that explained in the figures associated with the Start Up Lost Time which can be calculated from Trip Logs The default value is set in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog page 192 but any diagram can override the default Table 9 shows the TRANSYT 7F recommended values of the Clearance Lost Time for various driving conditions On Time Space and Time Location diagrams each time you change the Green Extension Time Tru Traffic resets the Widths if they re not locked of any associated green bands to their default values Phase Number The Phase Number for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is a number greater than 0 used to e label the phase on the Diagram Window if you ve opted to view the splits directly on the diagram e label the phase on diagram Reports e label and determine the ring of the phase on the Splits Bar on the Timings Page of the Intersection Parameters dialog box and fa Ju j 27 Street e identify signal phases when Importing or Exporting UTDF files see page 210 Name etc Timings Green Bands Lanes Splits seconds amp Phase Sequences Often when you creat
31. Manual rev 2015 03 30 License Information The licensing information is in the License Information dialog box available by selecting the About command from the Help menu then clicking the License button The information includes the License Terms the Licensed To name and the License Number In order to have full access to all the features of Tru Traffic you must enter both the Licensed To and the License Number Be sure to enter both of these exactly as they were provided to you including any spaces punctuation and upper or lower case letters but without the quotation marks If you have already purchased a full license the Licensed To name and the License Number are on the cover letter included in the Tru Traffic packet mailed to you If you haven t already purchased a full license you may get a free evaluation license which allows you to run Tru Traffic without restrictions for a limited time by e mailing license tru traffic com or by calling 831 642 9641 If there is no license information entered or if the information is invalid Tru Traffic will run in Demonstration Mode which means you will not be able to save any of your files import or export UTDF files or share files with TEAPAC 11 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Getting Started To install Tru Traffic open the file SetupTru Traffic10 msi program on the installation disk The setup file will let you choose the subdirec
32. NB Market AM ain r sure you first collapse the 100 Main 100 of SB St Paul AM 5 t Paul 100 ol ain AM 3 rterial d that it U 100 St Paul 100 of EB WB Mai 1 arterial diagram so that its 7 112 Main 112 of NB Market AM d intersections are hidden U 112 Market 112 of EB WB Main AM before clicking this button as you will add a new intersection instead of a new arterial diagram if it s expanded You ll be prompted to enter the number of signalized intersections along the newly added artery and the Forward Direction or Orientation of the diagram Repeat Steps 7 amp 8 for each artery in your network Click the button to expand all arterial diagrams so their intersections are visible For each unnamed artery or intersection click the item once to select it then a second time to rename it Give each item a meaningful name typically the name of the artery or cross street Proceed to Step 15 Starting from multiple diagram files each for a different artery in the network 12 13 14 15 If you already have a diagram file representing each or more than one artery in the network choose one diagram file to be the first artery open that file and use it as a starting point You might want to use Save As in the File Menu and give the open diagram file a new name so you don t overwrite the original file Merge the diagram file for the second artery by using the Merge command on the File Menu
33. Page Up and Page Down keys to quickly scroll to different regions of the artery and when you print you may choose to print one or more pages Right clicking on the plot gives a number of options including CToggling the Plot Type between Speed vs Distance and Time vs Distance Editing the Plot Properties including changing the Title overriding the automatic plot title 92 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 changing the fonts of the various text regions of the plot e g Title Legend Axis Titles Axis Tick Labels etc changing the line colors styles and thicknesses for the axes grids and tick marks Copying to the clipboard as both an image and a set of tab delimited text tables one for each trip log and one for the instantaneous average Copying to the clipboard the Average or Median Instantaneous Speeds as either Google KML or GPS Exchange GPX Copying to the clipboard the Average or Median Link Speeds as either Google KML or GPS Exchange GPX Printing the plot Saving the plot to a file as either an image bitmap metafile or PNG file or a text file with a set of tab delimited tables one for each trip log and one for the instantaneous average Saving all plot pages to a set of image files bitmaps metafiles or PNG files Saving the plotted Average or Median Instantaneous Speeds as either a GIS shapefile a GPS Exchange Format GPX file a Google KML file or as a tab delimited text table inc
34. South 13 secc AAS gee E v Mail ve hitita VW emn T i _ gee PS 5 40 sect dhaecstntill 20s gt e een 3 BENNETT 5054 506 t MMC ENOTEN UPS Jiasgpo i 13 secs Mag sec TA A cr e s s U SLSR el A DO EE iii m Ze sere 25 mph Na e Mee 23sec EN EL E wn p Lene tT sec TM EENES SC EEOC EAER DID Harrison Ave Salvio St Concord Blvd Pacheco St Willow Pass Rd Clayton Rd Figure 2 An example of a Time Space diagram On Time Space diagrams the green bands are drawn as dotted diagonal lines shown in Figure 2 At your option the various band Speeds either Design Speed p 133 or Posted Speed Limit p 135 or both p 108 may be shown explicitly 26 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 90sec Example Time Space or Platoon Progression Diagram Sat 1 17 2009 11 38 AM South E omg 3 E a Lp 28 sect 28 sec 13 secs 31sec 56 sec 43 sec 32sec 42 sec z 28 sec pO LLL Ps 13 sec 40sec 40 sec T S4 secre tabi cec 2z L2 2222222 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 dBR oor T 43 secs 3 13 sec S 13 sec 31 sec gt n 32 sec d _ sec m sd 12se pr sd imn Harrison Ave Salvio St Concord Blvd Pacheco St Willow Pass Rd Clayton Rd Figure 3 An example of a Platoon Progression diagram On Platoon Progression diagrams the area between the intersection st
35. Spot neighboring intersections Get Coordinates Get Measurement Get Point Take Location Take Position Take Reading Take Spot Take Coordinates Take Measurement Take Point Add Location Add Position Add Reading Add Spot Add Coordinates Add Measurement Add Point Next Intersection in Next Intersection This is equivalent to clicking the Forward direction Next Signal button on the geographic coordinates Next Node window to advance the window to next Go Forward intersection in the forward direction This 75 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Previous Intersection in Reverse direction Next or Previous Intersection Synchronize Clocks Step Forward Previous Intersection Previous Signal Previous Node Go Backward Step Backward Go North Go South Go East Go West Step North Step South Step East Step West Synchronize Clocks Synchronize Now Synch Point prepares Tru Traffic to accept the geographic coordinates of the next intersection by voice command To use this command you must first manually open the Intersection Parameters window and click the button This is equivalent to clicking the button on the geographic coordinates window to advance the window to next intersection in the reverse direction This prepares Tru Traffic to accept the geographic coordinates of the previo
36. The vertical scale typically shows a user show the entire arterial travel time for each run selected number of signal cycle lengths and the plotted trajectories wrap around to the first visible cycle whenever they depart from the last cycle The plots mainly show the relation of trip log ran The diagrams mainly show the relation of trip log trajectories to each other run trajectories to the signal timings Trip log run trajectories for only one direction of Trip log run trajectories for both directions of travel may be included on the plot This ensures travel may be viewed on the diagram This is greater accuracy in the travel distances between important since the diagram is already showing links To see the trajectories for the other the signal timings for both directions of travel as direction of travel you must create a second plot well The position of the intersections on the plot is The position of the intersections on the diagrams always determined by the average of the actual is determined entirely by the user travel distance of each trip log run included in the declared distance from the previous intersection plot This last item has an implication worth mention The various plotted trip log runs don t all necessarily agree on what the travel distance is for a given link regardless of whether this distance is determined by an average of the plotted trip log runs or a user declared value Where the travel distance for a
37. Then drag the newly pasted placemark to the correct location As noted in the previous step to drag it you have to first right click on it and choose Properties The advantage of making the second placemark by duplicating the first is that if the first one already has an Intersection ID Number in its name or description that Intersection ID Number gets copied to the duplicate so when you paste everything back into Tru Traffic it will automatically assign it to the correct intersection If you find an intersection with no placemarks add placemarks by clicking the Add Placemark button on the toolbar and dragging the new placemark to the correct location You may want to insert the Intersection ID Number into the placemark name or description following the format D 123 or 123 so Tru Traffic will automatically assign it to the correct intersection when you transfer back to Tru Traffic When you ve finished follow the steps above to Transfer Intersection Locations from Google Earth to Tru Traffic Collect Geographic Coordinates for Your Network l In Google Earth add a pair of placemarks for each intersection by clicking the Add Placemark button on the toolbar and dragging the new placemark to the correct location You may want to insert the Intersection ID Number into the placemark name or description following the format ID 123 or 123 so Tru Traffic will automatically assign it to the correct intersection when you transfer back
38. Time vs Distance Measuring the travel distance between intersections Calculating the optimal relative offset between intersections for a given direction of travel Calculating the Design Speed between intersections Calculating the start up lost time for the through movement along the artery at an intersection Color coding the links on the Network View page 45 according to a summary of the average link speed of a selected set of Trip Logs 51 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination To display trip logs on a diagram window at the correct offset you should synchronize the clocks before you record the trip log All other purposes are served by trip logs independent of whether the clocks were synchronized To record a trip log you must first start tracking with the GPS receiver Once tracking begins click z Start Logging Trips th button or say Start Trip if voice command recognition is enabled to begin recording a trip log Click the baal Stop Logging Trips recognition is enabled to stop the recording button or say Stop Trip if voice command Warning It is not safe to operate a computer including laptop and notebook computers while operating a vehicle If you wish to record a trip log have someone else drive the vehicle while you operate the computer You take full responsibility and accept all liability for any damage or injury that may occur as a result of your operating a computer
39. To this default value Offset Reference boint for Offsets Protected Turn Phase Sequence Offset of the green band s if it See above description isn t locked Width of the green band s if it See above description isn t locked Offset of green band at boundary See above description intersections only if it isn t locked Offset amp width of the green See above description band s if they re not locked The Split of the overlapping Sets it to be equal movement if using split phasing Offset of the green band s if it See above description isn t locked The Protected Turn Phase Sets the opposing Protected Turn Phase Sequence in the opposite direction Sequence to be the opposite Split Lead or Split and the Splits of the overlapping Lag and sets the Splits of the overlapping movements if using split phasing movements to be equal The Minimum Splits and Sets it to be equal Clearance Times of the overlapping movements 1f using split phasing Downstream Saturation Flow Sets it to match the total through Saturation Flow 243
40. Traffic ensures that all timing parameters for the two intersections remain identical You can change any one of these parameters at either intersection and Tru Traffic makes the equivalent change at the other How do I set up time space diagrams for three arteries that intersect around a triangular block or How do I handle an artery which changes directions as it runs through my grid Suppose you have three arteries A B and C intersecting around a triangular block as shown in the figure below l In A s arterial timings diagram set the Forward Direction to North Set B s to East 2 Set C s Forward Direction to either North or East your choice In the C arterial diagram at the A intersection locally override the Forward Direction setting it to East and at the B intersection locally override the Forward Direction setting it to North 3 Link everything between the arterial diagrams at their common intersections 3A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 225 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination How do I declare a split phase or phasing in which the northbound and southbound movements do not overlap Set the northbound Protected Turn Phase Sequence to Split Lead
41. You can tell whether the clocks are synchronized by observing the GPS tracking marker on the diagram If the marker crosses the cycle boundaries the offset 0 lines at the correct moments so the phases of the signals in the field coincide with the GPS tracking marker crossing the corresponding signal phases in the diagram then the clocks are synchronized Tru Traffic can mark the current time with a horizontal line to make this comparison easier The clock synchronization is used to determine e The offset of the current position marker on diagram windows when tracking your position and speed with the GPS receiver This being the case the Synchronized Time affects the playing of 50 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 sounds to alert you that your vehicle 1s projected to arrive at the next signal near a red to green transition The offset on the diagrams of any trip logs you record Once recorded the trip logs retain a record of the Synchronized Time in effect while they were recorded so thereafter their offsets do not depend on the satellites time or your computer system s time The optional columns in the Travel Time and Delay Reports that involve the Start of Through Green time e g GST CGST GCT CGCT and any user defined formulas page 84 involving these It is useful to know what the clock synchronization does not affect There are many useful things you can do with GPS tracking even when the Synchronized Time is not quite accur
42. above i e North East South then West Note that the labels refer to the approach direction not the direction of travel 3 The first column of each of the approach volumes lines is ignored because it is assumed to contain the approach label 4 The second third and fourth columns of the approach lines contain the volumes for the left turn through and right turn movements in that order The volumes must be separated by either a space tab or comma and can have any amount of additional white space spaces or commas Note that the column alignment is not important What is important is that there be four columns the first with some sort of label and the following three with numbers Volumes of 0 are accepted 5 Note that although Tru Traffic ignores the contents first line and the first column of the file nonetheless it does insist that there be something there It is ok to leave the first line blank since even a blank line has an end of line character but it is not ok to leave the first columns blank Moreover since the space character is a column delimiter the label in the first column must not contain any spaces although it may be surrounded by any number of spaces 144 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Approach Left Through Right North 153 638 84 East 79 497 76 South 95 552 89 West 83 411 65 Table 5 The contents of an example Volumes Text File See text for more details Because of the looser rules u
43. and that in the southbound direction to Split Lag Set the northbound and southbound through Splits to their correct values See the discussion below for information on how to declare northbound and southbound movements which are not consecutive that is the northbound movements are followed by the westbound movements and the southbound movements are followed by the eastbound movements How do I set the phase sequence to indicate that the northbound through amp left phase and the southbound through amp left phase are not consecutive Set the phase sequences on both the artery and the cross street to Split Lead and Split Lag then use the phase numbers to specify the actual order in which the phases are served For example suppose the approaches are served in the order NB EB SB WB Note that NB and SB are not consecutive and EB and WB likewise To specify this phasing set the NB and EB phase sequences to Split Lead and the SB and WB phase sequences will then be Split Lag Then set the phase numbers to e NB phase 1 EB phase2 e SB phase 3 and e WB phase 4 On each approach you ll set these phase numbers for both the through and the protected turn but this should be automatic provided you re using Split Lead Split Lag phasing How do I declare an overlapped cross traffic turn phase that is a cross traffic turn movement served by both leading and lagging phases Earlier versions of Tru Traffic had no straight forw
44. annotation to appear to annotate the Network View at the mouse location Click on an existing annotation in the Network View to edit it A border edit box appears around the selected annotation when it s in edit mode Annotations may be pretty much any length You may change the font size or style of the entire annotation by right clicking within the edit box and choosing the Font command The font change applies to the selected text or to the entire annotation if no text is selected Annotations may have a transparent or opaque background of any color depending on whether you want its bounding box to hide what s underneath on the Network View Right click within the edit box and choose Background Color to toggle between opaque and transparent backgrounds or to set the background color The edit box is always opaque so a change to a transparent background is not evident until you close the edit box B m You may specify that an annotation be visible on the Network View only when certain Timing Plans are selected To do this right click on the edit box and choose Visible in Timing Plan An annotation may be visible in one or more selected timing plans or of course in all timing plans 44 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Double click on the selected annotation s edit box to move it by dragging the interior or resize it by dragging one of the edge controls Annotations may be pretty much any size To delete an annotation either e Righ
45. appear in the header footer of diagrams whenever you create them These default images are always stored in your user preferences by file reference only so any changes to the image file external to Tru Traffic always affect your default header footers in the user preferences Choose a header footer location with the radio buttons left right or center top or bottom Click the Browse button to select an image for the selected header footer location and use the Height amp Width boxes to set the logo size You may use the Visible check box to hide an image while maintaining a record of the graphic and its size The Save Mainly by Reference check box stores in the newly created diagram data files Dgm 182 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 a reference to the image file in addition to the actual image so any changes to the image file external to Tru Traffic automatically affects the header footer in the arterial timings diagrams When the box is not checked changes to the image file do not affect the header footer in the arterial timings diagrams until you explicitly browse for and select that image file again for a header footer Either way the contents of the image file are also stored in the diagram data file so the header footer logos remain intact when you share the file with others Layout Misc This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has miscellaneous options for the appearance of the arterial timings diagram Sho
46. arrow or abbreviation for the intersection movements along the artery at each intersection This option is available only if you ve opted to Show the Arterial Volumes on the diagram If you ve also opted to Show the Side Street Volumes the Volume Units will be shown along with them as well Volume Label This set of radio buttons indicates how the Volumes for the intersection movements are labeled on the 178 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 diagram with either amovement arrow or atwo letter abbreviation e g NT SL ET WL or athree letter abbreviation e g NBT SBL EBT WBL for each intersection This option is available only if you ve also opted to Show the Arterial Volumes Show Volumes on Just One Cycle This check box indicates whether the Volumes should be labeled on all cycles in the diagram or on just one cycle to reduce clutter This option is available only if you ve also opted to Show the Arterial Volumes as labels on the diagram Layout Bands This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has options for the appearance of the Green Bands on the arterial timings diagram Show Band Speeds This is a check box indicating whether on Time Space and Time Location diagrams the Design Speeds of the green bands are shown explicitly when drawing the diagram e g 32 2 mph or 45 7 kph When checked the Design Speed is displayed on the diagram at the beginning of the arterial green bands and a
47. button on the Tool Bar or e click the Network Parameters command in the View Menu or click the Cycle Length in the upper left corner of the on the Diagram Window or right click on the Diagram Window or the Network View selecting Network Parameters from the pop up menu 96 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Timing Plan Name The name of the currently selected signal Timing Plan may be up to 63 characters long Although Tru Traffic does not enforce is generally you ll want to use a unique name for each timing plan as Tru Traffic uses the name throughout to reference the timing plans When there is more than one timing plan the Timing Plan Name appears at the top of the drawn arterial timings diagram along with the Name of Arterial Diagram The Ci a timing plan dependent parameters in Tru Traffic appear in blue while the timing plan independent parameters appear in black Cycle Length The Cycle Length of the signals on the artery is measured in seconds If the Vertical Scale of any diagram window isn t locked as described on page 101 then changing the Cycle Length causes Tru Traffic to automatically reset the Vertical Scale of the diagram to accommodate exactly the desired number of cycles on the diagram you can then override this Vertical Scale if you desire You can prevent the automatic resetting of the Vertical Scale by setting the number of cycles parameter next to the Vertical Scale in the Arterial Diagram Pa
48. cause this and each has its own solution Most of them can be detected by carefully inspecting the Network View We ll consider them step by step The two figures below illustrate some common errors in specifying geographic coordinates and in recorded trip logs errors which cause problems in generating the Travel Time amp Delay Report and Plots from Trip Logs The game here is that a run must pass through a red circle in order for the software to conclude that the run passed through an intersection Furthermore a run must pass through at least two consecutive red circles to be counted as having entered the artery 231 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Correct The point lies between the travel time runs and the red circle straddles the runs Incorrect The red circle straddles the travel time runs in only one direction You probably collected just one GPS point in the western lane Collect a second point in the eastern lane to balance the first pulling the centroid to the center of the intersection Or use Google Earth to add the balancing point Incorrect The red circle is too small to straddle the travel time runs You probably collected just one GPS point or your points are too close together or you ve declared too few lanes Collect a pair of points straddling the center of the intersection and bounding the intersection Or use Google Earth to add edit the pai
49. consider the button that reads Start GPS Tracking Tru Traffic reports to the SRE that the following spoken commands are synonyms for this button Start Tracking Start GPS GPS On Connect GPS However the only variant accepted by this version of the SRE is Start GPS Tracking With this caveat on your choice of which version of the Microsoft Speech Recognition Engine to use the rest of this discussion applies only to the SAPI 5 or SAPI 5 1 variant of the SRE and gives the special considerations in using that version If you re using a newer version instead then stop reading here and perhaps review the comments in the above paragraph for how to use the newer versions and use the tutorial that comes with your version of the SRE for further details Tru Traffic uses SAPI 5 Speech Application Programming Interface version 5 to interact with the speech recognition engine Various incarnations of MS Office XP include Speech Tools by default which has an SAPI 5 compatible speech recognition engine Speech Tools is accessible from the Control Panel See the operating system s online help for more details on installing and using the Speech Tools If you don t already have one you may download a free SAPI 5 speech recognition engine from http www microsoft com speech but I think that requires downloading the entire SDK which you probably don t want to do The voice command recognition works best with a high quality head
50. correctly the raw data will start arriving Start GPS Tracki and appearing a few seconds after you click the _ Stat GPS Tracking button The appearance of the data depends on which type of GPS receiver is connected to your computer 1 NMEA 0183 Standard Compatible 2 DeLorme Earthmate 3 Garmin Proprietary 70 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Receivers compatible with the NMEA 0183 Standard will send data that should look something like the following SGPRMC 204520 A 3634 6681 N 12149 4375 W 0 0 0 0 260602 14 7 E A 3B SGPRMB A A n n nr gg A A 0B SGPGGA 204520 3634 6681 N 12149 4375 W 1 05 3 0 56 5 M 29 6 M 40 SGPGLL 3634 6681 N 12149 4375 W 204520 A A 55 SGPBOD T M 47 SGPBWC 204520 T M N A 7A SGPVTG 0 0 T 345 3 M 0 0 N 0 0 K 4F SGPXTE A A N A 51 SPGRME 12 4 M 18 4 M 22 2 M 16 PGRMZ 185 f 3 17 SPGRMM WGS 84 06 SGPRMC 204522 A 3634 6680 N 12149 4374 W 0 0 0 0 260602 14 7 E A 39 SGPRMB A A rn rrr gg A A 0B GPGGA 204522 3634 6680 N 12149 4374 W 1 05 3 0 55 4 M 29 6 M 40 SGPGLL 3634 6680 N 12149 4374 W 204522 A A 57 SGPBOD T M 47 GPBWC 204522 T M N A 78 SGPVTG 0 0 T 345 3 M 0 0 N 0 0 K 4F SGPXTE A A N A 51 SPGRME 12 4 M 18 3 M 22 1 M 12 SPGRMZ 182 3 10 SPGRMM WGS 84 06 R R R R Every 1 or 2 seconds another set of lines should arrive If you don t see anything a
51. default Turn Phase Sequence is set in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog but any intersection can override the default The protected cross traffic Turn Phase Sequences may be edited in the Intersection Parameters dialog or with one restriction directly on the diagram window by selecting the intersection and clicking the right mouse button and selecting Phase Sequence or Side Street Phase from the pop up menu You may also select the intersection and press CtrI P to edit the Phase Sequence The latter method is usually the simplest for finding phase sequences leading to the widest green bands The restriction is that in the diagram window you may only exchange the order in which existing protected turning movements occur with respect to the opposing through movements you may not add or remove protected turning movements If you have checked the One way box in the Arterial Diagram Parameters dialog for one of the directions of travel then Tru Traffic assumes the artery is a one way street and sets the protected turn 127 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Phase Sequences to None In this case you cannot modify the protected turn Phase Sequences On Platoon Progression diagrams only To specify a permitted cross traffic turn set the protected Turn Phase Sequence to None meaning no protected turn phase and check the corresponding Permitted box Tru Traffic uses the permitted movement model develope
52. dialog indicates whether to show on T Time Space diagrams an approximate acceleration curve on bands started p 137 from the side street based on the difference in Startup Lost Times of arterial through and side street turning movements Turning movements from the side street especially cross traffic turning movements make slower progress along the artery after getting the green Initially their not even oriented along the artery so even when they start moving they re still making no progress along the artery until they can begin the turn and during the turn they tend to maintain a uniform speed They don t begin accelerating along the artery until well after the signal turns green When the downstream intersection is far away the band from the side street turning movements has the same slope based on the Design Speed as the arterial through movement it has just a different offset due to the Startup Lost Time That is after accelerating the side street turners achieve the free flow speed along the link For intersections spaced closely together the side street turners never get to achieve the free flow speed along the link as they lose time in startup and in reorienting the vehicles In this case a more realistic Time Space diagram would show a different slope for the green band of the side street turning movement 7 A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America Chi
53. don t expect the Standard Deviation to change much as you collect more runs If the MOE in question follows a normal distribution 1 e tends to fall on a bell curve then 6896 of the runs will be within one Standard Deviation of the mean and 95 of the runs will be within two Standard Deviations of the mean e Standard Errors of the Averages The Standard Error gives a measure of how accurately your runs measure the true mean for any given MOE e g travel time delay etc It gives some indication of the quality of your statistics an estimate of how far off from the true mean or average your measured mean lies Assuming you have a statistically significant number of runs in the report then we expect the Standard Error to continually decrease as you collect more runs Empty Rows for the Unrepresented Trip Log Types Before After amp Neither If you re performing additional analysis on the TT amp D report in Excel or some other spreadsheet program you may prefer the consistency of having a predictable number of rows in the report cumulative summaries and for each node in the report directional summaries This option will include empty rows in the report even for those trip log types that have no representation and are unused in the summaries Percent Differences or percent change This is included only on comparative TT amp D reports that is reports that include trip logs of types both Before and After Range of Dates
54. each file format contains some data the other lacks When saving an AAP file Tru Traffic makes reasonable assumptions to fill in the missing data The saved AAP file data will be reasonable but may not be exactly what you intend To avoid this Tru Traffic can refer to an existing AAP file the reference file upon filling in the missing data Ideally the reference AAP file describes the same artery If you don t use a reference file you should review the exported file in AAPEX to make sure all the data is accurate Note especially the Arterial Parameters Timing Plan the phase codes the Approach Data Number of Lanes Peak Hour Factors Sneakers Saturation Flows and their adjustment factors Storage and Minimum Phase Times and the Run Instructions AAP files are helpful in transferring the arterial timings diagram parameters among TRANSYT 7F PASSER I1 90 and other programs supporting the AAP file format For more information on using Tru Traffic with the AAP see Tru Traffic and the Arterial Analysis Package on page 241 214 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 CopyFromDgmFile Utility CopyFromDgmkFile is a utility program for Tru Traffic users Its purpose is to transfer selected intersection or traffic signal parameters from one diagram file Dgm to another This is useful if you maintain multiple timing plans in separate files for a given set of intersections If you prefer to maintain all timing plans in a common file use t
55. either because the wrong value was entered or because you took a GPS reading on one side of the intersection but forgot to take a corresponding reading on the opposite side See Step 2 for more information about specifying the Geographic Coordinates of the intersections 5 Right click on the Network View and check the item Show Intersection Extents to view the effective extent of the intersections This is a circle centered at the intersection with a radius equal to the half width of the intersection A trip log must cross this region to count as passing through the intersection Viewing the extent makes it easier to diagnose why a trip log 1s either skipping an intersection or passing through one twice You can also detect when an extent is too large usually due to a bad or misplaced coordinate measurement 6 Make sure the Number of Lanes and Lane Widths are set correctly at each intersection for each direction of travel along the artery Tru Traffic uses these numbers to estimate the intersection width T If the problem still persists it might be that there s a fairly wide median unaccounted for in the intersection width estimate At present Tru Traffic has no provision for you to enter the median width directly but you can effectively enter the total intersection width Do this by using the cy Bet GPS GPS receiver connected to the computer and clicking the ee button to add measurements for the geographic coordinates of the center of t
56. file The DAT style file for Layout data doesn t contain any street names in it only the CSV style file has street names See page 210 for more details When I try to view a timings report I get an error message The filename directory name or volume label syntax is incorrect or When I try to print a 237 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination diagram or a timings report I get an error message The filename directory name or volume label syntax is incorrect vou probably don t have a printer driver installed for your operating system To generate a preview of the timings report Tru Traffic must query the printer driver for some properties of your printer If the operating system has no printer installed these queries return this error message To install a printer driver click on the My Computer icon on the desktop and select Printers Add Printer I can t run Tru Traffic When I try to start it it immediately closes Or it warns me that it s running in Demo mode but closes as soon as I click OK Tru Traffic needs a printer driver installed for initialization of the report generator Make sure you have a printer driver installed If you don t have a printer then install any printer driver to a File instead of on the network or parallel or serial port I like installing a Postscript printer e g the HP 4550 Color PS to a file because it also gives me an easy way to create pdf files One use
57. five different categories of vehicular speeds and for each category define the associated speed and on Time Space diagrams the parameters for any green bands you wish displayed on the diagram at that speed Mane eis mmee Green Bands Lanes Youmes uns oor y Design Speed 132 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The categories are Design Speed Posted Speed Limit e Bus Speed e Light Rail Speed Bicycle Speed Green bands for any of these categories may be defined in terms of the Green Band Action Offset and Width In the Bus and Light Rail categories offer the additional options of specifying the time of day of their green bands for example according to the transit schedule the time interval between bands also according to the transit schedule and whether the band is constrained to start during effective green time of the signal which gives you a means of modeling a band for a preemptive transit system or a transit system that does not affect the normal traffic flow or its signal for example an exclusive rail or lane on say a bridge When using the option to automatically Optimize Arterial Offsets etc page 163 under the Optimize menu you may have the optimization algorithm consider the bands for more than one speed category using weighting factors to specify the relative import of the respective speed categories There are weighting factors for the Cars band which uses the Design Spee
58. for an artery a set of intersecting arteries or a signalized network You may view the entire diagram or set of diagrams on the screen at once You can easily adjust any parameter cycle length offset phase sequence splits scales green bands volumes etc for any intersection as often as desired and instantly see the effects of the change Thus you can quickly optimize the parameters Tru Traffic accommodates any number of intersections arteries and timing plans limited only by available memory double half 2 3x 3 2x 1 3x 3x 1 4x 3 4x 4 3x and 4x cycling English or metric units eleven different Offset Reference Points and all phase sequences two phase leading protected turn phases lagging protected turn phases permitted turns and lead lag combinations Time Space diagrams may display green bands for various speed or band categories or modes of transportation e g Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Bus Speed Light Rail Speed or Bicycle Speed as described on page 132 and the automatic optimization may coordinate the signals for a user weighted average of these modes transportation page 163 Tru Traffic allows multiple timing plans page 96 and handles signalized networks page 16 or intersecting arteries by allowing multiple diagrams each in its own diagram window and each representing a different artery The common intersections are linked across diagram windows so that you may edit the parameters in any diagram
59. green bands starting tapering or clipping at the intersection to their default values as follows Changing Resets green Resets green intersection band Offset band width Protected Turn Yes No Phase Sequence Adjusted Cycle see note Yes Length Note This parameter is reset only if the green band tapers there The ability to change the protected turn Phase Sequences of the selected intersection directly on the Diagram Window is limited Each time you press the Ctrl P key Tru Traffic changes to the protected turn Phase Sequences to a valid alternative that is one that has the same protected turns defined Thus a Lead is swapped with a Lag but not with a None Successively striking the Ctrl P key causes Tru Traffic to cycle through all valid combinations of protected turn Phase Sequences If the protected turn Phase Sequence for one direction of travel is None no protected turn then striking the Ctrl P key has no effect on that protected turn Phase Sequence Zoom in on Diagram Window Use the Zoom Factor drop down list box on the Tool Bar to set a factor by which the Horizontal and Vertical Scales are multiplied for the diagram displayed in the window This can aid you in viewing diagrams which would otherwise be too large to fit on the screen It is also useful when you wish to zoom in on a particular region of the artery for greater detail The Zoom Factor can be any of a variety of values such 60 100 and 200 or
60. have a separate details table for each run and for the Plots from Trip Logs which have a separate trace for each run Joining To join two trip logs together into one longer trip log navigate first to the GPS View Trip Logs page p 51 Click the first trip log to select it then Ctrl click the second trip log to select it also so both are highlighted Then right click and choose Join Trip Logs from the pop up menu Trip Log Details Table You may view a Details Table for a trip log by right clicking in the list of trip logs and choosing View Details Table from the pop up menu or by right clicking the trip log displayed in any window Diagram Network View or trip log Plots and choosing Trip Log View Details Table from the pop up menu The table allows you to perform manual editing disabling spurious points or splitting the trip log into two e g to separate individual runs of the trip log To join or to rejoin two trip logs together select them both in the list of trip logs then right click and choose Join Trip Logs from the pop up menu When you select one or more points in the table the points are highlighted in any other applicable windows Diagram Network View or trip log Plots so you can know where you re editing The reverse is not true selecting trip log points in the other applicable windows does not highlight the points in the details table The main reason is that mouse clicks on trip log points or elsewhere
61. here assume you re using a SAPI 5 or SAPI 5 1 version of the Microsoft Speech Recognition Engine See the discussion on Voice Command Recognition p 73 for details on using newer versions of the Microsoft Speech Recognition Engine such as the one introduced with Windows Vista 1 Create a diagram window for the artery you wish to study or open an existing diagram data file for this artery 2 Travel to one of the intersections along this artery taking the portable computer and GPS receiver with you 3 Connect either an RS 232 cable or a USB cable as appropriate from your GPS receiver to the serial or USB port of your laptop 4 Click the 9 button on the Tool Bar to open the GPS Tracking view 5 In the Setup page specify the type of GPS receiver you have and the serial port to which it is connected The default values for the other setup parameters are usually ok 6 Click the QD Star GPS Tracking button or say Start GPS if voice command recognition is enabled to initialize the GPS receiver The status on the Position page will soon change from Not Connected to Searching for Fix and eventually to Tracking 20 GPs view cJ c E Position Satellites Clocks Trip Logs Options Setup Diagnostics GPS Receiver Type NMEA 0183 Standard Compatible 2 SerialPort COMS Baud Rate an Data Bits 8 X Stop Bits 1 X Parity None Hardware Fl
62. if your user defined column is summarized as the Calculation result at the averages for all trip logs then the value displayed in the report summary would be calculated as Avg CTL Avg CTT Note that in the former case your formula is calculated first at each trip log run then the average is taken while in the latter case the average of each of the variables in your formula is first calculated then your formula is calculated using those average results The difference is important for example in the case where you define a formula to give a numeric value for the arterial level of service based on the actual travel speed where the design speed or free flow speed is 40 mph with A 1 B 2 C3 etc LOS if CAS 13 6 if CAS 17 5 if CAS lt 22 4 if CAS lt 28 3 if CAS lt 35 2 1 Note that for readability formulas can include tab and end of line characters In this case you probably want the numeric LOS in the summary to always be a whole number value corresponding to a letter rather than a fractional value You d want to first calculate the actual travel speed averaged over all trip log runs then use the result to calculate the numeric value for the level of service and have the summary to show this numeric LOS value You probably would not want to first calculate each trip log run s numeric value for level of service then show in the summary this numeric LOS averaged over all trip log runs In this
63. in the Lane Group Parameters dialog box The Volume is used only on Platoon Progression diagrams and for importing and exporting UTDF files see page 210 Tru Traffic uses the Volume to determine the platoon density bands and also 143 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination to calculate the actual Saturation Flow using the method prescribed in Chapter 9 of the Highway Capacity Manual You may use the Read button to read the volumes from a Volume File Use the Bau button to save the volumes in a Volume File A Volumes File is a file that contains the hourly approach volumes for a single intersection Tru Traffic can read volumes from two different types of Volumes Files TMC Volume file in the format documented with Synchro 4 5 amp 6 and Volumes Text File Tru Traffic can write volumes in the Volumes Text File format An example Volume Text File will serve to illustrate the format For an intersection with the volumes as shown in Figure 6 an applicable Volume Text File is shown in Table 5 This is the format in which Tru Traffic saves a Volume Text File For reading volumes from a file Tru Traffic uses less strict rules Figure 6 Sample volumes at an intersection to illustrate the format of a Volumes File See the 1 The first line of the file is assumed to text for more details contain column labels and it is ignored 2 The next four lines contain approach volumes in the order shown
64. in the signal controllers and o the ability to record trips of almost indefinite length you don t have to worry about GPS memory or battery life if the GPS and laptop are plugged into the vehicle s electrical system If yours is a Garmin GPS receiver you must use the Garmin Proprietary interface mode if you wish to download pre recorded trip logs directly from the GPS receiver using the button A FAQ on page 223 gives additional details when doing this with USB only Garmin GPS receivers But with Garmin GPS receivers the downloaded trip logs don t provide any speed or heading measurements these have to be inferred This reduces the accuracy of Speed vs Distance plots page 92 and the effectiveness of the Trip Log Filter page 62 Figure 4 below illustrates the noise in a speed plot caused by these inaccuracies To create the figure a single Garmin GPS receiver was set up for recording a trip log twice it internally recorded its track log for subsequent downloading and simultaneously it was connected to a computer so Tru Traffic could record the trip log from the GPS reports every second Figure 4 overlays plots of the two recordings of the trip log speed showing frequent discrepancies in the range of 2 4 mph You should be aware of this accuracy vs convenience trade off in deciding whether carry the GPS solo in the field or carry in addition a laptop computer with Tru Traffic installed The concern here can extend beyond mere c
65. in these windows are already reserved for other purposes e g dragging an offset and I haven t decided yet how or whether to distinguish mouse clicks for selecting trip log points from mouse clicks for the other purposes As compensation when you let the mouse hover over a trip log point in any of these other applicable windows a balloon hint pops up indicating which trip log and which point is nearest the mouse and exactly where that point lies 61 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Click column header buttons to sort or Drag column dividers Speed mph Heading d Distance fe Longitude Latitude 4 63 62 0 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 29 33 17 98 43 38 Ww 78 49 0009 N 35 23 8578 4 64 63 0 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 28 91 18 05 42 65 W 78 48 9983 N 35 23 8645 v 65 64 0 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 28 54 18 24 42 23 W 78 48 9956 N35 238711 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 2825 1858 W78 483928 N35 238775 3 N 35 23 883 W 78 48 9841 N 35 23 8960 W 78 48 9813 N35 233018 W 78 48 9786 N35 239078 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 26 68 69 0 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 26 28 20 21 384 70 0 06 0126 James St 126 06 0125 Front St 125 26 27 19 39 38 28 Disable
66. information on downloading with USB only Garmin GPS receivers Splitting A trip log may contain more than one run and they may be along one or more arteries For some purposes e g including in or excluding from a Travel Time amp Delay Report p 78 it s all or nothing you may include a trip log and all runs therein or you may exclude it and all runs therein If you need more detailed control than all or nothing for a trip log that is if you wish to exclude some but not all runs within a trip log then you ll need to split that trip log into multiple trip logs There are a couple of ways to do this 1 In any window where you see the trip log plotted 1 e the Arterial Timings Diagram the Network View or the Plots from Trip Logs p 92 right click on a point where you want to split the trip log e g at a U turn and choose Trip Log Split Trip Log at this Point 2 Inthe Details Table for a Trip Log p 61 select a point a row and click the Split Trip Log button To open the Details Table for a Trip Log o Inthe GPS View Trip Logs page p 51 right click on a Trip Log and choose View Details Table o Jn any window where you see the trip log plotted right click on a Trip Log and choose Trip Log View Details Table 60 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 For most purposes it is not necessary to separate the trip logs into their individual runs as Tru Traffic does this automatically for the TT amp D reports which
67. is the average of the differences 1s equal to the difference of the averages The Standard Deviation of the Differences Above we found the variance o o and subsequently the standard deviation o by comparing each measurement b with the average of the measurements b We summed the squares of their differences b bY then divided by the number of terms to find the average as in Eq 3 Similarly we ll 89 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination calculate the variance of the differences o y by comparing each possible difference gb for all possible pairings of i and j with the average of the differences a b o Y 5 a B 8 These simplifying steps used the definitions of the averages Eq 1 and Eq 2 and similar definitions for a and b theaverage of aj and b y respectively Using Eq 5 it follows that c 0 0 Thatis the variance of the differences is equal to the sum of the variances This rule contrasts with the rule we found for the averages the variance of the differences is not the same as the difference the variances For the standard deviation of the differences we now have o V0 0 9 Since o gt and o are nonnegative it follows that c is greater than or equal to both c and o Propagation of Uncertainty As a point of interest note that we get the same result if we consider the standard deviations to be a measure of the predictive uncertain
68. is the case you ll need to respecify the geographic coordinates of each intersection using sufficient precision 9 If the problem still persists I probably haven t made Tru Traffic sufficiently tolerant of the imprecision of GPS readings Please let me know and send me your diagram data file so I can fix this problem In my Travel Time amp Delay Report the Stopped Delay is larger than the total Delay How is this possible Because of the way it s defined the total Delay can include compensating time time spent traveling faster than the design speed thereby making up for time lost earlier in the run or even running ahead of schedule If your trip log arrives at the next node ahead of schedule then the node to node Delay appears as a negative number 235 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination The Stopped Delay in contrast can never be negative by definition Even when the Delay exceeds the Stopped Delay it can still be unrealistically small In either case to prevent this situation make sure you set the Design Speed and the Design Distance to their proper values for each intersection Recall that the Delay 1s calculated as Delay TT RT which is difference between the actual measured Travel Time and the user specified running time which is given by RT Design Distance Design Speed Thus a proper calculation of the Delay depends on your entering realistic values for the Design
69. it may be To Fit which will ensure that the diagram is zoomed to fit the current window size While the Zoom Factor is To Fit you may resize the Diagram Window to zoom in and out on the diagram 32 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The Zoom Factor also applies to the Network View but with a somewhat different meaning In the Network View the base scale or 100 zoom level is the same as Zoom To Fit it means sufficient to display the entire artery or network in the current window size with only a thin margin A 200 zoom level then makes the displayed network about twice the current size of the Network View so you have to scroll to see the hidden parts of the network and resizing the window always changes the effective zoom level Zooming the Network View can make it easier to spot spurious points in trip logs for deletion When zoomed in right drag scrolls the either the Arterial Diagram window or the Network View The printed diagram always uses the unadjusted Scales i e without the Zoom Factor applied You may set the Default Zoom Factor on the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog For long arteries or arteries with many intersections the spacing of the intersections on the diagram can become crowded at the default Horizontal Scale making it difficult to see the green bands or make out the signal timing details Zooming doesn t help because the text grows with the rest of the diagram In these cases you may drag a box on
70. list Use the f button in the Outline View to find all links to the intersection selected in the Arterial Diagram Outline List The links to the selected intersection are moved to the top of the Intersection Links List and if necessary the list is scrolled so the first link at the top of the list is visible Use the hs button in the Outline View to remove the link to an intersection selected in the Intersection Links List Only the link which you select is broken any other linked intersections remain linked Use the EJ button in the Outline View to view bring to the front the currently selected diagram 37 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 38 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Network View The Network View of the diagram data file shows a sort of bird s eye view of all arteries and intersections Arteries are shown as lines and intersections are shown as dots on the lines If everything is linked between two or more intersections along different arterial diagrams the arteries are shown as intersecting at the common intersection Sometimes Tru Traffic lays out the intersecting arteries in an especially crude approximation to reality See Adjusting the Network View page 42 for information on how to improve the representation You may show the Network View by clicking on the Bt button in the Tool Bar or by selecting the Network View command under the View Menu To navigate within the Net
71. m s Node Info N Latitude dddmm mmmm 46 86771 N Latitude dddmmmmmm 36 85301 N Latitude rad 36 8476 S Latitude deg 36 83028 B S Latitude d m s Boush St amp Brambleton Ave 36 85428 S Latitude dddmm mmmm Boush St amp Bute St 36 85303 Boush St amp City Hall Ave 36 8482 S Latitude dddmmmmmm Boush St amp College Place 36 85037 S Latitude rad Boush St amp Freemason St 36 85167 3 wow C CQ 4 UNBE eee wne oo Hom n Boush St amp Olney Rd 36 85627 76 2908 Boush St amp Plume St 36 84769 76 29331 Boush St amp Tazwell St 36 84962 76 29223 Boush St amp Virginia Beach Blvd 36 85715 76 29094 Brambleton Ave amp Kimball Terrace 36 84357 76 26645 ES morre n maroc onanan me meee Rie 1 116 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 There are two reasons for taking the average of a list of GPS measurements to determine the geographic coordinates Safety The geographic coordinates of the center of the intersection is given by the average of measurements straddling the center Thus rather than risking your personal safety by standing in the center of the intersection to take a GPS reading you may stand at each of the corners of the intersection or any other set of points that straddle the center and take measurements at each of those points Or you may take measurements while riding in a moving vehicle by clicking the D Get GPS Measurement Vutton when you cross say
72. marks or grid lines representing regular intervals determined by the Seconds Per Mark parameter These are labeled 3 in Figure 1 You may set your choice of tic marks or grid lines in the Layout page of the Preferences dialog see page 176 If you have any recorded Trip Logs with a GPS receiver see page 48 they may be plotted on the diagram as trajectories graphically showing where delay occurred which signals you stopped at how long the queue was and where you entered or left the green bands or platoons If you observe any A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 28 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 spurious points in any of the trip logs you may manually delete these points by carefully pointing to them with the mouse cursor then clicking Alt right button You may also use the Trip Log Details Table page 61 to manually identify and remove spurious points or the Trip Log Filter page 62 to automatically do so Tru Traffic places the name of the diagram cycle length and the current date and time across the top of the diagram region 1 in Figure 1 If you prefer you can suppress the date and time in the Layout page of the Preferences dialog page 176 Finally Tru Traffic places the nam
73. mph 8 km hr after exceeding 15 mph until it once again exceeds 15 mph 24 1 km hr but you may override the defaults for the two threshold speeds in the Preferences dialog e The cumulative stopped delay since the beginning of the run e The time spent below two user specified speeds while traveling from the previous node e The cumulative time spent below two user specified speeds since the beginning of the run e The free flow travel time spent above the two user specified speeds while traveling from the previous node e The cumulative free flow travel time spent above the two user specified speeds since the beginning of the run e The actual average or effective speed in travel from the previous intersection e The cumulative actual average speed in travel to this intersection from the point of entry onto the artery 80 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The user specified Design Speed free flow speed or expected speed in travel from the previous intersection The user specified Posted Speed Limit in travel from the previous intersection The maximum speed reached in travel from the previous intersection The number of stops in travel from the previous intersection By default a stop is counted when the speed drops below 5 mph 8 km hr after exceeding 15 mph 24 1 km hr but you may override the defaults for the two threshold speeds in the Preferences dialog The cumulative number of stops in the run The travel dis
74. observe that platoons tend to disperse noticeably for a short time after which the platoons stop dispersing and the platoons remain roughly intact for long times You may simulate this behavior with the maximum Dispersion Time which sets an upper limit to the amount of time Tru Traffic allows platoons along the artery to disperse After platoons have progressed for this amount of time Tru Traffic effectively sets the Dispersion Factor to zero I know of no accepted best value for the maximum dispersion time but I believe it should not be less than the time it takes the platoon to accelerate to constant speed Strictly speaking the maximum 107 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination dispersion time should be the sum of a constant term plus a term proportional to the average platoon speed but this would introduce only a minor correction for which there is no accepted measure as far as I know One way The One way check box indicates whether the entire artery allows traffic flow in only one direction This option can be set for at most one direction of travel If the One way box is checked for one of the directions of travel Tru Traffic e Does not draw the side of the intersection signal strips or the green band that correspond to that direction of travel Changes the protected Turn Phase Sequences of the intersections to None since there is usually no protected cross traffic turning movement on a one way
75. on if something goes wrong Before saving a file the program will make a backup of the file in the subfolder named Backup of last saved 215 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination files so you can use that to recover from an unwanted change but it s a good idea to keep your own backup anyway in case you don t notice right away that something is wrong Checking the boxes next to the bold faced parameter group headings selects or unselects all parameters in that group The window is sizeable so you can drag the edge to enlarge it and get a better view of the settings How it Works The program uses the intersection ID number to match intersections between the two files For every intersection in the source file it looks for an intersection with a matching ID in each arterial timings diagram in the target file If it finds one it copies the selected parameters from the source intersection to the target intersection using the forward direction of their arteries to determine what their orientations of the approaches are N S E or W The timing parameters are copied for each movement using this orientation Caveats There is no check to verify that the phase numbers match before data is copied If a given ID is used for more than one intersection in the source file that is if the intersection appears in more than one diagram there is no check to verify that those intersections are linked or have identica
76. or right turn in the appropriate direction s of travel at the intersection plus the Start Up Lost Time This will be near the front of the platoon if a queue has built up at the intersection You may start green bands from the side street left and right turning movements as well For a cross traffic turning green band the default value of the Offset is the beginning of the green time for the cross traffic turn movement in the appropriate direction s of travel at the intersection plus the Start Up Lost Time For a with traffic turning green band the default value of the Offset is the beginning of the green time for through movement in the appropriate direction s of travel at the intersection plus the Start Up Lost Time Again this will be near the front of the platoon if a queue has built up at the intersection You may edit the band offset and width directly on the arterial timings diagram for intersections where a green band is started i e where the band action is set to Start by simply dragging the band limits directly on the arterial timing diagram An associated check box labeled Locked allows you to protect the band offset from being affected by changes to the offset splits turn phase sequence and or cycle length If the band offset isn t locked then doing any of the following causes Tru Traffic to reset the new green band Offset to its default value 1 Changing the Start Up Lost Time 2 Changing the Adjusted Cycle Len
77. particular plotted trip log run doesn t quite agree with the plotted travel distance along a given link the error is divided over the entire link uniformly in the case of the Speed or Time vs Distance plots As a result the horizontal scales can differ generally only slightly between the trip log runs on a link and they can differ for a given trip log run over the various links This is true for both the Trip Log Plots either Speed vs Distance or Time vs Distance and the Arterial Timings Diagrams You may control the default appearance of the plot labels in the Layout page the Preferences dialog Right click on the plot and choose Set Arterial Link Color to use one of the average link speed summaries for color coding the links on the Network View see page 45 The color speed bins are the 94 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog page 194 for transferring speeds to Google Earth 95 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Viewing amp Editing Parameters The View pull down menu contains various commands to view and edit the parameters You may edit the Network Arterial Diagram or Intersection parameters or edit the diagram directly in the diagram window Timing Plans Most of the management of signal timing plans is performed through the CA bi button on the Tool Bar You may add delete or select the currently viewed
78. phases using different split types If all splits are declared as Fixed Seconds an exceptional case arises and in order to avoid unused cycle time or switching the intersection out of coordination internally this is treated as though all splits were instead declared Fixed Percent That is when the Cycle Length is changed Tru Traffic will adjust all splits so that their fraction of the Adjusted Cycle Length is unchanged This is also true when the sum of the fixed splits exceeds the new Cycle Length in which case it is not possible for the fixed splits to have the same value in seconds with the new Cycle Length In this case Tru Traffic will warn you that even the fixed splits are being adjusted Walk Time The Walk Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement constrains the Split and the Cycle Length It is not used determine the effective Offset of the intersection s signal for any Offset Reference Point It is measured in seconds The default FDW Clearance Time may be specified on the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog box page 192 When using split phasing page 127 changing the Walk Time of either the through movement or 149 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination the cross traffic turning movement automatically changes the Walk Time of the other movement as well Tru Traffic will warn you if you should change the split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement to
79. recorded a trip log but it s empty or I connected my GPS and everything seemed to work fine for a few minutes but after a while the connection stopped working Turn off any power saving features of your laptop that might interrupt the serial port connection While tracking with the GPS receiver the marker on the diagram shows me at the wrong point in the cycle For example it shows me passing through a signal just after it turned red but actually I was well in the green time Assuming the Cycle Length and Splits in Tru Traffic are set correctly you need to synchronize the clocks between the traffic signals and the GPS satellites Effectively this tells the program when in absolute clock time the network wide zero occurs in the signal cycle The Travel Time amp Delay Report says that my recorded trip log stops before an intersection then resumes at the next intersection downstream or The TT amp D Report says that my trip log started at intersection X but it actually started at the previous intersection upstream See How Trip Logs are Processed page 196 for additional comments and definitions as background to this topic The general cause of this problem is that your trip log passes too far from where the Geographic Coordinates of the center of the intersection is declared to be located so Tru Traffic thinks that the trip bypassed the intersection e g along a side street or through a parking lot Any of a number of things can
80. regardless of direction of travel Start of second through movement The beginning of the green time for the second through movement along the artery at this intersection to be served regardless of direction of travel Start of the arterial phase The beginning of the service to the artery at this intersection regardless of the movement turning through or pedestrian Start of last through movement yellow The end of the green time or beginning of yellow for the last through movement along the artery at this intersection to be served regardless of direction of travel Start of first through movement yellow The end of the green time or beginning of yellow for the second to last through movement along the artery at this intersection to be served regardless of direction of travel Start of arterial phase yellow The end of the service to the artery at this intersection regardless of the movement turning through or pedestrian Start of last through movement FDW The end of the walk time or beginning of flashing don t walk for the last through movement along the artery at this intersection to be served regardless of direction of travel Start of first through movement FDW The end of the walk time or beginning of flashing don t walk for the second to last through movement along the artery at this intersection to be served regardless of direction of travel Start of arterial phase FDW
81. scope of subsequent operations e g Check All Right click on the trip log list or on a selected trip log for a pop up menu with additional options such as copying deleting exporting playing back or filtering a trip log viewing its details or editing its properties or joining together two selected trip logs You may copy trip logs and paste them in Google Earth to watch as an animation see page 201 Each trip log has a type either Before After Neither or Atypical The type of the trip log is used for calculating averages and differences in the Travel Time and Delay Reports page 78 Neither type trip logs may be included in the report but they will not be included in the before and after comparison Atypical type trip logs are never included in the report You may exclude any trip log from the report by simply leaving the box next to it unchecked when you generate the report but marking a trip log as 55 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Atypical effectively excludes it from all future reports without further intervention until you change the type back to Neither Before or After Use the Trip Log Properties dialog to set the type of a single trip log You may set the type of multiple trip logs in one operation selecting one or more trip logs right clicking on the list and choosing Trip Log Type from the popup menu The default name of a trip log is Trip Log
82. set of timings But these optimization and fine tuning techniques may not produce optimal timings according to everyone s way of thinking After using either command you may choose Undo from the Edit menu or press Ctrl Z to restore the previous timing settings The direct editing of timing parameters offsets amp turning phase sequences on the diagram window provide an easy way to manually optimize or fine tune the timings after or instead of the automatic optimization Minimize Timing Plan Transition This command under the Optimize Menu adjusts all the intersection Offsets as needed to minimize the transition time to or from this timing plan while preserving the coordination pattern You may choose the intersection s whose transition time s you want minimized The Offsets network wide are all shifted by the same amount in seconds thus preserving the coordination pattern to try to ensure that the transition times at these selected intersections are as short as possible You may choose the minimization strategy e That the selected intersections collectively have offsets as close as possible to zero and that as few as possible have offsets just below the cycle length If all timing plans are adjusted in this manner the change in offset at each intersection from any given timing plan to the next will tend to be small speeding up the time required to make the transition between the timing plans Minimize the change in time of day of th
83. signal you re watching Then indicate the phase mom I transition start of Green Flashing Don t Walk Yellow or Red and the phase and direction of 4 ihe uu Green travel at the signal This should be a phase and iie Nonnbond Through transition whose occurrence is not sensitive to CO sichere Now whether a movement gaps out Typically this is the yield point of the synchronized phase I prefer the start of a red so that when I see the start of a yellow it alerts me that the synch point ston GPs Tracking P Her is about to arrive Once these are specified click the aymehroriza Now button or say Synchronize Now if voice command recognition is enabled when you see the phase transition occur If any of the intersections in any of diagrams is operating at double triple or 3 2 cycle length you should synchronize the clocks using a phase of one of those intersections zi Start ing Tri When you re ready to record a trip through the artery click the CER Stat Looging Tips button on the Trip Logs page or say Start Trip if voice command recognition is enabled to begin a trip log Although a single trip may comprise multiple runs through more than one artery you ll have more flexibility later if you make a separate trip log for each run I recommend you start the recording at least 6 to 8 seconds before entering the first intersection Even sooner to be safer There s no real penalty for beginning the recordi
84. something less than the Walk and FDW and All Red Clearance Times for that phase FDW Clearance Time The FDW Flashing Don t Walk Clearance Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is used to determine the effective Offset of the intersection s signal for certain Offset Reference Points It is measured in seconds The default FDW Clearance Time may be specified on the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog box page 192 When using split phasing page 127 changing the FDW Clearance Time of either the through movement or the cross traffic turning movement automatically changes the FDW Clearance Time of the other movement as well Tru Traffic will warn you if you should change the split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement to something less than the Walk and FDW and AII Red Clearance Times for that phase Advance Warning Flasher Time The AWF Advance Warning Flasher Clearance Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement applies to some signal controller installations and acts as a sort of pre yellow yellow It is used to determine the effective Offset of the intersection s signal for certain Offset Reference Points It is measured in seconds The default AWF Clearance Time may be specified on the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog box page 192 When using split phasing page 127 changing the AWF Clearance Time of either the through movement or the cross traffic turning
85. splits not the declared Adjust Cycle Length to highlight intersections out of coordination If the signal cycle lengths are shown you may select the number of rows or lines Tru Traffic uses to display the signal cycle lengths on the diagram This is useful 1f you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the cycle lengths tend to run together Show Signal Cycle Lengths on Lines This parameter indicates the number of rows or lines which Tru Traffic uses to display the signal cycle lengths on the diagram if you have opted to Show the Signal Cycle Lengths By default Tru Traffic shows the cycle lengths on one line but you may increase this number if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the cycle lengths tend to run together When showing the cycle lengths on more than one line Tru Traffic alternates lines to reduce the likelihood that neighboring signal s cycle lengths will overlap Use Standard Scales This is a set of check boxes indicating whether Tru Traffic is restricted to standard scales in setting the default Horizontal and Vertical Scales If this is checked for the Vertical Scale then the Vertical Scale will be something like 10 seconds inch or 50 seconds cm depending on the units of measurement diagram size and font size Otherwise it will be whatever scale is necessary to show exactly the desired number of cycles on the diagram with no wasted space If this
86. take from this advice is 1f you re having problems a different microphone may help The display of head mounted microphone at a local retail store shows that some manufacturers mention Speech Recognition or something equivalent on the packages for some the microphone models but not for others That s probably an indicator of which of their models are high quality Position the mike a bit to the side of the mouth so air puffs don t get overamplified these are especially associated with the consonants P and T Work through a few speech training sessions Speak naturally Do the speech training sessions in a quiet space free of the background noises of the vehicle and the road Use the Stop Start Listening voice commands only for short intervals when you don t want the software to respond to anything while you re doing some unrelated talking but expect to resume the voice commands soon If you can easily turn the mike on amp off that would be even better When not using the speech recognition commands turn off the Speech Recognition Engine entirely I m referring to either the button on the Toolbar or the check box Use voice command recognition Toggle that button or uncheck that box when not in use When the button is down and the box is checked the SRE continues to listen and learn So while you re cursing at traffic it s picking up bad habits One day it will start cursing back at you Over time its performance will dete
87. the Before and After Comparisons This section discusses the statistics the Travel Time and Delay Report uses to compare two sets of measurements of some quantity the before set and the after set The main points shown here are that e The difference of the averages is equal to the average of the differences e The variance i e square of the standard deviation of the differences is equal to the sum not the difference of the variances One consequence of this is that while the difference is typically smaller than either of the averages the standard deviation of the differences is usually larger and never smaller than the standard deviations of the before and after sets We get the same expression for the standard deviation of the differences if we consider the standard deviations to be the predictive uncertainty of the averages and then use the standard formula for propagation of errors or uncertainties Background To illustrate these points we ll need some notation and a few basic rules of statistics Suppose b and a are the sets of measurements of a quantity before and after respectively with i 1 M and j 1 N For a concrete example suppose we have M before runs and N after runs and suppose that b is the travel time measured for the i th before run and that a is the travel time measured for the j th after run The average b ofthe before set is given by 1 Dec 1 ue 1 and similarly the average of the a
88. the Adjusted Cycle Length that is allotted to each movement They are measured in seconds or percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length of the intersection being considered as specified either locally for each intersection or by default in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog described on page 190 In that dialog box you may also set the number of decimal places to which the splits are shown For your convenience Tru Traffic will warn you if you should change the split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement to something less than the Minimum Split It will also warn you if you should change the split to something less than the total Yellow All Red Clearance Time or the total Flashing Don t Walk All Red Clearance Time for that phase Tru Traffic will warn you if the sum of the Splits is not equal to the Cycle Length You may choose a strict test of the Splits of both rings summing to the Cycle Length or to allow the splits of just one ring to sum to Bs Length The option between the strict test or the more lenient test is on the Desktop page of the Preferences dialog box Be warned The Splits are stored internally as percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length even if they are entered in seconds This allows you to change the Cycle Length without worrying immediately about adjusting the Splits and it helps Tru Traffic avoid situations where the sum of the Splits exceeds the Cycle Length As a consequence if yo
89. the Diagram Window to select the intersection s of interest Tru Traffic zooms to the selected region of the diagram by adjusting the Horizontal Scale and the Distance from the left margin to the first intersection Think of the zoomed diagram as being split into multiple pages Use the Page Up amp Page Down keys to jump to the next page The Print dialog allows you to select more than one page for printing These overlap a little so you can tape the multiple printed pages together to form one long diagram Annotate Diagram Window Use the Create Annotation command in the pop up menu after right clicking on the diagram window where you wish the annotation to appear to annotate the diagram at the mouse location Click on an existing annotation in the diagram window to edit it A border edit box appears around the selected annotation when it s in edit mode Annotations may be pretty much any length You may change the font size or style of the entire annotation by right clicking within the edit box and choosing the Font command The font change applies to the selected text or to the entire annotation if no text is selected Note that annotations look most realistic in the edit box when the diagram window s Zoom Factor is 100 Annotations may have a transparent or opaque background of any color depending on whether you want its bounding box to hide what s underneath on the diagram Right click within the edit box and choose Background Color
90. the Phase amp Movement Parameters to other movements but please use them with caution They can make many changes throughout the network Use the Edit Undo command to recover from any unintended changes Help X Cancel Minimum Split The Minimum Split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is used to help you ensure that the split for that phase always equals or exceeds a certain value The Minimum Split is measured in seconds whereas the actual split is measured in the units of your choice When using split phasing page 127 changing the Minimum Split of either the through movement or the cross traffic turning movement automatically changes the Minimum Split of the other movement as well You have the option of having Tru Traffic display the Minimum Splits associated with each phase directly on the Diagram Window See the Layout page of the Preferences dialog page 176 for more details Allow Min Split Overrides without Warnings Check this box to indicate that Tru Traffic should quietly allow the specified Split for this signal phase to fall below the specified Minimum Split This can be useful when you re coordinating signals assuming a typically expected Split that is less than Minimum Split because some phases normally gap out early or 148 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 get skipped altogether due to rare demand Split Type Free or Fixed Tru Traffic allows you to decl
91. the second pair of cycles for left bound traffic In this case you may wish to set the Vertical Scale to show exactly four cycles by selecting 4 Cycles in the Vertical Scale drop down list box You may also edit the flow directly on the Diagram Window by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Xbound Flow from the pop up menu where X is the direction of travel of the band to be altered North South East or West 108 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Show All Clipped Band B a This check box allows you to overlay a traditional all clipped band on top of any LE amp J Type of Diagram This band is one for which the Green Band Action is set to Clip for all interior intersections This is the same type of band that PASSER calculates and optimizes and it s what many traffic engineers think of when they hear The Green Band When overlaid on top of a Platoon Progression diagram this band gives an indication of how representative the traditional green band is of the actual arterial flow When there are heavy volumes from the side streets or when the band arrives late in the green time and a red indication stops a fair amount of traffic resulting in an appreciable queue then the traditional green band is often a poor description of actual arterial flow Band Layer Order Use this set of list boxes to specify which of the green bands from the various speed or green band categories page 132 is displayed on top 1 e in t
92. the stop bar in each direction of travel e Accuracy On average GPS receivers can provide the horizontal position accurate to within about 15 meters The actual accuracy is dependent on many things including time of day time of year and weather conditions especially in the upper atmosphere the ionosphere Some of the errors in the measurement are random as opposed to biased or systematic The random errors can be reduced by averaging multiple measurements together So to improve the accuracy of the measurement of the geographic coordinates of the center of the intersection you can take multiple measurements at different times of day different times of year and under different weather conditions e Width Two or more GPS measurements taken on opposite sides of the street allow Tru Traffic to estimate the width of the intersection In preparing Travel Time and Delay Reports Tru Traffic detects which intersections each trip log passes through by determining whether the trip passes close to the center of the intersection Close means roughly within the intersection s radius allowing some tolerance for error in the GPS measurements If there is no median the intersection s radius is the Number of Lanes multiplied by the Lane Width But if there is a wide median this calculation gives a width too narrow and Tru Traffic may incorrectly decide that a trip log bypasses an intersection it really passes through For this case multiple GPS
93. the travel distances Tru Traffic calculates will be too small and you ll need to manually adjust these distances in the Intersection Parameters dialog 4 The UTDF files can have unsignalized intersections As Tru Traffic traces through the intersections in UTDF files finding the signalized arteries it can sometimes take a wrong turn at an unsignalized T intersection This is because the UTDF files sometimes contain misleading information about which are the through movements and which is the side street At unsignalized intersections Tru Traffic uses the angles of the various approaches to determine which approaches are along the main artery The two approaches that are most directly opposite 180 apart are called the artery and the third approach is labeled the side street If the UTDF files indicate that legs of the intersection form more of a Y than a T it s possible that the side street and one of the arterial approaches will be closer to being in opposite directions than the two arterial legs and Tru Traffic will guess that the side street is actually the opposing approach of the main artery At signalized intersections this isn t a problem because Tru Traffic uses the phasing information to determine which approaches are along the artery If this happens to you you might want to change the angle of approaches in your UTDF files so arterial legs are closer to opposite directions or remove the unsignalized intersection entirely from the UTDF
94. time accurately whenever it reports the position so when the information flow resumes after an interruption Tru Traffic will still know the current position and time but there may still be inaccuracies 1 Ifyou ve been stopped at that location for some time Tru Traffic won t be able to determine the actual travel time to that location 2 Ifyou briefly stopped somewhere during the interruption Tru Traffic won t know where or for how long 3 If you passed through an intersection during the interruption Tru Traffic won t know at precisely what time As a result you may specify the number of seconds of interruption to tolerate when recording trip logs The default is 7 seconds but you may want to increase this number if you re experiencing frequent and inexplicable interruptions You may want to reduce this number if your GPS receiver is generally reliable and you want to reduce the chances for even minor errors creeping into the TT amp D reports as a result of a rare interruption phos uae Pattern for Trip Log Labels Use this box to enter the pattern for the default label of newly recorded Trip Logs The pattern may include fixed text and or special codes including amp Index amp Date amp Day amp Time where Tru Traffic substitutes the indicated information The default pattern is Trip amp Index so by default the first Trip Log recorded is named Trip 1 the second one is named Trip 2 and so on 65
95. timing plan through this button The timing plan is chosen on a network wide basis so only one timing plan may be visible at a time When you choose a new timing plan all diagram windows are updated to reflect the currently selected timing plan Where E licable the various parameter dialogs l Network Parameters e Arterial Diagram Parameters Intersection Parameters Phase amp Movement Parameters Lane Group Parameters and the GPS Clock Synchronization parameters show the values relevant only to the currently selected timing plan Of course some parameters apply to all timing plans Generally the amp timing plan dependent parameters in Tru Traffic appear in blue while the timing plan independent parameters appear in black Trip Logs can be set to apply to only specific timing plans so they re visible on the Diagram or Network View only when their applicable timing plans are selected Do this either by right clicking on the list of trip logs and choosing Visible in Timing Plan in the pop up menu or using the Trip Log Properties dialog You may specify the name of the currently selected Timing Plan in the Network Parameters Network Parameters These are parameters which affect all arteries and diagram windows for the currently selected timing plan in the diagram file They are displayed in Network Parameters dialog where you can examine and change them at will To quickly show the Network parameters you may e click the
96. timings diagram list and drag it to the one to which you wish to link it or 2 Open the Hi Network View select one intersection or node and drag it to the one to which you wish to link it Either way Tru Traffic will ask you to confirm which type of link you wish to make before finally linking the intersections If the two intersections are endpoints for their respective diagrams and if the arteries wouldn t conflict then Tru Traffic gives the option to join the two diagrams together making a single diagram for one longer artery You may view a list of all intersection links in the Outline View Use the f button in the Outline View to find all links to the intersection selected in the Arterial Diagram Outline List The links to the selected intersection are moved to the top of the Intersection Links List and if necessary the list is scrolled so the first link at the top of the list is visible The Network View shows intersections with everything linked as a common intersection between to arteries To view the diagram for the intersecting artery select an intersection on a Diagram Window then click the right mouse button to view the pop up menu If the View Crossing Artery command is enabled then you may choose it to jump to the Diagram Window of the artery that crosses at the currently selected intersection Tru Traffic considers an intersection to have a crossing artery if Everything is Linked to an 161 Tru Traffic 10
97. to the older 5 file UTDF format you may rectangularize the grid before exporting the UTDF files by checking the box Export a strictly rectangular grid Either way this ensures that the links between intersections in the UTDF files all lie along horizontal or vertical lines no diagonal lines In this case the intersection positions will be artificially rearranged as needed to ensure that all streets run strictly North South or East West This is usually not a concern when exporting a file that was originally imported as a UTDF file In this case Tru Traffic will retain the approach labeling in the original file When Tru Traffic imports UTDF files it treats these labels with a grain of salt so if it expects an approach to be labeled NE but finds information under the N label instead it takes that to be the applicable label 213 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination AAP Files and Reference Files AAP files are the native file format of the Arterial Analysis Package They may be loaded and modified in AAPEX of the AAP available through McTrans thus providing a means of sharing data with other signal timing programs When saving AAP files Tru Traffic asks you whether it should use a reference file If you Imported the diagram from an AAP file then that file is the default reference file The purpose of a reference file is as follows There is no one to one correspondence between diagram data and AAP data
98. travel time and the expected travel time as determined by the declared Design Speed and Design Distance e The cumulative delay in traveling to this intersection from the point of entry onto the artery e The running time i e travel time delay or expected travel time as determined by the declared Design Speed and Design Distance e The cumulative running time since the beginning of the run e The delay in traveling to this intersection from the previous intersection at the Posted Speed Limit e The cumulative Posted Speed Limit delay since beginning of run e The Posted Speed Limit Running Time or travel time from previous node if maintaining Posted Speed Limit e The cumulative Posted Speed Limit Running Time or travel time since beginning of run if maintaining Posted Speed Limit e The delay in maximum speed travel time from the previous intersection calculated as the difference between the actual travel time and the expected travel time as determined by the maximum speed and Distance e The cumulative maximum speed delay since the beginning of the run The Minimum Running Time or travel time from previous node if maintaining the Maximum Speed e The cumulative Minimum Running Time or travel time since beginning of run if maintaining Maximum Speed e The stopped delay or time spent waiting in a queue while traveling from the previous node By default the stopped delay is the time elapsed from when the speed drops below 5
99. trip log point is recorded This check box gives the option to make a sound while recording a trip log whenever the GPS receiver reports a point This can be useful feedback when you re crossing the last intersection of a run as you ll want to continue recording until at least one good point beyond the last intersection is added to the trip log 66 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Make sounds when an intersection coordinate is recorded This check box gives the option to make a sound while a geographic coordinate for an intersection is recorded from the GPS receiver Make sounds when I cross the center of an intersection This check box gives the option to make a sound when the GPS receiver crosses the geographic coordinates for the center of an intersection Generally you don t need to worry if the sound is made multiple times at an intersection GPS noise can give the appearance of multiple possible crossings of an intersection These are usually harmless When you subsequently analyze a trip log either for TT amp D Report or for Plots from Trip Logs Tru Traffic examines the multiple possible crossings and selects just the one that most closely approaches the center of the intersection ignoring the rest However when tracking with the GPS receiver Tru Traffic cannot see the future to know that there might be subsequent closer crossings and that the present one is a false alarm If you hear the sound multiple times while recording a tr
100. two shorter diagrams one for the east segment and one for the west segment Linking bands at the common intersection ensures that the bands in the downstream diagram reflect the clipping amp tapering information from the upstream intersections in the other diagram A with traffic turn is a e right turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e left turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 140 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Width of New Green Band This is the width in seconds of the new green band that starts at this intersection The green band is shown on Time Space and Time Location diagrams only The default value of the Width 1s equal to the duration of the effective green time that is allotted to the corresponding movement through left or right turn in the appropriate direction s of travel at this intersection 1 e the through Split minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and All Red Clearance Times plus the Green Extension Time The green band width in the arterial diagram display is calculated from a set of constraining values And the Width value that you can set on the Green Bands tab provides just one of those constraining values The other constraints are determined by the arrival times and the effective green times at the set of consecutive downstream intersec
101. upper half of the runs from the lower half That is the median is greater than or equal to at most half the runs and less than or equal to at most half the runs If there are an even number of runs then the median is the average of the two middle runs Note that the various quantities in the report may have a median values given by possibly different runs That is the run that represents the middle of the Travel Times is not necessarily the same run that represents the middle of the Stops As a statistic the median can be more interesting than the average the mean because if there are an odd number of runs then it represents a value actually measured an actual value from one of the runs whereas the average is not necessarily achieved by any actual run In comparison to the average the median is insensitive to outlying values e Minimum values The Minimum is the value from the run with the lowest value of all the runs Note that the various quantities in the report may have a minimum values given by possibly different runs That is the run that represents the lowest of the Travel Times is not necessarily the same run that represents the lowest number of Stops As a statistic the minimum can be more interesting than the average the mean because if there are runs with unusual and complicating factors e g additional delay due to road construction or an incident then it s more likely to represents a pure value a value from one of the runs w
102. useful to understand the distinction between a trip log and a run as it has many implications Inherently there s nothing associating a trip log directly with an arterial timings diagram A trip log is merely a sequence of geographic positions times speeds and headings It starts whenever you start recording it and it ends when you stop recording A run is created by combining a trip log with an arterial timings diagram comparing the geographic locations latitude longitude of the intersections with the geographic positions in the trip log A run i Network View Trip Log points recorded at one begins when the trip log crosses the first intersection and ends when the trip log crosses the last intersection Some observations and implications help illustrate the distinction 1 A trip log may have multiple runs just keep recording as you drive up and back along the artery Trip logs must start recording before the run begins and must continue after the run ends Runs are not stored in the file but are calculated as needed Runs are calculated afresh whenever you make changes that could affect them a When you change the geographic locations of intersections When you add or delete intersections b c d logs between files The red circle centered on the intersection shows its extent If the piecewise linear path of the Trip Log passes through the red circle then Tru Traffic determines that t
103. when you generate the report but marking a trip log as Atypical effectively excludes it from all future reports without further intervention until you change the type back to Neither Before or After You may set the type of multiple trip logs in one operation selecting one or more trip logs in the list of trip logs right clicking on the list and choosing Trip Log Type from the popup menu 4 The period of the trip log such as Early morning Midday Weekend Holiday etc This designation is not used for any analytical purposes in Tru Traffic It s available only to give you another sorting criterion Whenever a list of trip logs appears the Period is shown in one of the columns for you to sort on 5 The effective Signal Cycle Start Time the clock synchronization information recorded with the trip log The Signal Cycle Start Time or the master zero is the point in the cycle that all intersections use as a reference for their offsets This affects how the trip log trajectory is plotted on the arterial timings diagram and how the Start Up Lost Time is calculated from the trip Log but nothing else If the GPS satellite and signal clocks were synchronized when the trip log was recorded each trip stores the original Signal Cycle Start Time used to determine when the trip entered the artery and passed through each intersection But if the clocks weren t synchronized when the trip log was recorded or if the trip logs were dow
104. window and Tru Traffic ensures that the common parameters between linked intersections stay concurrent You may plot diagrams copy them to the Windows clipboard or print them out along with a report of the timing parameters necessary to implement it Diagrams can be saved for future reference Tru Traffic can import and export UTDF files for sharing files with Synchro and traffic signal control systems from Naztec Gardner Eagle and Peek and it may integrate with TEAPAC via PRETSPPD both available from Strong Concepts By connecting a GPS receiver to your computer Tru Traffic can read the current position and speed information over a series of times This can be used to record trip logs page 20 and prepare comparative travel time and delay reports page 78 Trip logs may be plotted as trajectories on the diagram and you may create speed vs distance plots page 92 and video clips from trip logs You may use an optional remote control device or speech recognition to control the GPS data collection while driving Tru Traffic requires Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 If you have any suggestions questions problems or comments about the program please call or write Tru Traffic Software LLC Greg Bullock 757 Bayview Avenue Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Pacific Grove CA 93950 2508 USA 831 642 9641 voice or fax bullock tru traffic com www tru traffic com 10 User s
105. you specify the Distances between the intersections and only then if you need a scale other than the one selected by default The cases where you need to change the Horizontal Scale will probably be rare and restricted to those times when you need a standard scale such as 300 or 500 feet per inch or when you need to see more detail in certain sections of the artery You can easily reset the Horizontal Scale to the default value by checking the Unlocked check box To do this you may have to first uncheck the box then rechecking it will reset the Horizontal Scale For long arteries or arteries with many intersections the spacing of the intersections can become crowded at the default Horizontal Scale making it difficult to see the green bands or make out the signal timing details In these cases you may drag a box on the diagram window to select the intersection s of interest Tru Traffic zooms to the selected region of the diagram by adjusting the Horizontal Scale and the Distance from the left margin to the first intersection Think of the zoomed diagram as being split into multiple pages Use the Page Up amp Page Down keys to jump to the next page The Print dialog allows you to select more than one page for printing These overlap a little so you could tape the multiple printed pages together to form one long diagram Name of Arterial Diagram The Arterial Diagram name is used at the top of the drawn diagram at the top of the Arterial Di
106. 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination intersection along an artery with a perpendicular Forward Direction If there is no crossing artery then the View Crossing Artery command is disabled Break Intersection Link Use the i button in the Outline View to remove the link to an intersection selected in the Intersection Links List Only the link which you select is broken any other linked intersections remain linked Only the link which you select is broken any other linked intersections remain linked In the list of intersection links in the Outline View the two types of links are distinguished by the color and thickness of the lines symbolizing the link Thick red lines indicate everything is linked and thin green lines indicate that only the Offset is linked Templates A template is the subset of the Arterial Diagram Parameters which most affects how your diagram appears Specifically a template consists of the diagram Size and Position and the character Fonts You may use templates to help ensure that all of your diagrams have a consistent appearance Use the Save command of the Template menu to extract the template from the current diagram and save it in a file which you name Use the Apply to One command of the Template menu to load a template from an existing file and apply it to the currently selected diagram Use the Apply to All command of the Template menu to load a template from an existing file and apply it to all d
107. 0 055567 80 05558 80 05558 80 055578 80 055578 If the non Excel program you re exporting from allows you to export GPX files and gives you a choice of GPX version choose version 1 0 not 1 1 as the 1 0 version includes extra information speed and heading that is useful in analyzing trip logs in Tru Traffic The first few lines of the exported file look something like My Trip 22 Started UTC 7 1 2005 5 58 30 pm Started Local 7 1 2005 10 58 30 am Time seconds East Longitude degrees North Latitude degrees Altitude feet Speed mph Heading degrees 0 00 121 9218900000 36 6245183333 15 42 0 143 107 40 6 00 121 9218966667 36 6245200000 8 86 0 185 106 68 59 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 7 00 121 9218916667 36 6245200000 6 56 0 887 72 57 8 00 121 9218800000 36 6245233333 4 92 3 955 60 66 The first line is text identifying the trip log There are no quotes around this line Quotes might be preferable to simplify importing into Excel but including the quotes would create some problems if your trip log name also happened to include some quotes The next two lines give the starting date and time of the trip log in UTC and local time If you re preparing a trip log text file with other software for importing into Tru Traffic each of these lines is optional but recommended If both lines appear giving the date and time in both local time and UTC Tru Traffic
108. 01 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Horizontal Scale The Horizontal Scale is measured in the units specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box feet per inch meters per centimeter etc The Horizontal Scale is accurate on the printed diagram The scale of the diagram window on the screen is modified by the Zoom Factor on the Tool Bar Tru Traffic prints the specified Distances between intersections when you print the report of parameters of the diagram making most measurements unnecessary Next to the Horizontal Scale edit field 1s the Unlocked check box indicating whether Tru Traffic should automatically reset the Horizontal Scale each time a parameter is changed that would affect it Leaving the Unlocked box blank locks the corresponding scale so it is unaffected by any other changes you may make When this box is checked Tru Traffic automatically resets the Horizontal Scale each time you change the diagram Width specify the Distance between consecutive intersections add an intersection or delete one of the boundary intersections The scale is chosen so that the entire artery may be seen without any excess space this enables you to make efficient use of the diagram space while maintaining high resolution Depending on your settings in the Layout parameters Tru Traffic will ensure that this is a standard scale As a result you shouldn t set the Horizontal Scale until after
109. 1 Editing im Diagrami Windows susce ee S EUER Dna IN ONU nieces ane Aou a UR en E old Osa eee 31 FT EUROBNC ED MIEUODINQOTET OD OESTE 32 Annotate Si cat CM NN TIN sk sissy inete EE e E REEE ERKE EAE ENE 33 Outline View STNCPT O 35 NAWE VIEW unesena a aaa e e ea eaa e CR eT 39 Adjusting the Network VieW eiesiereiiesiar narena ns d AR EN EEE EEEREN EEEE EE 42 Backeorouad Map for Network VIEW uaiesiicepeseeula ck inienn eux AKE EA eE AA a EEES 43 Annotate Network CRT 44 Color Coded Links on the Network VI oo einer eaa reb ed i i Rud EO Der vue n iibla aae ege 45 Timings REDOT a ea uce nei era a erba pn Bina E pia CAR AUD L Ub XR LA p a ERU Dra E RM GERE P dut pp bR Ut quii 47 GPS Receivet and Trip Trackin S a eossactDesce naviga eei kamen tivo pte oldest Quas Mov des Sr amd ed UM dus pua red nd 48 Ur e CARMELI OEIL a RE R 48 GPS C locks PapE eco tea ine hae oO t 50 GES Trip LOS Baf TR c 51 T p Log uci EET Um 56 d suene T a EU IPTE Em 57 Managing Trip Logs uie oap t NM MUSEUMS dU apa HR UU bitu aM dE Ma ME 58 TMPO iseen trapo cundo pdN EAS DUE UL was HO OV EIN CUM RU URN LOL RN SPEI d CREE DU OUR GC PEN Rd UE odia 58 Basico basa Mb r Binz CDs pudet Gen RM Masc ER ES Htec Msn Uode m C ISSUE ERR GbR EUDE 59 SPINE EET TETTE erecta vine eee aE 60 MTN TM T 61 Tip Log Details TE Y NTEEST m 61 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination
110. 15 03 30 then you can have Tru Traffic automatically create a second column to accumulate this formula by choosing Accumulate this formula in a separate column A notable exception is the average speed which is defined omitting any scaling factor to convert to preferred units AS TL TT where TL Travel distance from previous node and TT Travel time from previous node Note that the definition includes the division not just addition and subtraction of fundamental quantities For this reason we cannot accumulate the average at each downstream node by merely summing the speeds of the upstream nodes Instead to get the cumulative average speed CAS we have to declare a separate column repeating the above definition but replacing the fundamental quantities with the cumulative quantities CAS CTL CTT In defining the separate column for CAS we d choose This formula is already an accumulation implicitly to tell Tru Traffic to include this column in the cumulative summary without explicitly accumulating it in a separate column Display the Calculation Result as a Letter 1 A 2 B etc While the user defined formula always returns a number you may opt to display the number as an equivalent letter instead with 1 A 2 B etc This can be useful in creating a column to indicate the LOS Level of Service for the artery For the Summary Report the _ Use this drop down list to specify how the results o
111. 28 NOCH NNI crc 129 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Speed or Green Band Categorie QT TETTE 132 Design Speed oreren E A TREO 133 Posted Speed JEU os oo coo bs Dine mE e ree anre CU a AE ERE EARE 135 Selen 136 Light Rail Speed T EETT T M 136 SITES I T MEET TT TTE IC 137 TGSDNEHIEIDSIINNRTETOUTTN eem 137 Ofret of New Green Band ese elio ctasei eda sin ceti i Qa fa ooh ee E dio citu ia i Lan oi IDE 139 Width of New Green C ESL seo pb e luc bhadTH Die ha UR aab br cn SV RR S pela pastu Dos EU NEU dde COE 141 Numberof T3088 oie loco xev FR Nee PUN Das ioa tim Ge Ur idm rca RH PC ocu 142 OUEUTGNECHOEO IU ETT 143 AUDI NMMMTUN s 143 Satura Dass lt RTT TT TTE TTE TTE 146 Downstream Saturation PETI enin er xtk c rH ER Po Y REEF tena t enr n et ME OU IKE NEIAER DAY rias RII 146 Downstreari link Closes eibenesni e RED pF DUO Y RE HD NY aca ae 147 Phase amp Movement Parameters nesnenin De eds sansa Orr A EEA Ra 147 Minimi Split NIIT mmm 148 Allow Min Split Overrides without V arhiglsssedeestil oe HER CO ME iq UU erbe nip exei 148 Bun Type Free GE E TRI ecce np stun co vance nx trare ROO EDGE Generate cae 149 Walk M CST TERR CT CEREREM TE 149 EDW IG CN NT 150 Advance Warning Flasher TIE aiiccs aivcarsnsensiovesatacesarveccisantsacevessnacasenesecaiecsentevanvtaetsunssetee 150 Yelow Clearance
112. 3 30 The figure below illustrates some of the features of the list of waypoints 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 003 010 Click column headers to sort downloaded waypoints on that column AMNEM Assign Downlcaded Wevpoinis pU TWaypoint gt Kfongtude 9 Kiatu K Kresen _ Diagram Lighthouse Ave PM Lighthouse Ave PM Lighthouse Ave PM Lighthouse Ave PM Lighthouse Ave PM W 121 54 2423 Ww 121 54 2206 W 121 54 1649 Ww 121 54 0597 Ww 121 53 9634 Ww 121 53 907 Ww 121 53 8780 Ww 121 49 4380 W 86 2 9732 W 86 2 9732 N 36 36 9701 N 36 36 3431 N 36 35 8837 N 36 36 7534 N 36 36 6466 N 36 36 5806 N 36 36 5450 N 36 34 6740 N 22 50 2063 N 22 50 2063 Drag column dividers to resize columns unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned Dax David Irving unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned Associate Selected W aypoint s with Arterial Diagram Lighthouse Ave PM Peak January 2002 unassigned Intersedtion Sox x Cancel Help Select one or more downloaded waypoints to assign them to an intersection Use the drop down lists to associate the selected downloaded waypoint s with an intersection in an arterial diagram The figure below illustrates some common errors in specifying geo
113. All Red Clearance Times plus the Green Extension Time at the intersection where the green band s originates Start Up Lost Offset and width of the green The Offset amp Width of the effective green time i bands s if they re not locked of the corresponding movement s through or cross traffic turn which is the Split minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and All Red Clearance Times plus the Green Extension Time at the intersection where the green band s originates Width of the green band s if it See above description isn t locked Protected Turn Phase Sequences of None one way street no separate cross traffic all the intersections if the One turning movements way box is checked Distance between Horizontal Scale if the Such that all the intersections may be seen on wo intersections intersection is not the first one and the screen without any extra space dding an the Scale is unlocked ntersection or utting a boundary Distance to first intersection from Such that the first intersection is just next to the ntersection left margin left margin SA cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 242 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 hanging this Will change this
114. All Split Trip Log Help Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple Check uncheck the box to enable points and narrow the scope of disable the point in the trip log Tain operations e g Disable Uncheck the corresponding boxes to disable points Note that the points are not deleted but disabled giving you the option to restore them later Trip Log Filter Sometimes a trip log may include some erroneous readings from the GPS receiver This can happen for a variety of reasons usually involving interference noisy transmission channels a partially blocked view of the sky etc You can manually find and remove these points using the Trip Log Details Table Or you can let Tru Traffic try to automatically find these points using the Trip Log Filter The Trip Log Filter can be used to identify and remove bad points The trick of course is how to tell whether a point is bad A number of user settable parameters are used to determine whether a point is bad Invoke the Filter by right clicking on a trip log in the GPS Trip Logs page and choosing Filter Points from the pop up menu The Filter compares consecutive GPS readings calculating 1 Distance The distance is calculated from the difference in the position from reading A to reading B If this distance is small the Filter will just do no further tests on these points to determine whether one of them is bad The assumption is that the GPS was probably not moving much or j
115. Clearance Time may be specified on the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog box page 192 When using split phasing page 127 changing the All Red Clearance Time of either the through movement or the cross traffic turning movement automatically changes the All Red Clearance Time of the other movement as well Tru Traffic will warn you if you should change the split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement to something less than the AWF Yellow All Red Clearance Times for that phase The AII Red Clearance Time along with the arterial red time may be viewed directly on the Diagram Window in the Color of your choice Allow Clearance Overrides without Warnings Check this box to indicate that Tru Traffic should quietly allow the specified Split for this signal phase to fall below the specified Clearance Times W FDW Y AR This can be useful when you re coordinating signals assuming a typically expected Split that is less than Clearance Times because some phases normally get skipped altogether due to rare demand Allow Yellow Trap Phasing without Warnings Check this box to have Tru Traffic quietly allow phasing for the specified movement that would normally trigger a yellow trap hazard warning When a permitted cross traffic turn phase is followed by a lagging protected cross traffic turn this can create a yellow trap and it is often prohibited due to safety concerns However if you re using a flashing yel
116. ETT 103 OTt Reference POIL ua ove opt Eod ied o ipd aHa aaa laii NapivM M qEE 103 Rid dA LERNTE 106 Dis OU ac E ET t 107 Dispersion TINA ss EE pbev cma DRE tI ERE DR V EEE NS DEN EDIT DUE Pip IY PN C ES 107 UIDI Rc Io 108 For Speed vse e eoo odd Pedo eta eut nq Eae ee er eT een ene ee ree 108 Show Flow 1 IER oos ipao Iva SR PER EEE EE Dr ANO Seo CO Edd ik i NEUE 108 Show All Clipped EIC Omm 109 Band Layer Ord f S e esi OE MUR aden ae ee 109 Diagram UNG PETIT TOTO TUTTO DTE 109 Mock tI Cc QT 110 PS eerie the IntersectiOn beue circi ans b s Elea RISE daa Roos cv S br Abbo ii 110 Distance from Previous ites Get eue uix nat bnt ca tan indus GO ERE EY SUE ASIA REEPR RUP ERES 111 ID TERRE aen etin po OU E EN EE E oU DIN ORI ND RR Ion FoU PICO NN ION RENE 113 INODGS e IIIA II MM MULT Lee 113 Pug bit MEL NR 113 L XR m CANIS RIETI TTE 113 Lone Tra es er ene tte ee ret ee eL HE UN MEE 114 Geographie COOPER inseem P Rncsu fn Eu bn DIN SY EEE HUI Bs cil DUu UN a EU dS NS US 114 Adjusted Cycle Length id socie redisse EE E E De blu Sap ETRE 122 lucc eR TM HIC NTC RUNR OEA 124 Offset Reference POPULI ee a RRO EV EDI dE EDD E d HUM fra On DEDERE 126 Protected Turn Phase Segue eb uiuos scenes enr od Iba DUE rna i ED RE E ERO HUNG UEM REENE E 127 Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Seguedse uus ecd inae enn uan testen O Dae SV nba c Ex vbi gis UE 128 TER COSE EOM ooi hr Pri toO f ene MR REED EFE DO E RE DOO ERE ER ERN Ia reas 1
117. Extension Time page 154 Flashing Don t Walk page 150 Advance Warning Flasher page 150 Yellow page 150 and AII Red page 151 Clearance Times Vehicle Length page 106 Dispersion Factor page 107 Protected Turn Phase Sequence page 127 Green Band Action page 137 and the Zoom Factor You may override these defaults for any diagram in the Arterial Diagram Parameters dialog the Intersection Parameters dialog Green Band Action or in the Tool Bar Zoom Factor The parameters are set to their default values when you start up Tru Traffic Desktop On the Desktop page you may set parameters that determine the appearance of the Tru Traffic desktop The Desktop parameters include whether the Tool Bar Status Bar pop up Hints and Balloon Hints are visible at start up and the number of seconds pause before the Balloon Hint appears while the mouse is hovering over an item e g over a trip log point or an intersection You also have a choice of which type of Saturation Flow ideal or actual is viewed by default in the Intersection Parameters dialog You may specify whether the movement buttons on the Intersection Parameters dialog are flat eu or protruding These buttons include the phase and movement e g buttons on the Timings Page and the lane group buttons e g 2 on the Volumes page of the Intersection Parameters dialog If they re flat they protrude only when the mouse cursor is over them reducing cl
118. Forward Direction at any intersection This allows turning arteries and triangular blocks When you have linked everything between two intersections in different diagram windows see page 159 Tru Traffic relies on the Forward Directions of the two arteries or the locally overridden Forward Direction at their common intersection to model turning arteries and triangular blocks to maintain consistency of the directional parameters between the two separate instances of the intersection that is the instances in the NS and EW arterial diagrams If you change the Forward Direction of one of these arteries Tru Traffic must reset the directional parameters at the intersections to restore consistency If you don t want Tru Traffic to do this you must break the link before changing the Forward Direction In either case be wary of changing the Forward Direction along an artery which has intersections linked to arteries in other diagram windows Offset Reference Point The Offset Reference Point is a drop down list box that determines the point in the cycle to which the intersection signal offsets refer The reference points are listed and described in Table 1 and depicted graphically in Table 2 103 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Offset Reference Point Refers to Start of first through movement Beginning of the green time for the first through movement along the artery at this intersection to be served
119. Green Band Action and offset and width of the primary intersection the dragged from intersection This can be useful if you split an embedded superstreet into two diagrams one WB and one EB linking together their common 2 way intersections which are near the edges With their green bands linked then the 2 way bands near the edges will be identical in both diagrams Otherwise the started band in one diagram won t resemble the calculated e g tapered band in the other diagram This also facilitates splitting a long artery into two shorter diagrams one for the east segment and one for the west segment Linking bands at the common intersection ensures that the bands in the downstream diagram reflect the clipping amp tapering information from the upstream intersections in the other diagram Offset of New Green Band This is the position of the new green band that starts at this intersection The green band can be shown on Time Space and Time Location diagrams only The Offset references the point at which the green band begins at this intersection and is measured in seconds or percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length of this 139 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination intersection as specified either locally for each intersection or by default in the Preferences Units of Measurement dialog page 190 The default value of the Offset is the beginning of the green time for corresponding movement through left
120. ITIN to rc Pr T 87 Statistics in the Before and After Comparisons iu iesiecor o oio iisonic sisses 88 ME ey eases cee E E 88 The Average of th Differences o e peo I eon EA a 89 The Standard Deviation OF the Differens sacos ertet Up rate EEEa boy im Ia dee odes 89 Propagation AI sis raie eir Rm Rubad aa DNUS et aui Gea SS EN ERAS SIM EUREN UR i 90 Plots from Trip Logs ieceres e tbc ibd e Qupd edat i tdt PER bU DN CUN ERES 92 Viewing amp DEW ECC CTETUR 96 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Timing m 96 Network Puareuieleles co od Fon EU eg Eta RN eas Prud CR NUM ERN ee te 96 Timme XS DEED US ETT UNDE 97 Cvele Leng pp saints 97 Label the t 0 Lines by Time ot WY pss esc o Ies pi Sere EEE E EEEE RE 97 Beh NOH PA EL El TNR TITIO TOTIS 98 Flow Baseline on Platoon Progression Diagrams nie eere roe nrbt etatem a rete no Pub x e eu A Vega 98 Header Footer Logos on Arterial Timings Diagrams sssseeeeeeene 98 Arterial Sta CET conata ids Gorda aE Usu Ru pee DN DN o ARN GIGS REN lS DARREN E 99 Type of Di graii sinira EREE E Um 100 DIET E E POSION TQ TOT ETT TTE c 100 Diagrar SIDA 100 biu Ben EET 101 latera P Me de NERONI ea 102 Name of Arterial Diagrai ssia asiarra mU 102 R E E A E E AE E EEE states EA A E PEE 103 I ultus N
121. Measurement button or say Mark Point if voice command recognition is enabled Although you must start tracking with D Get GPS Measurement the GPS receiver in order to add a measurement clicking the button will initialize 114 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 the connection to the GPS receiver provided it s already plugged into the serial port and I Get GPS configured correctly Once GPS tracking has begun each click of the eee button will add the current GPS reading to the list of measurements If you have a remote control USB Bluetooth or infrared then the enter buttons should also perform the same function 7i Add Position all To enter the geographic coordinates manually click the Manually button The manually entered coordinates must be in the same geodetic datum in which the GPS receiver supplies coordinates by default typically WGS 84 Don t worry too much if this is not the best geodetic datum to use in your region of the globe using the wrong geodetic datum results in a net bias on the coordinates but Tru Traffic s calculations are based only on relative positions so the net bias has no significant affect Consistency is more important Extrapolate The a button is available only if the current intersection already has geographic coordinates information and there are intersections besides the current one with no geographic coordinates information but with valid X Y gr
122. Peak To Lincoln Blvd of Main St PM Peak a signalized network Some of the intersections notably those created in Step 7 may not have the correct parameters yet Edit the Arterial Diagram Parameters and Intersection Parameters as needed to complete the network For the most part intersections that are linked between diagrams because they re common to two crossing arteries may be edited in either diagram and the parameter changes will automatically appear in both diagrams An exception is the Green Band Action which affects only the diagram with that intersection but not the diagram with the crossing artery Linking Everything 19 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination How to Perform a Travel Time and Delay Study The following tutorial gives a step by step example of how to create a Travel Time and Delay Report from scratch It is assumed that you have a portable computer with Tru Traffic installed e are already familiar with how to create a diagram for an artery or a set of intersecting arteries e have a compatible GPS receiver but e don t yet know how to operate Tru Traffic with a GPS receiver The order in which some of the steps are performed is not critical For example you could perform steps 1 2 3 and 4 in any order Nonetheless the steps are presented in an order that works fine for most purposes The voice commands given
123. Point The Offset Reference Point is a drop down list box that determines the point in the cycle to which this particular intersection s signal Offset refers The reference points are listed and described in Table 1 and depicted graphically in Table 2 Example Suppose at a certain intersection the Adjusted Cycle Length is 80 seconds there is no protected cross traffic turning movement in the southbound direction and there is a leading cross traffic turning movement in the northbound direction beginning 20 seconds after time zero If the Offset Reference Point is the start of the first through movement then the Offset would be set to 25 and would reference the northbound through turning movement By default the Offset Reference Point refers to a movement along the artery that is along one of the directions of travel represented in the diagram window Check the References Cross Street Movement box to specify that the Offset Reference Point refers to a movement from the side street of this diagram The Offset Reference Points start of first through movement and start of green phase are identical for all protected Turn Phase Sequences except for the one where both directions of travel have leading turning movements In all other cases the beginning of the first through movement coincides with the beginning of service to the artery Similarly the reference points start of last through movement yellow and start of arterial phase yellow are i
124. S Connect GPS Receiver View or the button on the Tool Bar to make the connection to the GPS receiver Stop GPS Tracking Stop Tracking This is equivalent to clicking the Stop GPS on the GPS Receiver View or the GPS Off corresponding button on the Tool Bar to Disconnect GPS disconnect to the GPS receiver Start Recording Trip Start Recording This is equivalent to clicking the 74 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Start Logging x Stat Loadina Tri Start Trip ZA van bogang MMPS button on the GPS Start Trip Log Trip Logs page or the corresponding button on the Tool Bar to start recording a trip log Stop Recording Trip Stop Recording This is equivalent to clicking the Log Stop Logging cue Stop Trip A Stop Logging Trips button on the GPS Stop Trip Log Trip Logs page or the corresponding button on the Tool Bar to stop the recording of the trip log Get Geographic Mark Location This is equivalent to clicking the button on Coordinates Mark Position the geographic coordinates window to add Mark Reading the current GPS reading to the list for the Mark Spot currently selected intersection To use this Mark Coordinates command you must first manually open Mark Measurement the Intersection Parameters window and Mark Point click the Get Location button Once you have this window open Get Position for any intersection you may use voice Get Reading commands to advance the window to Get
125. S Ren ORE E IE aS Eins Rp REUS 219 General DUSCHE n ooo di ocio oca PN Dad oA FORE d PEN bru Reb UR b EE A 219 Special Drac Utes oos ceti Qu eep i ras Pen PR qu E Qu a MR NS EAE EA E EOE MIA ME DH E RUE S 220 LS Fera ES BEST ue BST ET LSTT CRT OTT 224 BT TIMIDI OE UU ROS 228 lui cedi cr SILET E CE OTT DOES 239 Specchi Recognition ONIN aeaee otc born atc punyu Dons SR van acu DO RNC A ea RE RUE 239 LET D I SASUHALE LETTO LS LTD 239 ED EN 2 RED 239 Microsoft Bing Mapsissa uU NM acu Aa EEE EB e EE 240 Microsoft Streets amp TOPS epore ERI UR GUI EE DERI HEURE AT E R R MN Odd 240 DeLorme Street AaS TNT 240 GPS RECEIVED oon eanna EE A acd UN mt es 240 sae ia AAS ETT TT TT OTT 241 Affecting amp Affected Paramet tS ioris e EK A EEEE EEE EEEE 242 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Introduction to Tru Traffic Tru Traffic formerly TS PP Draft is a work sheet for drafting arterial timings diagrams time space platoon progression or time location and with a GPS receiver for conducting travel time and delay studies Although Tru Traffic offers some automatic optimization options it was developed with the idea that some decisions in signal timing are based on factors that cannot be quantified easily or accurately for a computer e g driver perception citizen complaints queue length local policies etc and therefore must be made by a human Using Tru Traffic you can quickly develop either type arterial timing diagram
126. TIME NENNEN 150 All Red Clearance TIME neiger a AEA AE ANAE i AaS 151 Allow Clearance Overrides without Wari 08 sese cereis osx ra etnies Cx aed bees bveu saa ve mud 151 Allow Yellow Trap Phasing without VVaETWBR saei oven terio deii e en or eb brin tired 151 Sart UP Lost TIME sisesta DEDE RTT 151 AO GCOND CUICUMQUE 154 Phase Number o 2c ose sddcasdctdicags Rt ee eu b AM Dr RIED x A daten E Top E 155 Lucr Group st 22 100 2 2 sooo Eun D RM ee ree eee eer E E tie E E 156 Volume BAIR RTT CE ie Reade nna eS 156 Peak Hour FACtOr oec oct cise tei EEDR LA Minne a Dreptels oO ct E ccce tels Sra B ciere 157 Average E UMS ALINE u m 157 Heavy aio 96 MOIS ER 157 Conflicting POS eoa Coches tutum ia SRM Gee Coun Un oe ee na CO eS 157 Approdch Grade Nr 158 Has On Street Patio eo n ieot I EE E EA A A E RE 158 Buses A ecse er eeir eree T TOTO D TOT Te 158 Central B si ess District Area T Opis oso e rtis ena RR GUAPA IM ar tE 158 ECRANS L ne Un 2a OD spt cf ssc wha a EERE EAE NAELA 158 Add Cutan Ters ect Oesen ii A EA ADEE A EA EER NEG 159 Tink nc SI srren a T sada eda eae 159 Break Intersection Link oirrese eram ser ean aiK ES Ea PORE AOAR EE sata neie ortnm eH VE s 162 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 L Ci EE umm 162 IDIPSUM 163 Optimize Arterial EOPISOES occ IE SOR ERRORI e feu MIR IN UNS ndr ME Mt RU Ee ape UNIES 163 ee TNR PIONEER 163 SCOND MMC
127. The band passes through green time but not red time so the downstream band may be more narrow than the upstream band Taper Start The band tapers if any part of it arrives on green time otherwise it starts Clip Like Taper but the upstream band is clipped as well Note that while the above actions affect only the departing band Clip affects both the departing band and the arriving band as well Clip Start Like Taper Start but the when the downstream band tapers because it passes through partial red time then upstream band is clipped as well When the band arrives entirely on red time the upstream band is unaffected but the downstream band Starts Clip amp Start The downstream band starts all over again unconditionally as when the action is set to Start but the upstream band is clipped as when the action is set to Clip Table 4 The Green Band Actions and their meanings Related to and obviating the Green Band Action is an option to let a downstream green band s offset and width be determined by an intersection in another diagram altogether Do this by linking the bands between the intersections of two diagrams dragging from the primary intersection to the secondary intersection When you link green bands between diagrams Time Space or Time Location the offset and width of that green band are identical between the two diagrams with the secondary the dragged to intersection s band determined by the
128. The graphics file type also called a Windows Enhanced Metafile This file type is helpful in transferring diagrams as images to word processors or graphics programs Compared to a Bitmap file the Picture file has the advantage that it can be subsequently resized without loss of resolution after loading it into another prog GPS Exchange Format GPX An XML based file format for the interchange of GPS data waypoints routes and tracks between applications and Web services on the Internet When using the File menu Tru Traffic imports exports the geographic coordinates of all the intersections in the system When right clicking on the list of Trip Logs Tru Traffic imports exports trip logs to the GPX file Google Earth KML File An XML based file format for the interchange of GPS data waypoints routes and tracks between applications including Google Earth When using the File menu Tru Traffic imports exports the geographic coordinates of all the intersections in the system When right clicking on the list of Trip Logs Tru Traffic imports exports trip logs to the GPX file A GIS based shapefile containing the geographic coordinates of all the intersections in the system This file can be shared with GIS mapping software to verify the coordinates Coordinates File A text file containing the geographic coordinates of all the intersections in the system This file can be imported into mapping software to verify the coordinates The
129. X file or 115 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination o aGoogle KML file To import a GPS Exchange Format GPX file a Google KML file a GIS shape file or a text file containing the geographic coordinates of some or all the intersections in the system right click in the list of measurements and choose Import Coordinates from the pop up menu Table files can be exported from Excel CSV or TSV files mapping software or saved by the CollectCoordinates utility p 217 for importing into Tru Traffic When importing from a table Tru Traffic displays a preview of the contents of the table with controls to customize the format and data parsing rules for importing the geographic coordinates Once entered you may edit any of the sets of geographic coordinates either by selecting measurement and clicking the the map view below the list of coordinates Note that when practical it s best to include more than one set of coordinates for each intersection possibly coordinates of the different corners of the intersection As discussed below when there are multiple coordinates Tru Traffic determines the intersection s width and its standard deviation in GPS readings with more certainty than when there is just one measurement Edit Selected Position icon or by Shift dragging the point in r 4 Import Geographic Positions ignored Longitude LL Latitude N Latitude deg Altitude N Latitude d
130. Xbound Queue from the pop up menu where X is the direction of travel of the band to be altered North South East or West You may also select the intersection and press Ctrl F or Ctrl R to edit the Queue Lane Group in the forward and reverse directions respectively Caution If the queue at an intersection backs up into the upstream intersection the flow and queues on the Platoon Progression diagram usually will be inaccurate They can still be accurate if the queue backs up into the upstream intersection 1 during the green time of the upstream intersection and 2 when there are no vehicles leaving the upstream intersection Restriction 2 means that when the queue backs up into the upstream intersection there are no vehicles arriving at the upstream intersection nor a queue waiting at the upstream intersection These criteria are strict so a queue backing up into the upstream intersection usually indicates that you shouldn t trust the diagram Unless you are sure these criteria are met you should either adjust the timing parameters to prevent the back up or not use a Platoon Progression diagram at all for that artery Volumes The volume is the number of vehicles completing a movement in an hour It is measured in vehicles per hour These are totals not per lane averages The actual volume Tru Traffic uses is the value entered in the Volumes page of the Intersection Parameters dialog box multiplied by the Volume Multiplier entered
131. a S ERE EENET E 178 Layout Volumes Denies apu a E Nee 178 Show Arterial Volumes TQ cairats aasia a Ee aren aE ar TE E a E EE naa 178 Show Side Street Voles niemien nie c SE A AN Dra Enc EE AE aa 178 Show EI D EDT NT TUER 178 huc cR na TTE 178 Show Volumes on Just Ain ALS TEC 179 Layout PAS NOI TOT Em 179 Show Band Speeds TNT mcm 179 Show Speed or Band Categories eee ee EE A AREE AT 179 Show Band Ms IC ROT iiei a i seen vas ee oA Eea enina arie et tiai 179 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Separate th Bands qu Cycles based on DWNOGIOB sieuiussc ette ans ensi to svi ux aspis rins 180 Show One Band Oniy TREE EUER 180 Approximate Acceleration Curve on Bands from Side street sues 180 Color Fill the Poterit of the DD esu esi tpi OU PN URPS IU GEAR UO E EDF I CUR OR cuta SIVE ORE DIEA hex 181 OVE IEEE m T UIT 181 JURE AM eost niu eb ati mmm tapete numus dee mE 181 Seconds Per Tim Market uoo ip ou opu e Padua d pU dE RR ao anna 181 Show Minor Tim M rk soie obit ced te d dii tentative nir EREE E len aM tO EPA Od 181 Layout Platoon EIE ca ons ku es Sua o i ISSMUVE Ra EN HDI EHE EE A AEEA 182 Plotting DN No 55 saa naain RE dra eM DM a icc ND rE 182 EHE PDT LL IIR TT QR TETTE mt 182 Number of Gradient Fill SUb OS omnt Ern tup bU MR Fat une QoS ba pia eua EM PUR DM gU US 182 Platoon Flow Eill Style ss oeste exe
132. a TSPPD Diagram a native format which is equivalent to a Diagram data Dgm file e aWindows bitmap e aWindows Enhanced Metafile or Picture This is a useful way of transferring diagram information from one diagram data file to another For duplicating arterial diagrams within the currently open diagram data file it is usually better to gt use the bad button discussed below in the Outline View because this latter allows you to link all intersections between the original and the duplicated diagram Use the e button in the Outline View to paste the contents of the Clipboard diagram or intersection to the currently selected position in the Outline View Use the bo button in the Outline View to duplicate the currently selected arterial diagram You may also copy a diagram to the Windows Clipboard using the Copy and Paste commands under the Edit Menu When you duplicate a Diagram Window Tru Traffic offers to link the duplicated intersections to the originals Answer Yes if you wish to maintain two different Types of Diagrams for a given artery in two separate Diagram Windows If you answer No Tru Traffic then offers to link any intersections in the original Diagram Window that are linked to intersections in other Diagram Windows Use the button to show the intersections of all Arterial Timings Diagrams in the Arterial Diagram list Use the J button to hide the intersections of all Arterial Timings Diagrams in the Arterial Diagram
133. a UTDF 2006 file the single combined file use the File Open command or toolbar button and change the File Type to UTDF 2006 To export the currently selected timing plan to a UTDF 2006 file use the File Save As command and change the File Type to UTDF 2006 Import Export UTDF 2 1 To work with the older 5 file version 2 1 UTDF use the Import Export UTDF command of the File menu to open the Universal Traffic Data Format Files dialog In this dialog box you may specify the names of the various UTDF files Layout Lanes Timing Phasing and Volume Use the od button next to each file name to browse for an existing file or to simply choose the desired directory for your files You may leave a file name blank to exclude it from the importing or exporting of data Once you ve specified the UTDF file names use the I Import button to import the data from the files replacing any arterial timings diagram file currently in memory The Merge button is similar but rather than replacing any diagrams currently in memory it instead extracts from the UTDF files the parameters for just the intersections already in diagrams skipping any intersections that aren t already represented in both the UTDF files and the diagrams Use the u Export button to export the currently open arterial diagram file to the UTDF files When you ve finished and are satisfied that the files have been properly imported or exported use the to exit the dialog box Each
134. agram Parameters Report and at the beginning of the exported ASCII file The name may be any number of characters long You may use those characters to give any information useful to you diagram title arterial name time of day peak time etc You may include additional information in the Notes which appears in the timings report but not on the diagram Under the Fonts tab in the Arterial Diagram dialog box you may select the size and style of the font used for showing the name on the drawn diagram 102 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Notes The arterial timings diagram Notes is strictly for your use to store any additional information you wish to associate with the diagram or artery group number time of day etc The notes appear at the top of the arterial diagram parameters timings report but are otherwise unused by Tru Traffic The notes may be any number of characters long Forward Direction This is a drop down list box indicating the direction to your right as you view the diagram North South East or West The Forward Direction orients the arterial timings diagram typically the time space diagram with the artery Looking at the diagram as your eye moves from left to right the Forward Direction specifies what 1s the corresponding direction of travel along the artery N S E or W It should be specified so that Tru Traffic can refer to the various movements by their proper names You may locally override the arterial
135. agram on 11 x 17 paper In the Arterial Diagram Parameters window under the Diagram tab set the Size of the diagram to say 9 x 15 depending on what size margins you prefer How do I import an Excel spreadsheet of travel time runs GPS points speeds heading into Tru Traffic From Excel you ll probably want to use either TSV or CSV Or you can copy the block of cells from Excel to the clipboard and paste into the GPS View s Trip Logs page Either way Tru Traffic will display a preview of the table allowing you to customize how the data 1s parsed before finishing the import When exporting from Tru Traffic Tru Traffic uses the units of measure according to your user preferences View Preferences Units of Measure If the non Excel program you re exporting from allows you to export GPX files and gives you a choice of GPX version choose version 1 0 not 1 1 as the 1 0 version includes extra information speed and heading that is useful in analyzing trip logs in Tru Traffic I have a Garmin GPS receiver with only a USB interface or while it may have a serial interface I have only the USB cable Will this work with Tru Ti raffic Yes it will work but only indirectly not directly Without the serial cable the only choices that I know of are to either 1 Download the tracks from the GPS receiver using some other software to say a GPX file then import that into Tru Traffic or 2 Connect the GPS receiver to Tru Tra
136. al Newtown Rd amp Curlew Dr Bangor Dr 4 Click on a dot to start a new Diagrams artery or route mo Automatically Trace Routes 3411 g 4132 zi Ctrl click on a dot to append it to oer ADM qf Create Arterial Diagrams X Cancel Buel e the current artery or route f ES If Tru Traffic can distinguish the names of the crossing streets then it can ass 274 automatically m trace the complete set of routes for you Transfer Trip Logs to Google Earth l Google KML File In Tru Traffic right click on a Trip Log and choose Export Export Trip Log Change the file type to either Google KML or GPS Exchange Format GPX You probably want to prefer Google KML as that will also assign icon colors to each trip log point based on its speed For transferring to most other programs other than Google Earth you usually want to use GPS Exchange Format GPX ver 1 0 as that includes a specification for transferring speed and heading whereas Google KML does not have speed or heading in its specification except by extension In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then import using File Open 2 Windows Clipboard In Tru Traffic right click on a Trip Log and choose Copy Copy as Google KML In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then paste using Ctrl V or right click and choose Paste Either way in Google Earth a new folde
137. al intersection Set the through split along the artery to be 100 of the cycle length and name the intersections SchZone or SZ so you ll know what it is Then set the band Design Speed downstream of the phantom intersections to the lower speed e g 20 mph in the appropriate directions of travel This will allow you to see a band on the diagram with a kink in it marking the change of speed 4 Calculate the average speed for the two links that include the school zone and set the band Design Speed to that This will give a straight band on the diagram along the entire link but the slope will correspond to the correct travel time The average speed is the link distance divided by the total link travel time so this works out to Average Speed ls Ssz 1 l2 S where lis the total link length or distance between intersections 224 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 I is the length of the school zone within the link e g 150 ft Ssz is the speed within the school zone e g 20 mph S 1s the speed in the link outside the school zone The units have to be converted to ensure consistency How do I model a diamond interchange o Is there an easy way to model two nearby signals working off a common controller The easiest way to work with a diamond interchange is to enter it as two nearby intersections with linked Offsets explained on page 159 This way the Offsets at the two intersections will move as one For example s
138. already have either a Synchro file or a Google Earth file for your network then it s easiest to start by importing what you ve got If you have both types of files then open one first and import the other You have a choice on which one to open first the Synchro csv file or the Google Earth KML and there seem to be two schools on which method is preferred You might try doing it both ways to see if you develop your own preference If you don t have either then use one of the manual methods described below Short Notes for Creating a New Time Space Platoon Progression Diagram for both Signal Coordination and Travel time amp Delay Study Method A starting with Tru Traffic a Open the program and select File New b Enter the number of intersections along the artery and choose the forward direction C Select Arterial Diagram Window 71 d Choose the Edit Selected Artery Diagram Button e On Artery Tab give the artery a name f You can also enter notes and change the Forward direction g Click OK 2 Method B starting with Google Earth a Assemble set of yellow pins two pins per intersection in a Google Earth folder Recommended For each yellow pin set the name to the intersection ID number in the format N and set the description to the names of the crossing streets in the format Street A Street B b Copy folder from Google Earth and paste into empty Tru Traffic c Play connect the dots to define r
139. alse a IETU usa soo ad s tq tona I rts es sk sita suena 67 Make sounds when tracking starts or trip log recording is interrupted 67 Use voice command TEC OS Oo use escort en Rer Ren uox Php ERR QUE E AR UR ERE Hg UE REN RR Ea FKR NERIS 67 Au dibly acknowledge recognized condo esee bovis bye vEssod i S SP bsN ert eisk tion FRAN nsise 68 Automatically save file while recording trip logs after every GPS readings 68 Rg Na i cQ TITLE TEE 68 GPS Diagnostics PEDE oou gone ete b esdteldoqa Mines Geese ereteid PR eee 70 Voi e C imand Recognition sseni s ires E E EEEE EEE EEE EE E EEE E EATE 73 Tips o Using the Speech Recognition Baie iouis posee sees eai E puentes bl aR 76 cH MERINISCOUBNS ADU RSPCTTRPETTTc 78 Userd fined Report Colle oec eor bewerten e Qu Rn m ER EFE HAN ERR OE FUP R F a EREE ENEE 84 Sea ed MINI Tm 84 Column Symbol sesini bibi cm A rli ap oe bup URS P PERO C MER E DA NEA RE DUNG aM DSdd UM H E 84 Mariner of Dedmal Pads tede nr Ha a ataa a eia a E n e he iaeia 84 Accum lation TG PE TTE TIER 84 Display the Calculation Result as a Letter 1 A 2 B etc ccc ccccsssceceeeesssssssrseeeaaees 85 For the Summary Report the 2sosesossiscencireci nud ends ke Xlll ede EEEE R msn d PN 85 Calculate at Eagliu s etri EP UE HH PUE AD RM MM MENU op EN EN VPN MN 87 Evaluate at Each GPS Point and or trt br ri REX EE E ER Fe p FREUE E YR A CN ERAR S ADR EY ix EUER 87 FOr RN
140. an examine and change them at will To quickly show the Intersection parameters for the selected intersection you may use e the button on the Tool Bar or e the NI button in the Outline View or e adouble click on the intersection in the Outline View or adouble click on the intersection in the Network View or e aright click on a selected intersection in the diagram window selecting Intersection from the pop up menu or adouble click on the intersection in the diagram window or the Intersection command under the View Menu The timing plan dependent parameters in Tru Traffic appear in blue while the timing plan independent parameters appear in black Some of the Intersection Parameters are ignored depending on the Type of Diagram The ignored parameters include the Lanes Volumes and Saturation Flows among others Although these aren t needed for Time Space diagrams they are used when exporting UTDF Universal Traffic Data Format files see page 210 for use in other programs As a result Tru Traffic displays these parameters and lets you edit them even though they might not be necessary for your diagram If you don t need to view Platoon Progression diagrams and won t need to export UTDF files you may safely ignore these parameters Changing the values of certain parameters alters the values of other parameters For example if you change the Distance from the previous intersection Tru Traffic automatically changes the
141. an intersection backs up beyond the upstream intersection then usually the flow and queues on the Platoon Progression diagram will be inaccurate The flow and queue can still be accurate if the queue backs up into the upstream intersection 1 during the green time of the upstream A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 106 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 intersection and 2 when there are no vehicles leaving the upstream intersection The second restriction means that at the time when the queue backs up into upstream intersection there are no vehicles arriving at the upstream intersection and there is no queue waiting at the upstream intersection These criteria are strict so a queue backing up into the upstream intersection usually indicates that you should not trust the diagram Unless you are sure these criteria are met you should either adjust the timing parameters of the diagram to prevent the back up or not use a Platoon Progression diagram at all for that artery Dispersion Factor This is used on Platoon Progression diagrams only It is the arterial platoon dispersion factor The default may be set in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog page 192 but any diagram can override the default
142. ard way to do this Now you can simply set the Protected Turn Phase Sequence to Lead Lag I have a two way artery that splits into a pair of one way arteries which then merge back into a two way artery How do I model this Perhaps the easiest way is in the Intersection Parameters for the intersections in the divided section of the artery designate that the signals control traffic in one direction only This option is available starting with version 8 0 Versions of Tru Traffic prior to 8 0 don t have a straight forward way to do this but you can trick Tru Traffic into simulating this on the diagram There are two methods Consider the artery laid out as in the figure d 7 o Method A Probably the best method is to create two diagrams P 226 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 for the same artery One is for the eastbound leg and is called Mostly Eastbound Artery for this discussion The other is for the westbound leg and is called Mostly Westbound Artery For the most part they have common intersections but each one has a signal in the middle that is not shared by the other diagram The key points are Both diagrams have East as the Forward Direction and both are declared as two way arteries Link the two diagrams at each of their four common intersections using the Link Everything style of link Creating one diagram then using Duplicate Diagram in the Outline View facilitates this but afterwards you ll need to add o
143. are the splits of certain movements as freely scaled or fixed fixed either in seconds or in percent When a split is Fixed Seconds Tru Traffic will assure that its value in seconds remains unchanged even if the Cycle Length or Adjusted Cycle Length is changed Instead it will adjust all the non fixed splits proportionately When a split is Fixed Percent and one or more other split is Fixed Seconds Tru Traffic will assure that its value as percent of Cycle Length remains unchanged even if the Cycle Length or or Adjusted Cycle Length is changed As before it will instead adjust all the non fixed splits proportionately The Fixed Percent option can be helpful when using the automatic optimization to choose an optimal arterial Cycle Length as it allows you to give some additional time to the Fixed Percent splits while showing preference for the Freely Scaled splits at the expense of the Fixed Seconds splits when the Cycle Length increases Table 8 below illustrates an example of how splits are affected by changing the Cycle Length when different scaling rules are in effect Change in Split Phase Split Type Split Increasing cycle Split Decreasing cycle ol Fixed Seconds 20s Os 20s 7s 2 Freely Scaled 50s 584 2s unused bro 57s 4 Fixed Percentage 30s i3s 33s Cycle Length 100s 10s 110s Table 8 Example timings for a three phase signal illustrate how changing the cycle length affects splits for
144. assing through one twice You can also detect when an extent is too large usually due to a bad or misplaced coordinate measurement The two figures below illustrate some common errors in specifying geographic coordinates and in recorded trip logs errors which cause problems in generating the Travel Time amp Delay Report and Plots from Trip Logs The game here is that a run must pass through a red circle in order for the software to conclude that the run passed through an intersection Furthermore a run must pass through at least two consecutive red circles to be counted as having entered the artery 198 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Correct The point lies between the travel time runs and the red circle straddles the runs Incorrect The red circle straddles the travel time runs in only one direction You probably collected just one GPS point in the western lane Collect a second point in the eastern lane to balance the first pulling the centroid to the center of the intersection Or use Google Earth to add the balancing point Incorrect The red circle is too small to straddle the travel time runs You probably collected just one GPS point or your points are too close together or you ve declared too few lanes Collect a pair of points straddling the center of the intersection and bounding the intersection Or use Google Earth to add edit the pair of points Incor
145. asurements in pairs that straddle the center of the intersection If you later add additional GPS readings to increase the accuracy of the geographic center you may regenerate the Travel Time amp Delay Report to take advantage of the greater accuracy Close enough means the distance from the point of closest approach or where two consecutive GPS readings straddle the geographic center of the intersection is less than or equal to the half width of the intersection plus a little slop to account for GPS uncertainty The half width of the intersection is determined by the greater of the following e the number of lanes times the lane width for each approach e the extent or envelope of the measurements or GPS readings entered for the geographic coordinates of the intersection Since there s no provision at present to enter the width of a median strip taking GPS readings on diagonally opposite corners of the intersection so the envelope can be calculated is usually the most effective way to enter the median width You may right click on the Network View and check the item Show Intersection Extents to view the effective extent of the intersections This is a circle centered at the intersection geographic center with a radius equal to the half width of the intersection A trip log must cross this region to count as passing through the intersection Viewing the extent makes it easier to diagnose why a trip log is either skipping an intersection or p
146. ate The current position displayed on the Network View is not affected by the Synchronized Time And although the offsets on the diagrams of trip logs is determined by the Synchronized Time even trip logs with an inaccurate offset contain otherwise correct information and serve perfectly well for Preparing Travel Time and Delay Reports everything except for a few of the columns involving the Start of Through Green time e g GST CGST GCT CGCT and any user defined formulas page 84 involving these Making Plots of Speed vs Distance or Travel Time vs Distance Measuring the travel distance between intersections Calculating the optimal relative offset between intersections for a given direction of travel Calculating the Design Speed between intersections Calculating the start up lost time for the through movement along the artery at an intersection The Synchronized Time and the parameters indicating the synchronized phase transition are stored in the Diagram Data file GPS Trip Logs Page The Trip Logs page of the 9 GPS Receiver View allows you to record view and control logs of trips you take through the signalized network Trip Logs are useful for multiple purposes Plotting trajectories on the diagram windows graphically showing where delay occurs which signals you ve stopped at and where you entered or left the green bands TS Preparing Travel Time and Delay Reports Making Plots of Speed vs Distance or Travel
147. ather than the average of multiple runs as the fastest run is more likely to reflect the freeflow speed The figure below illustrates some of the features of the Click column header 7 buttons to sort or group Drag column dividers runs on that column to resize columns Period TripLog Log 7 1NB LS 401 Plan2 3 7 17 2008 94 32 27 amp M Thu Before Other 1 43 4 mph 3NBUS 401 Plan 2 3 7 17 2008 10 13 14AM Thu Before Other 1 41 8 mph 5NB US 401 Plan 2 3 7 17 2008 10 33164M Thu Before Other 1 43 1 mph 18NBUS 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 42448 amp M Thu Before Other 1 42 7 mph E 21 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 36 37 4M Thu Before Other 1 i 141 23 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 45 43 AM 1 n P5 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 59 48AM Thu Before Other 1 l 27 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 5 11 03 AM Before Other 30 NB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 12 4518PM Wed After Other Run Avg Link Speed 32NB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 1 36 00PM Wed After Other 34NBUS 401 Plan3 2 3 12 2008 2 37 17 PM Thu After Other E 50 NB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 18 2008 2 11 32PM Wed After b d f t A m Check uncheck the box to include exclude the run from the calculation multiple runs and narrow Choose type of statistic to ie scope Or subsequent summarize the selected runs average minimum maxim
148. ay If there is more than one timing plan then after you import the file you may use Select Timing Plan command from the UTDF submenu of the File menu to choose the timing plan currently reflected in the diagram windows Phasing Either CSV or DAT Stores timing plan information that doesn t change with time of day Volume Either CSV or DAT Stores one or more volume counts Tru Traffic can extract an hourly volume from a specified period of time See below for more information If you re importing a Volumes file with the UTDF set Tru Traffic will need to extract an hourly volume Use the controls in the box labeled Use Average of Volume Counts to specify the date and time of the range of volumes counts you wish Tru Traffic to average If you wish to use just one volume count without using an average then set the From date and time to be the start of the volume count and set the To date and time to be the end of the count typically one hour after the start If there s only one volume count in the Volumes file then you only need to set the From date and time to be any time before or up to the start of the count and To date and time can be any time after the count Detailed information about UTDF files can be found in the document UTDF2 1 doc in the Docs subdirectory of the Tru Traffic directory typically C Program Files Tru Traffic TS 211 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination PP Docs This fi
149. bands is especially useful on complex arteries where it is decidedly impossible to provide each direction of travel with a wide continuous green band In these situations you may choose to do the next best thing stop the traffic at only one intersection You may start green bands from the side street left and right turning movements as well as the arterial through movement Side street green bands are considered in Fine Tuning the Offsets You may use the Green Band Action to optionally and automatically optimize the arterial offsets p 163 for bands started from side street turning movements by setting the Green Band Action for the through movement to Stop and the side street turning Green Band Action to Start Judicious use of this parameter also allows you to simulate special cases such as a two way street becoming a one way street at a particular intersection and vice versa For this purpose you may stop the green band at a boundary intersection and start it at an interior intersection 138 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Green Band Action Description Continue The band passes through both red and green time unchanged except possibly for the Speedin the corresponding Speed Category see p 132 Start The band breaks and starts all over again In this case you may specifically set the offset and width of the green band The defaults are the effective green time Stop The band terminates Taper
150. ccuracy Otherwise by default the Network View will show a rectilinear grid which it builds entirely from the declared Distances between intersections and the orientations or Forward Directions of arteries But this information does not necessarily define a unique grid depending on how the distances add up For example if four intersections lie on the corners ofa parallelogram there are infinitely many parallelograms with the given four distances of which no more than two are unique each with a different acute angle including 90 degrees which gives a rectangle If there are enough trapezoids in the grid then the Distances can define their shapes uniquely but even then the declared distances along the legs of the various trapezoids won t necessarily agree with each other to define a unique shape for the whole grid 42 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The result is that Tru Traffic builds a possibly crude rectilinear grid which satisfies some but not necessarily all of the given constraints There are several things you can do to improve the accuracy of the grid Layout Grid with Geographic Coordinates If you don t already have the geographic coordinates of the all intersections you may either import get them from the GPS receiver extrapolate them or enter them manually The by clicking the right mouse button with the mouse cursor on the Network View you may use the pop up menu to layout the grid with the geographic coor
151. cks and Change all Offsets As the intent is to adjust the offsets network wide while preserving coordination you may optionally apply the transition minimizing offset adjustment to all intersections in all arterial timings diagrams in the network including those whose offsets are otherwise locked You should consider using this option only if all coordinated signals are represented in the currently opened diagram data file If a signal group in an adjacent control zone is also coordinated with the current group of signals but it is represented in a separate file then using this option might upset the relationship between the two signal groups 168 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Shift All Offsets Use this option under the Optimize Menu to change the offsets of selected intersections or all intersections in the network by a specific number of seconds positive or negative for adding or subtracting This can be useful in either merging two diagram data files for two separately coordinated zones or merely connecting the two zones as it preserves the coordination within each zone while allowing you to also coordinate the two zones with each other This can also be useful in minimizing the transition time from one timing plan to another while preserves the coordination Rss Change the Offsets at these Intersections 4 V Network 4 V NC 59 Hope Mills Final Plan 5 2 1600 1845 Weekdays 0069 Tra
152. ctive uncertainty of the averages be the standard deviations this means that o4 0 0 or equivalently o 47V o 0 E which is the same expression we derived above as Eq 9 91 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Plots from Trip Logs You may generate plots of Speed vs Distance or Time vs Distance from logged trips along an arterial timings diagram using the button on the Tool Bar or the Plots from Trip Logs command in the View Menu When you use this command the plot is initially of Speed vs Distance Once the plot is displayed you may right click on it and change to Plot Type from Speed vs Distance to Time vs Distance You re given a list of trip log runs involving the currently selected artery You may choose which trip log runs to include in the plot although each plot will only include runs in the same direction of travel If you choose runs in both directions of travel Tru Traffic will generate two plots one for each direction In addition you have a choice of whether to include the Design Speed or speed of any of the various Speed or Green Band Categories page 132 from the Arterial Timings Diagram the user declared design speed which can change from link to link e Average Instantaneous Speed for a given distance along the artery this is the average speed of all the trip log runs that pass through that location e Median Instantaneous Speed for a given distance along the arte
153. d Phase Numbers Splits Design Speeds Posted Speed Limit Transit Light Rail Speed Bicycle Speeds Direction assigned to Forward Distances One way Designations Exclusive Directional Control Designations don t show anything on approaches an intersection or passing through one twice You can also detect when an extent is too large 41 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination usually due to a bad or misplaced coordinate measurement Right click on the Network View to toggle the item Show Items Intersection Extents or choose Properties 8 View any of a variety of intersection related items including adjusted cycle lengths offset and Offset reference point and along each approach the lanes volumes phases amp splits user specified speed distance one way designation or exclusive control designation and along the artery the direction assigned to the forward arrow at each intersection Right click on the Network View and check the desired options under Show Items or choose Properties to view the complete set of options in a dialog 9 View the individual Trip Log points color coded according to the instantaneous speed as a percentage of the design speed by right clicking on the Network View and checking the option Show Items Speed Color coded Trip Log Points or choose Properties The color speed bins are the same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences d
154. d the Bus band the Light Rail band and the Bicycle band but there is not a separate weighting factor for the Posted Speed Limit band If you wish to coordinate the signals for the Posted Speed Limit then you should set the Design Speed to equal the posted speed limit Use the speed type selection box near the upper right corner of the tabbed page to view or modify the parameters for the five different speeds and green bands Design Speed The term Design Speed is used for two different albeit related purposes a speed and a speed or band category As a speed it is the average freeflow speed of the traffic at the intersection or more accurately it is the speed for which you wish to coordinate the traffic signals Along the artery it is the speed of the traffic downstream from the intersection and on the cross street it is the speed of the traffic upstream from the intersection It is measured in the units specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog described on page 190 miles hour feet second kilometers hour etc Starting with version 10 0 the Design Speed represents but one of a number of speed and band categories that you may view on the time space diagram In addition to the Design Speed you may view bands representing the Posted Speed Limit Bus Speed Light Rail Speed and or Bicycle Speed To view or modify the parameters for the design speed band choose Design Speed instead of Posted Speed Limit
155. d Synchro can share street traffic and signal data through a set of text files in the UTDF Universal Traffic Data Format either 2006 combined file or the older 5 file version 2 1 Both Tru Traffic and Synchro can read and write these files For details on how to read or write these files with Tru Traffic see page 210 For details on how to read or write these files with Synchro see the section Importing Exporting UTDF Files with Synchro in the online help How do I transfer my existing diagram data to the AAP To transfer diagram data created with Tru Traffic that is data that wasn t originally created in the AAP and transferred to Tru Traffic to the AAP simply 1 Open up the diagram data file and save it to an AAP file by changing the file type to AAP File in the Save File dialog 2 Inthe Save File dialog ensure that the subdirectory where Tru Traffic will export the AAP file is where the AAP looks for its data files 3 Answer No when Tru Traffic asks you whether to use a reference file unless you have an existing AAP file for that artery but even then it s not necessary The file you export can then be loaded by the AAP How do I work with multiple timing plans for my signalized network Use the drop down menu C Denm on the Tool Bar to add delete or select between timing plans If you prefer to keep your timing plans in separate files there is a companion utility 221 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traf
156. d for TRANSYT 7F to determine the actual flow based on the Design Speed and flow of the opposing through movement On Time Space and Time Location diagrams only If you have started a new green band at the intersection changing the Turn Phase Sequence causes Tru Traffic to reset the Offset of the New Green Band s to their default values Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Sequence This is a drop down list box that determines the order in which the exclusive pedestrian movement if it exists occurs with respect to the service to the vehicular traffic movements It is used only on extended Time Space and Platoon Progression diagrams The choices for the exclusive pedestrian phase EPP are Lead Lag and None with Lead meaning the EPP leads i e is serviced before the vehicular traffic phase Similarly None means there is no EPP You may have up to two EPPs in a cycle For clarity one is associated with the North South phase and the other with the East West phase Since Tru Traffic treats an EPP as an all red phase you may use either or both to model any other type of all red phase You should take care about which EPP you use North South or East West they are not the same especially if the Offset Reference Point is either Start of the arterial phase or Start of arterial phase yellow The North South EPP is referenced with respect to the North South vehicular movements and the East West EPP is referenced with respect to
157. d limit To view or modify the bus speed choose Bus Speed instead of Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Light Rail Speed or Bicycle Speed in the speed type selection box near the upper right corner of the tabbed page in the Intersection Parameters dialog When you change the bus speed along the artery at an intersection the program offers to change all downstream bus speeds to match Light Rail Speed For this discussion we refer to Light Rail Speed as one of a number of speed and band categories that you may view on the time space diagram In addition to the Light Rail Speed you may view bands representing the Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Bus Speed and or Bicycle Speed Green bands for the Light Rail Speed or for any of these categories may be defined in terms of the Green Band Action Offset and Width In the special case of the Bus and Light Rail categories you have additional options for specifying the time of day of their green bands for example according to the transit schedule the time interval between bands also according to the transit schedule and whether the 136 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 band is constrained to start during effective green time of the signal which gives you a means of modeling a band for a preemptive transit system or a transit system that does not affect the normal traffic flow or its signal for example an exclusive rail or lane on say a bridge When using the option to auto
158. de St Lakeview Dr 69 0363 Rockfish Rd 363 0584 Golfview Rd 584 1226 Walmart Sammio s 1226 0357 Camden Rd 357 0610 Hope Mills Bypass Formerly Geo Owen Rd 610 0230 Cumberland Rd 230 0458 Wingate Butternut Rds 458 0337 Redwood Dr 33 4 Cumberland Road Final Plan 5 2 1600 1845 Weekdays 1254 SR 1141 Cumberland Rd 1254 0230 NC 59 Hope Mills Road 230 0619 Wingate Road 619 0446 Ireland Drive 446 0383 Upchurch Drive 383 162 Hope Mills Bypass Final Plan 5 2 1600 1845 Weekday 0274 Bunce Road 274 1266 Marykirk Old Bingham Rds 1266 0597 Bailey Lake Bibar Rds 597 0575 SR 1107 Fisher Rd 575 gt m J amp amp S S S S S S lt z 1S ESSE S S 6 SS S ST ST S Change Offsets by seconds O 159 159 seconds V Disregard any Offset Locks and Change all Selected Offsets v o De no x cna m As the intent is to adjust the offsets network wide while preserving coordination you may optionally apply this offset adjustment to all intersections in all arterial timings diagrams in the network including those whose offsets are otherwise locked 169 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination File Management From the File pull down menu you have vari
159. ded not recorded live the speed associated with each reading is already the calculated speed which is usually less accurate making this test by the Filter useless Figure 4 page 54 illustrates additional compromises in downloaded pre recorded Trip Logs 3 Acceleration The acceleration is calculated two different ways speed only and position and speed The speed only calculation takes into account only the difference in the measured speed assuming the trip log was recorded live not downloaded from reading A to reading B and the difference in their times The position and speed calculation takes into account the position speed and heading at points A and B It finds the two accelerations initial and final acceleration including the braking and centripetal acceleration from turning that are required to be applied constantly for half the time interval to start at point A with its speed and heading and end up at point B at its speed and heading The maximum of the magnitude of these two accelerations is then used The Filter marks point B as bad if either the speed only acceleration or the position and speed acceleration exceeds the Maximum Accelerations which you may separately specify Once a point is marked bad subsequent comparisons may be to the last good point This can be useful in filtering out a series of consecutive spurious points but there s a risk when there s just one spurious point When the time interval bet
160. dentical except for where both directions of travel have lagging turn phases The Offset Reference Point may be edited in the Intersection Parameters dialog or directly on the Diagram Window by selecting the intersection and clicking the right mouse button and selecting Offset Reference Point from the pop up menu You may also select the intersection and press CtrI E to edit the Offset Reference Point The default Offset Reference Point may be specified in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog see page 192 and setting it as a Arterial Diagram Parameter overrides the default Setting it as an intersection parameter in turn overrides the Arterial Diagram Parameter so different intersections can have different Offset Reference Points if you wish Changing the Offset Reference Point does not affect the value of the intersection signal Offsets however it does affect the point to which the signal Offset refers Thus changing the Offset Reference Point does shift the signal in time resulting in an effective change in Offset but the values of the Offset itself is unchanged This effective change will apply at any intersections linked to the current intersection see below The Offset Reference Point does not affect the reference point of the Offsets of the green band A cross traffic turn is a left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule r
161. der 7 buttons to sort or group Drag column dividers runs on that column to resize columns Period Runtt Travel Time 18 58 US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 19 45 AM Before Other 1 130 2 20 SB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 30 35 AM Before Other 151 2 T 22 SB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 41 53 AM Before Other 108 1 24 SB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 4 53 32 AM Before Other 139 2 26 SB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 5 05 13 AM Before Other 28 SB US 401 Plan 2 3 8 14 2008 5 16 19 AM Before Other P9SB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 12 40 38 PM After Other 31 SB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 1 30 34 PM 7 33 SB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 12 2009 2 32 35 58 US 401 Plan 3 2 3 12 2008 2 45 45PM Thu After Fi CD lic ANI Di 27 72HOo 5nn 71714 Dhd fed Afr travel time of 3 selected trip logs 116 8 seconds 7 Help Check All Q Uncheck All Check uncheck the box to Use Shift or Ctrl to select include exclude the run from multiple runs and narrow the calculation the scope of subsequent Choose type of statistic to summarize the selected runs average minimum maximum or nth percentile operations e g Check All The relative offset is calculated from the average travel time of the selected trip log runs such that the start of the through movement in the given direction of travel is delayed from the start of the corresponding through movement at the u
162. dinates Stiffen the Grid By clicking the right mouse button with the mouse cursor on the Network View you may use the pop up menu to Stiffen the grid which will rebuild the default rectilinear grid undoing any other adjustments you may have made Reposition Individual Nodes By holding down the Shift key you may drag using the left mouse button individual nodes on the Network view to more realistic positions Shaping the Links By holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys you may drag using the left mouse button the Bezier curve control points for individual links on the Network view to more realistic shapes Drag the control point to the associated node to straighten the link Note that none of these adjustments to the Network View affect the declared Distance between intersections You may use the Edit Undo command to restore the Network View to its previous layout before the adjustment was made Background Map for Network View You may use an image file as the map background in the Network View by right clicking anywhere on the Network View and choosing Background Map Properties from the pop up menu Before clicking OK you may want to set the Transparency to 50 75 so any GPS trip logs may stand out more clearly against a possibly cluttered background Similarly right click on the Network View and choose Background Map to move or resize the image used as a background map for the Network View Tru Traffic accepts a varie
163. e and the green was not early due to gapping out at the time the run was recorded The cumulative time elapsed from presumed start of through green to vehicle startup as determined by the startup threshold speed in the definition of Stop Note that because of this definition the effective startup time may be later than what you d expect so you may want to add about 3 seconds per cumulative number of links to this elapsed time to account for the difference if you re confident the vehicle came to a complete stop The time elapsed from presumed start of through green to this node crossing The cumulative time elapsed from presumed start of through green to this node crossing The travel distance from vehicle startup after final stop to this node crossing as determined by the startup threshold speed in the definition of Stop or 0 if there is no blockage The cumulative travel distance from vehicle startup after final stop to this node crossing The cumulative number of links in the run or number of nodes crossed after entering the artery and The through movement volume 81 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Use the Preferences Layout TT amp D Report section to choose which items to include in the report See How Trip Logs are Processed page 196 for some comments and definitions on how these items are determined You may add new columns to the report with user defined formulas The report includes su
164. e 62 to automatically do so For trip logs recorded live 1 e not downloaded the speed is a separate measurement by the GPS receiver independent of the position information The speed and heading are measured by the Doppler shift in the frequency As a result the plotted speed is a pretty good indication of the instantaneous speed not the average speed between two readings For trip logs downloaded not recorded live the speed is calculated as the average speed between two readings This is usually less accurate as illustrated in Figure 4 page 54 93 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination At first glance it seems that the Time vs Distance plot gives the same information as the trip logs plotted as trajectories on the arterial timings diagram Nonetheless there are some important differences mostly due to the Time vs Distance plots not including the signal timing information Time vs Distance Plots Arterial Timings Diagrams which have no signal timing information which include signal timing information Time is measured from the beginning ofthe run Time is measured from the signal cycle start The trip log run trajectories all start with time 0 time The trip log trajectories are plotted based at the point they enter the artery on the clock synchronization to show the point in the signal cycle at which the trip entered the artery The default vertical time scale is sufficient to
165. e new diagrams or add new intersections to an artery the default phase numbers for the various phases on the approaches will all be wrong In this case you may find it easier to use the Phase Number assignment buttons in the Timings Action List on the Timings Page ofthe Intersection Parameters dialog box to edit all the phase numbers as a group Scroll the Timings Action List as needed to find and click the Phase Number assignment buttons V Permitted Locked v 155 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Lane Group Parameters These are parameters which affect only the volume and saturation flow calculation associated S n with a particular lane group for the currently selected mm plan They are used on Platoon Progression diagrams only They are displayed in the Lane Group Parameters dialog box where you can examine and change them at will The timing plan dependent parameters in Tru Traffic appear in blue while the timing plan independent parameters appear in black To view the parameters for a given lane group of the selected intersection use one of the lane group buttons e g 7 on the Volumes page of the Intersection Parameters dialog These buttons may be either flat or protruding depending on your preference in the Desktop page of the Preferences dialog If they re flat they protrude only when the mouse cursor is over them Once you ve set the parameters
166. e of each intersection below the corresponding signal strip region Z4 in Figure 1 If the names of the intersections are too long or the intersections are too close together then Tru Traffic will write the name of one intersection on top of that of another To reduce the likelihood of this occurring Tru Traffic places the names of adjacent intersections on alternating lines You may zoom in on a section of the diagram to further resolve regions that are crowded by left dragging to select a group of intersections When zoomed in think of the diagram or plot as spanning multiple pages Page Up amp Page Down jump to the next page Below the intersection names Tru Traffic may place the intersection offset as specified on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog page 176 You may independently select the weight and size of the fonts Tru Traffic uses for drawing the various text in diagram in the Arterial Diagram Parameters dialog Caution On Platoon Progression diagrams if the queue at an intersection backs up beyond the upstream intersection then usually the flow and queues on the Platoon Progression diagram will be inaccurate The flow and queue can still be accurate if the queue backs up into the upstream intersection 1 during the green time of the upstream intersection and 2 when there are no vehicles leaving the upstream intersection The second restriction means that when the queue backs up into the upstream intersection there are
167. e of the features of the trip log list 78 Click column header buttons to sort or group trip logs on that column Check uncheck the box to include exclude the trip log from the report User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Drag column dividers to resize columns SB US 401 NB US 401 SB US 401 8 14 2008 8 14 2008 8 14 2008 4 53 32 AM 4 59 48 AM 5 05 13 AM Type Before Before Before Period Other Other Other Runs Travel Direction South North South NB US 401 SB US 401 BB US 401 CNB US 467 SB US 401 NB US 4 8 14 2008 8 14 2008 3 11 2003 3 11 2003 3 11 2009 3 11 2003 3 24 2009 5 11 03 AM 5 16 19 AM 4 11 12 4M 4 16 54 AM 4 22 39 AM 4 27 38 AM 3 38 32 AM Wed Wed Wed Tue Before Before After After After After After Other Other Other Other Other Other Other South North North South W nalyze a subsection of the artery 86 1231 NC 210 1231 ta 9 CZ oK XX Cancel X Cancel X corel 2 Hen 4 cread f Check pi Russe O Uncheck All 06 012 GUS 401 421 NC 27 E 29 Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple trip logs and narrow the scope of subsequent Report on just a subsection of operations e g Check All the artery if desired The report may optionally include for each run in each selected trip log The name of the trip log and exact date and time it began The intersec
168. e offset reference point at the selected intersections upon transitioning to or from a specific timing plan With this strategy you must specify the time of day at or after which the transition is scheduled to occur and also the transition mode e g Dwell Add Subtract Shortway or as specified at each intersection 167 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Minimize Timing Plan Transition LE Minimize Transition Times at these Intersections gt 4 Network 4 NC 59 Hope Mills Final Plan 5 2 1600 1845 Weekdays 0069 Trade St Lakeview Dr 69 0363 Rockfish Rd 363 0584 Golfview Rd 584 1226 Walmart Sammio s 1226 0357 Camden Rd 357 V 0610 Hope Mills Bypass Formerly Geo Owen Rd 6 v 0230 Cumberland Rd 230 0458 Wingate Butternut Rds 458 0337 Redwood Dr 337 4 Cumberland Road Final Plan 5 2 1600 1845 Weekdays 1254 SR 1141 Cumberland Rd 1254 710230 NC 59 Hope Mills Road 230 0619 Wingate Road 619 X Transition Minimization Strategy Adjust offsets to Be as dose to zero as possible Minimize the change in time of day of the offset reference point upon transitioning from the Timing Plan Timing Plan 5 2 160 sec hd At or within one cycle after 5 58 54 PM E Using Transition Mode Dwell at all intersections z V Disregard any Offset Lo
169. e options to show many intersection related items on the Network View including adjusted cycle lengths offset and offset reference point and along each approach the lanes volumes phases amp amp splits user specified speed distance one way designation or exclusive control designation and along the artery the direction assigned to the forward arrow at each intersection o options for specified phases to accept overrides without warning of minimum split clearance times and or yellow trap phasings e Added in version 9 0 o uncoordinated user specified cycle length o option to automatically assign all leftover time to the arterial through split o advance warning flasher time o the Timing Plan specific Offset Reference Point o the intersection specific Offset and Splits units of measurement percent or seconds o linking of bands between diagrams o agency logos in the header and or footer 219 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination o some Trip Log Plot styling options such as color thickness and line style of axes ticks and grids o color coding for the links page 45 on the Network View e g based on average link speeds from selected Trip Log runs e Added in version 8 0 o walk time for signal phases o one way designations for intersections o the posted speed limit downstream from intersections o designation that a signal controls traffic in just one direction of travel
170. e parameters at either intersection and Tru Traffic makes the equivalent change at the other Linking everything between two intersection indicates that the two intersections are really just two representations of a single intersection This is useful for modeling signalized networks or multiple intersecting arteries When you have two or more diagram windows representing intersecting arteries you should link everything between the common intersection s so Tru Traffic can ensure that all the intersection parameters remain consistent When you have linked everything between two intersections in different diagram windows Tru Traffic relies on the directions of travel of the two arteries to maintain consistency between the directional parameters at the two intersections If you changing the Forward Direction of one of these arteries Tru Traffic must reset the directional parameters at the intersections to restore consistency If you don t want Tru Traffic to do this you must break the link before changing the Forward Direction In either case be wary of changing the Forward Direction along an artery which has intersections linked to arteries in other diagram windows All Timings When you link all timings between two intersections Tru Traffic ensures that the Adjusted Cycle Length Offset Splits and whether the splits are Fixed protected turn and pedestrian Phase Sequences and with traffic turn on red option are all identical for the two inte
171. e partial arterial bandwidth is added to the base score by default The adjustments for Bandwidth Trimmed from Start or End of the band provide a way to favor the start of the band over the end or vice versa When the effective green time is less than the width of the arriving band and a decision must be made some users will give green time to the start of the band at the expense of the end of the band on argument that the start of the band is more likely to be populated 165 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination with vehicles or that any vehicles in the start of the band are probably the ones that waited longest in the queue at an upstream intersection and should be treated preferentially downstream Other users will try to ensure that the end of the band as much as possible passes unclipped through the artery to reduce the chance of stopping any vehicles for the maximum stopped delay on an effective red time or to reduce the frustration of arriving at an intersection just as the signal turns red The default coefficient value for the bandwidth trimmed from the start is 1 so the this time is subtracted from the base score by default The default coefficient value for the bandwidth trimmed from the end is 0 so the this time is ignored by default Grouping On arteries with more than say 10 signals a timing pattern that seeks to provide a two way progression band through the entire artery typically creates some
172. e respective GPS receiver types GPS Receiver Type Advantages Disadvantages NMEA compliant Earthmate Here I mean the original serial port device The newer USB port devices fall under the NMEA compliant category above Garmin Proprietary Here I mean just the ones with a serial interface cable not the ones with a USB interface cable The newer USB based receivers will not work directly with Tru Traffic at present A FAQ on page 223 gives additional details Most can function as stand alone units Compatible with a wider variety of software Batteries on many can last for a day or more Many can be initialized and start tracking within a few seconds Reports the position and speed to Tru Traffic once every second Relatively inexpensive typically around 120 Comes with map navigation software Reports the position and speed to Tru Traffic once every second Allows you to download prerecorded trip logs into Tru Traffic Reports the position and speed with a potentially higher precision than when running with NMEA 0183 interface 69 Report the position and speed to Tru Traffic only once every 2 seconds Tend to be more expensive typically 200 300 Doesn t necessarily include map navigation software although it can use it if you buy it separately Not compatible with the NMEA standard Can function only when connected to a computer or other device over the serial por
173. e side street turning movements the progression of this band is also taken into account in adjusting the offsets The band that makes it through the entire artery can be viewed by setting the downstream Green Band Action at the arterial boundary intersections to Start and setting then Green Band Action at all intersections downstream to Clip This can be done quickly by right clicking on the next intersection downstream from the arterial boundary intersection and setting its Green Band Action to Clip when you finish Tru Traffic will offer to change all downstream through Band Actions to match When fine tuning offsets the Offset at one of the intersections is held stable The offsets of all other intersections are adjusted to accommodate this one By default the stable offset intersection is the one specified the last time you opened the Optimize Arterial Offsets dialog if ever or it s one linked to a crossing artery if there is one or it s the first intersection in the diagram Unlike the Optimize Arterial Offsets option the fine tuning offsets is very sensitive to the starting conditions You may find it best to l Apply the Fine Tune Offsets command once or twice 2s Adjust the phase sequence at one of the intersection by selecting the intersection on the diagram right clicking and choosing Phase Sequence from the pop up menu then 3 Repeat the Fine Tune Offsets command Repeating these steps multiple times may give a satisfactory
174. e title from dominating the plotting region when there are many trip logs Show Date and or Time in each Trip Log Title Label Check these boxes to include the date and or time of each trip log in its listing in the plot title When there are many trip logs included in the plot unchecking the box reduces the clutter in the labels Show List of Trip Logs Runs in Plot Legend As noted above the plot includes a Legend along the right hand side of the plot The legend gives a detailed list of each run of each trip log included in the plot showing which color and line style shows the corresponding trajectory e Title at the top of the plot The Title gives the name of the arterial timings diagram and optionally a list of all the trip logs but not the runs included in the plot Use this check box to indicate whether you d like this list of included trip log runs in the plot legend When there are many trip log runs included in the plot unchecking the box reduces the clutter in the legend 185 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination But don t show the Trip Log Runs if there are more than In this box specify an upper limit to the number of trip log runs listed in the plot legend This prevents the legend from dominating the plotting region when there are many runs Show Date and or Time in each Trip Log Run Legend Label Check these boxes to include the date and or time of each trip log run in its listing in
175. e unit is set to feet and the diagram length unit is set to inches then the Horizontal and Vertical Scales will be measured in feet per inch and seconds per inch respectively Distance Unit The Distance Unit is used to express the Distance from the previous intersection and the numerator of the Horizontal Scale It may be set to feet yards miles meters or kilometers Speed Unit The Speed Unit is used to measure the Design Speed and all speeds in the Travel Time and Delay Report It may be set to either feet second yards second miles hour meters second or kilometers hour Offset Unit The Offset Unit is used for to measure the Offsets of the signals and on Time Space diagrams of the green bands arterial and new It may be set to either percent of the Cycle Length or seconds To avoid conflicts Tru Traffic stores the Offsets internally as percent so changing the Cycle Lengths will change the Offset even if it is measured in seconds If the Offset unit is set to seconds Tru Traffic allows the Offsets to be entered in seconds however it then converts them to percent You may also set the number of decimal places to which the offset is shown 190 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Splits Unit The Split Unit is used to measure the Splits It may be set to either percent of the Cycle Length or seconds To avoid conflicts Tru Traffic stores the Splits internally as percent so changing the Cycle Lengths will change the Splits
176. easurement dialog described on page 190 In that dialog box you may also set the number of decimal places to which the Offset is shown Be warned In order to avoid internal conflicts Tru Traffic stores the Offset internally in percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length even if it is entered in seconds Thus if you change the Cycle Length the Offset will assume a new value in seconds maintaining its value in percent unchanged An associated check box labeled Locked allows you to protect the offset of this intersection from being changed in the optimization process Click one of the pu l buttons to determine the actual travel offset relative to a neighboring upstream intersection using one or more Trip Log runs page 51 Note that the arrows on the buttons indicate direction of travel These button are enabled only if there are trip logs involving travel to this intersection from the corresponding neighboring upstream intersection You may select which trip log runs to use in the calculation from a list of all relevant trip log runs The figure below illustrates some of the features of the list of trip log runs 5A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 124 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Click column hea
177. easurement page of the Preferences dialog you may set the units in which some quantities are entered and expressed The quantities affected by the Units of Measurement are Horizontal and Vertical Scales Design Speed Distance from Previous Intersection Splits Offset and Vehicle Length You may override the Units of Measurement for offsets and splits at any intersection This accommodates using different types of signal controllers at different intersections in the network For offsets and splits you may also set the number of decimal places to which the values are shown Changing the Units of Measurement will change the numerical values but not the physical values of these quantities Thus if the Distance between two intersections is declared as 300 feet then changing the Distance unit from feet to yards causes Tru Traffic to display the Distance between the intersections as 100 yards the number is changed but the physical distance is unaltered Consequently you are free to change the Units of Measurement at any moment without affecting the diagram currently open or any saved on the disk You may for example develop a diagram with English units and change to Metric units before creating the report of arterial timings diagram parameters Diagram Size Unit This unit 1s either inches or centimeters cm and is used to express the diagram size and margins as well as the denominator of the horizontal and Vertical Scales Thus if the Distanc
178. ecessary when your network has triangular block or intersections with more than four legs Google KML On the Google KML page you may set parameters that determine how Trip Logs or averages or medians of Trip Logs or stops are exported to Google Earth KML files or how they re copied to the clipboard in Google KML format See the chapter on Using Google Earth with Tru Traffic p 201 for step by step details 194 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Color Bins Each point of the trip log has an associated icon the color of which depends on the current speed as a percentage of the Design Speed along the arterial link or stop duration By default the colors are Red when the speed is less than 33 33 of the user declared Design Speed along the arterial link or less than by default the upper speed threshold for a Stop in Travel Time amp Delay Report set on the Layout TT amp D Report page e 700v when the speed is between 33 33 and 66 67 of the Design Speed e Green when the speed is between 66 67 and 110 of the Design Speed and e Blue when the speed exceeds 110 of the Design Speed This is nominally flagged as an unsafe speed You may override any of these speed thresholds or colors The speed color bins are also used for color coding the links on the Network View as desired see page 45 Use Low Speed Color for Speeds below Use this dropdown list to specify an overriding rule for coloring an icon with the l
179. econds The two Uncoordinated options allow you to avoid warning messages for intersections operating out of coordination i e intersections whose cycle length is not closely harmonically related to the network wide Cycle Length When you choose Uncoordinated implied the cycle length is taken to be the sum of the splits so there s never a warning about the splits not summing to the cycle length When you choose Uncoordinated specified you may explicitly specify the cycle length and the warning about the splits not summing to the cycle length appears should the sum of the splits not equal the cycle length that you specify If the Splits Unit of Measurement page 190 is percent instead of seconds then you should use Uncoordinated specified instead Uncoordinated implied If the Splits Unit of Measurement is seconds not percent then you may use either one For convenience the Adjusted Cycle Length 1s displayed in seconds next to the choices However remember that the parameter you set is the cycle ratio not the number of seconds in the cycle As a result changing the network Cycle Length changes the number of seconds displayed as the Adjusted Cycle Length but the ratio remains unaffected You may edit the Adjusted Cycle Length in the Intersection Parameters dialog or in the Diagram Window by selecting the intersection and using the right mouse button and selecting Cycle Length from the pop up menu You may also select the intersect
180. econds there is no protected cross traffic turning movement in the southbound direction and there is a leading cross traffic turning movement in the northbound direction beginning 20 seconds after time zero If the Offset Reference Point is the start of the first through movement then the offset would be set to 25 and would reference the northbound through cross traffic turning movement The Offset Reference Points start of first through movement and start of arterial phase are identical for all protected turn Phase Sequences except for the one where both directions of travel have leading turning movements In all other cases the beginning of the first through movement coincides with the beginning of service to the artery Similarly the reference points start of last through movement yellow and start of arterial phase yellow are identical except for where both directions of travel have lagging cross traffic turns The default Offset Reference Point may be specified in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog see page 192 but setting it as a arterial timings diagram parameter overrides the default In addition any intersection can override the arterial diagram parameter Changing the Offset Reference Point causes Tru Traffic to change that of every intersection in the diagram Changing the Offset Reference Point does not affect the value of any of the intersection signal offsets however it does affect the point to which the signal off
181. ected It seems that most USB to Serial adapters pick a serial port other than COMI or COM2 Many pick COM4 or COMS In Windows Device Manager under Ports COM amp LPT you should find the USB to Serial adapter listed often that listing will tell you which serial port it s using The wrong Type of GPS Receiver was selected This is a common problem with Garmin GPS receivers The Garmins can communicate with Tru Traffic in either of two modes NMEA compliant or Garmin Proprietary While each of these modes has its advantages and disadvantages the important thing is that both the GPS receiver and Tru Traffic agree on which mode to use By default they don t agree Garmin receivers are set to the Garmin Proprietary mode by default and Tru Traffic is set to the NMEA compliant mode In the Garmin eTrex Legend you can view and change if desired the mode by choosing Main Menu Setup Interface While tracking with the GPS receiver I don t see my current position on the diagram or My recorded trip logs don t appear on the diagram You need to set the Geographic Coordinates of the intersections To display your current position on a diagram or the Network View Tru Traffic needs two pieces of information 1 where you are now geographically and 2 where the intersections are geographically Comparing these two Tru Traffic can tell where you are in relation to the signals on the diagram or the Network View and show your position The
182. ection assignments You may assign the unassigned coordinates to intersections change the assignments or skip coordinates by not assigning them to any intersection before clicking OK to accept the list You can save yourself a step by making sure each intersection in Tru Traffic has a unique Intersection ID Number and assigning that Intersection ID Number directly to the placemark in Google Earth To do this in Google Earth add the ID number in the placemark s name or its description preceded with either the text ID or Thereafter Tru Traffic will tentatively assign those placemarks accordingly when you paste them from the clipboard or when you import the KML file If Tru Traffic already had some coordinates for some intersections you have a choice whether you want the new coordinates from Google Earth to supplement or merge with the ones already in Tru 201 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Traffic or whether you want to replace the existing ones overwriting them If the folder in Google Earth has a complete set of coordinates for each intersection then you probably want to replace the existing ones Create Tru Traffic Network from Locations in Google Earth For the most part follow the instructions in the section above titled Transfer Intersection Locations from Google Earth with the following twists 1 Start with an empty Tru Traffic window That is make sure you first close any Dgm f
183. eed may also be displayed on Speed vs Distance plots Posted Speed Limit The term Posted Speed Limit is used for two different albeit related purposes a speed and a speed or band category As a speed it is the posted speed limit at this intersection Along the artery it is the speed limit for the traffic downstream from the intersection and on the cross street it is the speed limit for the traffic upstream from the intersection It is measured in the units specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box miles hour feet second kilometers hour etc Starting with version 10 0 the Posted Speed Limit represents but one of a number of speed and band categories that you may view on the time space diagram In addition to the Posted Speed Limit you may view bands representing the Design Speed Bus Speed Light Rail Speed and or Bicycle Speed To view or modify the posted speed limit choose Posted Speed Limit instead of Design Speed in the speed type selection box near the upper right corner of the tabbed page in the Intersection Parameters dialog When you change the posted speed limit along the artery at an intersection the program offers to change all downstream posted speed limits to match The posted speed limit has three special uses e t s displayed in the Travel Time and Delay Report where it s used to calculate another measure of the delay and where it s available for reference in user defined report c
184. egions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 126 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 bands on Time Space diagrams These always refer to the point at which the green bands begin which will be near the front of the platoon if a queue has built up However since changing the Offset Reference Point does effectively shift the intersection signals in time this change will cause Tru Traffic to reset the Offsets if they re not locked of any green bands that start at the intersection to their default value Protected Turn Phase Sequence The protected cross traffic Turn Phase Sequence is a drop down list box that determines the order in which the through and protected turning movement phase if it exists occur for each direction of travel These are left turns in right hand Drive Rule regions the United States and Europe right turns in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain and Australia The key words are Lead Lag Lead Lag and None These refer to the protected cross traffic turning movement with respect to the opposing through movement Thus a Lead for northbound protected Turn Phase Sequence means that the cross traffic turning movement of the northbound traffic leads 1 e is served before the opposing southbound through movement None indicates that there 1s no protected cross traffic turning phase in the corresponding direction of travel Lead Lag indicate
185. elect that image file again for a header footer Either way the contents of the image file are also stored in the diagram data file so the header footer logos remain intact when you share the file with others In the Layout Header Footer page of the Preferences dialog you may specify a default set of images to appear in the header footer of diagrams whenever you create them These default images are always stored in your user preferences by file reference only so any changes to the image file external to Tru Traffic always affect your default header footers in the user preferences Arterial Diagram Parameters These are parameters which affect the entire diagram and artery and every intersection along the artery for the currently selected C M laxis plan They are displayed in the Arterial Diagram dialog box where you can examine and change them at will To quickly show the Arterial Diagram parameters for the selected diagram you may use e click the Lu button on the Tool Bar or e click the NI button in the Outline View or e a double click on the arterial timings diagram in the Outline View or e click the Name of the Arterial Diagram on the on the Diagram Window or right click on the Diagram Window selecting Arterial Diagram from the pop up menu or e double click on the title or intersection names in the diagram window or click the Arterial Diagram command under the View Menu The timing plan dependent parameters in Tru T
186. ent factor for heavy vehicles When field data are not available the HCM recommends using a value of 2 for the Heavy Vehicles Conflicting Peds The volume of Conflicting Peds for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It helps determine the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for with traffic turns It is measured in pedestrians per hour When field data are not available the HCM recommends assuming a value of 0 peds hr for the Conflicting Peds unless field data indicate otherwise in which case the recommendation is 157 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Level of Pedestrian Traffic Conflicting Peds peds hr None Low Moderate High Approach Grade The Approach Grade percent for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It determines the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for approach grade When field data are not available the HCM recommends using a value of 0 for the Approach Grade Has On Street Parking The Has On Street Parking check box and the number of Parking Maneuvers per hour for a particular lane group are used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It determines the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for the existence of a parking lane adjacent to that lane group When field data are not available the HCM recommends usi
187. equences and cycle lengths These coefficients do not affect the algorithm for optimizing specifically the offsets Instead they affect the scoring of the different phase sequences combinations the scoring of the different cycle lengths and the fine tuning of the offsets The base score and all scoring adjustments are measured in bandwidth as a percent of the cycle length The base score is the bandwidth of the arterial wide or section wide if the artery is divided into groups through band The Scoring Adjustment Coefficients allow you to specify which of the scoring adjustments are actually applied to this base score and to what extent For each coefficient a value of 1 causes the corresponding adjustment to be fully added to the base score a value of 0 causes it to be neglected entirely and a value of 1 causes it to be subtracted from base score to give the final score The adjustment for Excess Directional Asymmetry may be subtracted from the base score to apply a discount for the extent to which the through bands in the two different directions of travel fall out of proportion to the Directional Weighting Factors that you ve specified Subtracting this from the base score can help produce bandwidths in a ratio closer to the Directional Weighting Factors The expression for the Excess Directional Asymmetry is 2 1 w B w B where wy is the weighting factor as a fraction for the forward direction of travel and 1 wy is the weig
188. er m Legend I abels eesssesetsise metr boston hn nr pase boda gn sedan 186 Show Listof Trip RES CELERE RTT TETTE 186 vei io M RA Toon PTOL 186 ES EET Um 186 Stop RISO OCIO OL DOO STD 187 Critical Speed Thresholds asror TT 187 Options Included m the TT amp D Report SUTIISEV sce pe PRU PIER ORE SURE Deuda Rua DN 187 Include Table of Contents Links in the Details Rep rt oe eene 188 In lude Legend at tbe Top of th Report course sescns eoi copas o Dl od a tee ERAS UR 188 Baro od EDS sssrini b Gub Ren Oei oer tried pan bu Doa ee 189 incu NM MMC p Er 189 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 IRSE Sa ON CERCHI 189 Show the Vertical and or Horizontal 96316 e ipee torri Et FE To PUER a Die hid Cro 189 Onca NNI Ncc RM 189 Units MUS Ir E OCTO Tome 190 Diagram Size Umit ipei ren E T TO EON 190 Di nee U T r ele gue dee era E T 190 Speed UNI nnna E R E ERR MEN PT RUNS 190 Ora E57 E EE EE E E AE E E E 190 BRIAN i EE E E A E aiv Uie ev en RD odd bU 191 Vehicle Length and Lane Width Unit ooi Serie ple EGO RRE ARS E Dr US 191 EO eM oem sttem nente roca ca vans eae tmt emere esa 191 COLO We X IM 191 Default COELI a TCI 192 MR sce are TOT QE E 192 bor Uu MENTRE 192 File Folder NEMUS n ETT Eme 193 Diagram File Polder Used by Default upon SPUD eer nere Robben ntn rtu tae 193 Keep a Backup Copy when Overwriting Existing Files DRE trt R Rech ud 193 While a
189. ers For example if you change the Start Up Lost Time for a particular phase Tru Traffic resets the Offset and Widths of any 147 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination the green bands associated with that phase to their default values See Affecting amp Affected Parameters page 242 Once you ve set the Phase amp Movement Parameters Eastbound Through i Smm parameters in the Phase amp Movement Parameters dialog box Minimum Split seconds 145 Apply to all movements with this phase number on this approach Y as desired you may use the Split Type Freely Scaled X Controls for restricting the Pero Ties eee application of the Phase amp Wek of this intersection Movement Parameters to apply along this artery D some or all of these values to EDW F AWE Lead 6 Apply only where initial values are equal other movements on this or all ea approaches of this or all Yellow 4 intersections along this are all All Red 05 arteries You may also opt to apply these parameters to the Green Time Adjustments seconds other movements only when the Start Up Loss 3 initial or pre edited phase Green Extension 25 fevious We Nest numbers are identical or to change only those parameters in the other Phase Number 2 I movements whose initial i e LE pre edited values are identical These controls give you a great deal of as NM in extending
190. ersection Parameters dialog In doing this Tru Traffic automatically recalculates the optimal Horizontal Scale if it is unlocked and the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin Use the E button in the Outline View to delete the currently selected arterial diagram or intersection You may also delete a diagram or an intersection and save it to the Windows Clipboard using the Cut command under the Edit Menu When you delete an arterial diagram Tru Traffic automatically breaks any links to intersections in that arterial diagram Deleting one of the interior intersections not one of the boundary intersections causes Tru Traffic to reset the Distance between the intersections on either side of the one deleted so that the arterial length is unchanged Deleting one of the boundary intersections of the diagram causes Tru Traffic to reset the Offset Width and Design Speed of any green band that begins at that intersection Tru Traffic also recalculates 36 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 the optimal Horizontal Scale if it is unlocked and the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin Use the button in the Outline View to copy the currently selected diagram or intersection to the Windows clipboard You may then Paste the diagram back into Tru Traffic or into another Windows application one that can accept the pasted information Tru Traffic copies the diagram to the clipboard in the following formats e
191. ery through the intersection the program could sometimes have trouble choosing which two legs have the through movements and which one is the side street You can check which version of Tru Traffic you re using with the About command in the Help Menu Then check the web site www tru traffic com for the latest version If necessary you can download and install an updated version If you ve divided your network into zones in Synchro and you re writing just one zone to the UTDF files make sure every node including bends along the artery is in that zone It s easy to forget to assign a zone to a bend and in this case Synchro won t include the bends as declared nodes in the Layout file but they ll be referenced as connecting nodes of the neighboring intersections Tru Traffic will find some intersections referencing nonexistent or undeclared nodes and will have to split the artery there A problem can arise at a K intersection Whenever Tru Traffic encounters a 4 legged intersection in a UTDF file it assumes that the movements from each approach to adjacent legs are turning movements This assumption isn t correct at a K intersection and the program will end up splitting an artery there I haven t decided how to fix this one yet and 1f you re interested in discussing it with me I would welcome your thoughts When I import UTDF files the streets don t have names Make sure the Layout data file is a CSV comma separated variable style
192. es the master cycle zeroes on the arterial timings diagram to indicate the time of day starting with the time of day specified in the associated drop down list This can be useful in confirming that the timings in the signal controller agree with those in Tru Traffic and that the signal controller and GPS clocks are synchronized The available times of day are determined by the Cycle Length and the Signal Cycle Start Time which may be specified on the Clocks page of the GPS View page 50 If your signalized network includes a mix of cycle lengths the list of times of day distinguishes the times that start a cycles from those that start an arbitrary coordination base cycle These specially marked cycles accurately reflect the declared offsets for all the signals and they repeat at intervals equal 97 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination to the least common multiple of the various signal cycles in the network If you opt to label the t 0 lines starting at an arbitrary time of day that is at a time other than the start of all cycles then at those signals operating with cycle lengths other than the network wide coordination base cycle the first bottom most cycle on the arterial timings diagram will show the offset reference point at a misleading time within that cycle The offset reference point appears at the correct offset for these signals only within the specially marked cycles Synchronize Scales These chec
193. es of the trip log list 54 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Click column header buttons to sort or group trip logs on that column M M 0 t uu Drag column dividers to resize columns T Positiol y Satellites Clocks Name Type Period Duration Size a v SB US 401 8 14 2008 4 53 324M Thu Before Other 0 05 21 257 V NB LIS 401 8 14 2008 4 59 48 4M Thu Before Other 0 04 47 259 V SB US 401 8 14 2008 5 05 134M Thu Before Other 0 04 48 231 V NB US 401 8 14 2008 5 11 034M Thu Before Other 0 04 34 238 4 SB US 401 8 14 2008 5 16194M Thu Before Other 0 04 16 237 iv NB US 401 3 11 2008 4 11 12AM Wed After Dther 0 04 49 247 V SB US 401 3 11 2008 4 16 544M Wed After Dther 0 05 28 288 V NB US 401 3 11 2008 422 334M Wed After Dther 0 04 18 236 aL a 3 11 2008 42738AM Wed After Dther D 0458 233 3 24 2009 3 38 324M Tue After Other 0 03 55 222 3 24 2009 3 57 07 AM Tue After Other NETS 233 3 24 2008 4 02 564M Tue After Other O 0436 J 214 s 3 24 2003 4 00 amp 07 AM Tue After Dther 0 03 22 7 204 3 24 2008 4 13 024M Tue After Dther 0 03 X0 186 4 7 2J24 0nn 419n amp AM Tiao Aftor Other n a 0H 199 Download Trips enek uncheck ing poe Use Shift or Ctrl to select d MN d Click name of trip log a multiple trip logs and narrow Agra ANG ISCIWOTS SOIRS second time to rename the
194. etwork page 16 How to Perform a Travel Time and Delay Study page 20 Using Google Earth with Tru Traffic page 201 and Import Export UTDF Files page 210 for additional details 14 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Operating Tru Traffic To run Tru Traffic click the Start Button usually in the lower left corner of your screen then choose the Programs menu and find the Tru Traffic submenu From there select the Tru Traffic icon Pull Down Menus Tru Traffic uses a pull down menu system The top menu is a horizontal bar with a few commands that can be performed You use the mouse to select and click on a command to execute it This pulls down a vertical menu in a window and you again select and click on command with the mouse You can also select an item in the top menu by pressing the first letter of the item by itself or while holding down the Alt key The Help System Tru Traffic features a context sensitive cross referenced indexed help system In it you ll find explanations of every feature of Tru Traffic To get help on any item in Tru Traffic simply move the cursor to that item and press F1 Or use the commands under the Help Menu to view the Help Contents or to search the Help Index on a topic The help system is cross referenced When an explanation refers to items that are explained elsewhere as separate help topics the references are displayed as underlined green text Left click on a cross referenced item to ge
195. even if they are measured in seconds If the Splits unit is set to seconds Tru Traffic allows the Splits to be entered in seconds however it then converts them to percent You may also set the number of decimal places to which the splits are shown Vehicle Length and Lane Width Unit The Vehicle Length Unit is used to measure the average lengths of vehicles in the queue and the Average Lane Width of lane groups It may be set to feet yards miles meters or kilometers Drive Rule This set of radio buttons indicates the driver s side rule or the side Right Hand Side or Left Hand Side on which drivers are required to maintain their vehicles along two way streets In North amp South America China and continental Europe this should be the Right Hand Side In Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia this should be the Left Hand Side In this document cross traffic turn is a generic term referring to left turns for right hand Drive Rule right turns for left hand Drive Rule Generally you should set the Drive Rule once when you first run Tru Traffic and then not change it again although it is harmless to change the parameter then change it back even when a diagram data fileis open Internally parameters that correspond to turning signal phases or movements such as splits and yellow clearance times and turning lane groups such as volumes and number of lanes are associated generically with either with
196. f this formula are summarized in the report The summary pages show the various columns averaged over all the trip log runs You may opt to have your column summarized as Average of the calculation results for all trip logs or as the Calculation result at the averages for all trip logs In the first case the average is calculated by evaluating your formula at each trip log run then summing the results for all runs and dividing by the number of runs This is the most common case In the second case the average is calculated by evaluating your formula just once but using for the quantities in the formula the averages over all trip log runs This is less common but can be useful as explained below As an example consider the case where your formula is the cumulative average speed calculated as CAS CTL CTT 85 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination In preparing the Travel Time and Delay report for each trip log run Tru Traffic calculates each of the above variables to get the above result Thus for the i th trip log run Let s use the notation Avg x to indicate the average value of all x summing all quantities x for i 1 2 N and dividing by N the number of quantities x In this case if your user defined column is summarized as the Average of the calculation results for all trip logs then the value displayed in report summary would be calculated as Avg CAS or Avg CTL CTT whereas
197. ferent geodetic datum than the trip log Most GPS receivers use WGS 84 by default and if you manually the geographic coordinates of the intersections you may have used a different geodetic datum Ifthis is the case it should be evident in the display of the trip log on the Network View Does the trip log pass each node near its center or on the correct side of the node depending on the Drive Rule If the intersection coordinates are in a different geodetic datum than the trip log there will be an overall bias and trip logs in both directions of travel will probably be off to one side the same side of the node centers If this is the case you ll need to respecify the geographic coordinates of each intersection using the GPS receiver as discussed in Steps 2 and 6 This will ensure you re using the same geodetic datum for both the coordinates and the trip logs It s best to add GPS readings in pairs that straddle the intersection center It might be that the geographic coordinates of the intersections are specified with insufficient precision A precision of about 0 0002 minutes of arc which corresponds to about 1 foot 30 5 cm north and south should be sufficient If this is the problem it should also be evident in the display of the trip log on the Network View The trip log will tend to pass fairly far from the center of each node missing it by varying distances sometimes passing to the right and other times passing to the left If this
198. ffic uses it only when importing or exporting UTDF files see page 210 and importing or exporting geographic coordinates The companion utility CopyFromDgmFile page 215 also uses the ID number when copying intersection parameters from one Diagram File Dgm to another If you re not going to be using UTDF files geographic coordinate files or the CopyFromDgmFile utility you may safely ignore this number The ID Number must be greater than or equal to 0 Tru Traffic allows node ID numbers as high as 2 147 483 647 but Synchro requires them to be in the range 1 9999 so if you re exporting UTDF files to import into Synchro page 210 you ll want to keep them within the lower range Notes The intersection Notes is strictly for your use to store any additional information you wish to associate with the intersection controller number etc The notes appear in the intersection parameters report but are otherwise unused by Tru Traffic The notes may be up to 63 characters long Forward Direction This is a drop down list box indicating the direction to your right at this intersection as you view the diagram North South East or West By default it is the arterial Forward Direction but you may locally override it at any intersection to model turning arteries and triangular blocks It should be specified so that Tru Traffic can refer to the various movements by their proper names It is necessary to specify a Forward Direction when li
199. ffic using a serial port emulator and let Tru Traffic record the trip logs using the NMEA interface over the emulated serial port Note that the NMEA interface does not support downloading prerecorded tracks 223 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination For the first option I know of four software packages any one of which should do the trick e Garmin s MapSource e GPSBabel e GPS Utilit e EasyGPS Before choosing this option you should be aware of some its disadvantages Figure 4 illustrates the most easily observed disadvantage and the associated discussion on page 54 describes the cause and consequences in more detail For the second option I know of three serial emulators any of which should do the trick e Franson s GpsGate e DeLorme Serial Emulator Garmin Spanner works with only some Garmin GPS receivers and with Windows XP and prior not with Windows Vista Multiple users including me have successfully used Franson s GpsGate I know of only one user that has used DeLorme Serial Emulator successfully with a Garmin GPS receiver and I haven t tried it myself Modelling special situations How do I model a school zone with a reduced speed beginning mid block Tru Traffic allows you to change the downstream band Design Speed at signals but not between signals There are two options here 3 Insert phantom intersections at the boundaries of the school zone e g at 150 ft from the actu
200. fic Signal Coordination CopyFromDgmFile that simplifies the management of multiple timing plans Its purpose is to transfer selected intersection or traffic signal parameters from one diagram file Dgm to another You can change the common parameters within one diagram file then use CopyFromDgmFile to apply those changes to other diagram files The CopyFromDgmFile program is in the same folder with Tru Traffic The section on page 215 gives more details on how to use it How do I specify the schedule of the timing plans so only the appropriate trip logs are shown for the currently selected timing plan It isn t necessary to specify the schedule Instead for each trip log you can specify to which timing plan s it applies This is easier than you might expect In the list of trip logs on the GPS Trip Logs page l Left click on the Start Time column header This sorts all the trip logs by time of day Left click on the first trip log to select it Presumably it will be a trip log collected in the morning that should apply to the AM timing plan 3 Hold the Shift key down and left click on the last trip log that also applies to the AM timing plan If necessary you may need to resize the window or scroll the list down so this trip log is visible This selects the entire group of AM trip logs 4 Right click on the selected AM trip logs and from the pop up menu choose Visible in Timing Plan Selected AM timing plan so the appropriate AM
201. fic alternates lines to reduce the likelihood that neighboring intersection s distances will overlap Show Travel Times between Intersections This check box indicates whether the Travel Times between intersections are placed along the bottom of the diagram below the intersection names 183 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination The Travel Time is defined as the Distance between the intersections divided by the Design Speed If the Travel Times are shown you may select the number of rows or lines Tru Traffic uses to display the Travel Times on the diagram This is useful if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the times tend to run together Show Travel Times on Lines This parameter indicates the number of rows or lines which Tru Traffic uses to display the Travel Times between Intersections on the diagram if you have opted to Show the Travel Times By default Tru Traffic shows the times on one line but you may increase this number if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the times tend to run together When showing the times on more than one line Tru Traffic alternates lines to reduce the likelihood that neighboring link s times will overlap Show the Actual Cycle Lengths of Signals This check box indicates whether the signal cycle lengths are placed along the bottom of the diagram below the intersection names This shows the sum of the
202. file has one intersection with its set of coordinates per line The coordinates are North Latitude and East Longitude degrees The rest of the line contains the intersection ID Number and the Name of the intersection Once the diagram has a file name other than the default Tru Traffic will automatically overwrite that file without warning Use the Save As command to save the diagram to a file with a different name Each time it overwrites an existing file Tru Traffic saves a backup copy of the existing file under a subfolder named Backup of last saved files Thus when you save MyArtery Dgm Tru Traffic keeps a backup of the original file with the name Backup of last saved files MyArtery Dgm 173 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination The UTDF files are another convenient and often preferable way to share data with other programs See page 210 for details Save Diagram Data File As The Save As command under the File menu will store the diagram currently in open in a file with a different name or as a different type such as UTDF 2006 combined file Tru Traffic asks you to enter the file name and assumes the extension Dgm if you don t specify an extension By default it will save it as a Diagram File but you may choose from any of the file types listed in the table above Save As is different from Save in that Save As does not automatically overwrite the file wit
203. file so Tru Traffic won t be confused If you re using Synchro you can change the angles of the approaches by dragging the neighboring nodes 5 Tru Traffic allows node ID numbers page 113 as high as 2 147 483 647 but Synchro requires them to be in the range 1 9999 so if you re exporting UTDF files to import into Synchro you ll 212 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 want to keep them within the lower range Upon importing UTDF files Tru Traffic chooses a forward direction for each artery North for N S arteries and East for E W arteries Although you may not specify Tru Traffic s choice you may flip a diagram over reversing the orientation of the diagram so that all intersections appear in the opposite order by right clicking on a selected diagram and choosing the Flip Diagram Orientation command from the pop up menu Some programs including Synchro are very sensitive to the directional labeling of approaches N NE NW etc upon importing UTDF files If an approach is not labeled in the way it expects then the program won t read the corresponding number of lanes volumes timings phasings etc for that approach But the UTDF file specification gives no guidance on how to assign approach labels so programs don t necessarily follow the same rules To work around this ambiguity you may opt to have Tru Traffic label the approaches using strictly cardinal directions N S E or W along arteries see page 194 If exporting
204. for that lane group wherever the volume is used in Tru Traffic This is especially useful when you wish to study what would happen to the progression along an artery when all volumes at an intersection or at all intersections are increased or decreased by a particular factor 156 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Peak Hour Factor The Peak Hour Factor for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that and any opposing lane groups It relates the peak rates of flow to the hourly volume The Peak Hour Factor is defined as the ratio of the total hourly volume to the peak rate of flow within the hour PHF V V where PHF Peak Hour Factor V hourly volume vph V Peak rate of flow within the hour vph When field data are not available the HCM recommends using a value of 0 90 for the Peak Hour Factor Average Lane Width The Average Lane Width for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It determines the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for lane width The lane width is measured in units set in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box feet yards meters etc see page 190 The default value is 12 feet 3 6 m Heavy Vehicles The percent heavy vehicles for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It determines the saturation flow rate adjustm
205. form the same functions The Displacement column shows the distance from the measurement to the average of all measurements which it taken as the center of the intersection This can be useful in identifying bad measurements or measurements that are applied to the wrong intersection Another useful tool is to right click on the Network View and check the item Show Intersection Extents to view the effective extent of the intersections This is a circle centered at the intersection with a radius equal to the half width of the intersection A trip log must cross this region to count as passing through the intersection Viewing the extent makes it easier to diagnose why a trip log is either skipping an intersection or passing through one twice You can also detect when an extent is too large usually due to a bad or misplaced coordinate measurement When you close the list of measurements Tru Traffic calculates the straight line distance to the neighboring intersections and compares it to the distance already entered If it thinks its calculation may be more accurate than the distance entered and there are no trip logs available to calculate the actual travel distance it offers to replace the declared distance with its calculation If the street between the intersections is fairly straight and level this calculated distance is likely to be quite accurate If there are bends or an appreciable grade between the intersections it s usually better to
206. fter set is given by 1 Qc E 2 NA 2 The population standard deviation gives a measure of how far on average the individual measurements differ from the average measurement We estimate it by calculating the sample standard deviation comparing each measurement to the average summing the squares of their differences dividing by the number of measurements then taking the square root Thus the standard deviation of the befores o is calculated as the square root of the variance given by ENDE 3 Expanding the y part and using definitions of the averages Eq 1 and Eq 2 this simplifies as follows 88 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 i 1x o M B 2bb4P 1 1 1 m o a YORE y p 13 ves b b uae i iai 4 2 noB dA 72 b bap mab yg MB SE 2 Ob P oq where b is the average of b The square root of the above expression gives the sample standard deviation of the befores Similarly the sample standard deviation of the afters is expressed as e 5 The Average of the Differences We calculate the average of the before and after differences d by summing the differences of all possible pairings and dividing by the number of E This requires a double summation 7 Ho 6 For the simplification we moved the a terms outside the i summation then moved the b terms outside the j summation Using the definitions of the averages given above the last line can be written d a b 7 That
207. g a box around the crowded intersections or a section of the diagram This changes the horizontal scale and the distance from the left margin to the first intersection to effectively zoom in on the selected intersections In this mode think of the diagram as spanning multiple pages Use the Page Up amp Page Down keys or the arrow buttons on the Tool Bar to jump from page to page When you print you have the option to print one or all pages 222 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 There should be enough overlap between the pages that you can tape them together to make one long diagram If you d prefer the diagram fit all on one window or page a combination of other options should help 1 Set the diagram Width to be as wide as necessary to separate the crowded intersections If you want to print the diagram set the width to the full width of the page If you don t care about printing set the width to be even wider As you change the diagram width Tru Traffic adjusts the Horizontal Scale if it s not locked to fill up the entire width of the diagram the boundary intersections will be at the edges of the diagram without any extra space 2 Choose a smaller font size for the overlapping text For a very small font sizes set the font name to Small Fonts 3 When the text at the bottom of the diagram is overlapping allow the text to straddle multiple lines using the controls on the Preferences Layout Misc page How do I print my di
208. g an artery and either clicking the button on the Tool Bar or choosing the Intersection command under the View Menu or by clicking the right mouse button and choosing the Intersection command from the pop up menu 39 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 3 4 5 View the Diagram Window for an artery by double clicking on a link or by selecting an intersection along the artery clicking the right mouse button and choosing the View Diagram command from the pop up menu Link intersections together by selecting one intersection and dragging it to the one to which you wish to link it Monitor your current position if you are tracking with a GPS receiver In this case an icon appears on the Network View showing your current position and direction of travel Before the can icon appear in the correct location you need to Layout the Grid with GPS Coordinates Right click anywhere on the Network View and choose this command from the pop up menu You only need to do this once unless you add more diagrams or intersections or change the Geographic Coordinates of any of the intersections The accuracy of this tracking depends on many things including a The accuracy of the GPS receiver based on time of day time of year location and weather conditions among other things b The rate at which the GPS receiver supplies information 40 6 7 View the path of any recorded trip logs If you observe a
209. given by the average plus or minus 1 96 standard deviations Another related statistic the standard error gives the uncertainty in our measure of the true average just how close we can expect our calculated average to be to the true average The standard error is given by dividing the standard deviation by Vn the square root of the number of runs in the calculation of the average The more runs used to calculate the average the more confidence we can have that the calculation gives the true average 82 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 amp Tru Traffic Coordination along Crossing ArteriesDgm File Edit View Template Optimize Window Help Os G O m PlEMREDOS O 4 S B8M Olz0minAn Travel Time amp Delay Report oes fe Save amp hBint Help Cumulative Summary of runs Northbound from 06 1231 t Cumulative Running Time seconds loiiected Thursday 7 17 2008 to Thursday 8 14 2008 over day s Thu with star accumulation of DL DS since led Wednesday 3 11 2009 to Tuesday 3 24 2009 over day s Tue Wed with y beginning of Run CIT CTL CDL CD CRT to 06 0129 US 401 421 NC 27 210 129 Average pD CBS1T CAS1T CBS2T CAS2T CAS CStops CGST CGCT CQDL 4 n D nz8 A a Std Dev Before 26 4 0 26 0 26 0 f 27 o 29 28 8 23 t 26 09 495 754 392 n 8 esie 241 11065 10881 40 201 40 65 0 38 38 203 92 149 322 16
210. gnal Coordination intersection When you link green bands between diagrams Time Space or Time Location the offset and width of that green band are identical between the two diagrams with the secondary the dragged to intersection s band determined by the Green Band Action and offset and width of the primary intersection the dragged from intersection This can be useful if you split an embedded superstreet into two diagrams one WB and one EB linking together their common 2 way intersections which are near the edges With their green bands linked then the 2 way bands near the edges will be identical in both diagrams Otherwise the started band in one diagram won t resemble the calculated e g tapered band in the other diagram This also facilitates splitting a long artery into two shorter diagrams one for the east segment and one for the west segment Linking bands at the common intersection ensures that the bands in the downstream diagram reflect the clipping amp tapering information from the upstream intersections in the other diagram Number of Lanes This is the number of lanes available for storing the queue of the corresponding lane group It is used on Platoon Progression diagrams only The queue length is calculated as NL n where N Number of vehicles in queue L Vehicle Length n Number of lanes for the lane group The actual Saturation Flow is calculated from the Number of Lanes using the method prescribed
211. gram in the units specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box inches or centimeters These margins are ignored if the Center on the Page check box is checked In this case the margins are calculated for you automatically based on the paper size and the Diagram Size The margins refer to the diagram not to the page Thus the top margin is always the distance between the top of the diagram and the edge of the page Of course whether this is the top edge or the left edge of the page depends on the paper orientation Portrait or Landscape You may save the diagram Position along with other basic Arterial Diagram Parameters in a Template which you may then apply to other diagrams to ensure a consistent appearance See page 162 for more information Diagram Size This specifies the size of the diagram on the page independent of the page orientation Portrait or Landscape Thus width refers to width across the diagram not across the page The size is measured in the units specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box inches or centimeters 100 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Changing the diagram width causes Tru Traffic to reset the horizontal scale if it is unlocked The scale is chosen so that the entire artery may be seen without any excess space this enables you to make efficient use of the diagram space while maintaining high resolution Similarly changing the diagram
212. graphic coordinates errors which cause problems in generating the Travel Time amp Delay Report and Plots from Trip Logs The game here is that a run must pass through a red circle in order for the software to conclude that the run passed through an intersection Furthermore a run must pass through at least two consecutive red circles to be counted as having entered the artery 121 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Correct The point lies between the travel time runs and the red circle straddles the runs Incorrect The red circle straddles the travel time runs in only one direction You probably collected just one GPS point in the western lane Collect a second point in the eastern lane to balance the first pulling the centroid to the center of the intersection Or use Google Earth to add the balancing point Incorrect The red circle is too small to straddle the travel time runs You probably collected just one GPS point or your points are too close together or you ve declared too few lanes Collect a pair of points straddling the center of the intersection and bounding the intersection Or use Google Earth to add edit the pair of points Incorrect The red circle straddles the neighboring intersection You probably have a point from the neighboring intersection incorrectly assigned to this intersection pulling it south of its true position Move the poi
213. gth Offset Offset Reference Point protected Turn Phase Sequences or Splits at this intersection To help avoid internal conflicts the Offset is stored internally in percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length Changing the Adjusted Cycle Length doubling or halving the Cycle Length will change the number of seconds corresponding to the Offset but the percent will remain unchanged Related to and obviating the Green Band Offset is an option to let a downstream green band s offset and width be determined by an intersection in another diagram altogether Do this by linking the bands between the intersections of two diagrams dragging from the primary intersection to the secondary intersection When you link green bands between diagrams Time Space or Time Location the offset and width of that green band are identical between the two diagrams with the secondary the dragged to intersection s band determined by the Green Band Action and offset and width of the primary intersection the dragged from intersection This can be useful if you split an embedded superstreet into two diagrams one WB and one EB linking together their common 2 way intersections which are near the edges With their green bands linked then the 2 way bands near the edges will be identical in both diagrams Otherwise the started band in one diagram won t resemble the calculated e g tapered band in the other diagram This also facilitates splitting a long artery into
214. h the default file name Your diagram has a default file name if you loaded it from a data file or have already saved it In this case you should use the Save As command instead of the save command when you want to save your diagram to a different file i e you don t want to overwrite the file with the default file name The UTDF files are another convenient and often preferable way to share data with other programs See page 210 for details Extract Diagram Use the Extract command under the File menu to extract just the currently selected arterial timings diagram and save it to a different diagram data file This can be useful when you wish to move a diagram from one data file to merge in another You may also use the Cut and Paste commands under the Edit Menu for this purpose UTDF Files The Import Export command in this submenu lets you open or save files in the older Universal Traffic Data Format 2 1 This is useful in sharing data with other programs that support this format such as Synchro and traffic signal control systems from Naztec Gardner Eagle and Peek See page 210 for details If the UTDF files already opened have more than one timing plan the CA t button on the Tool Bar lets you choose the current timing plan reflected in the diagrams For importing exporting in the newer UTDF 2006 combined file format use the File Open and File Save As commands and change the File Type to UTDF 2006 Closing the Diagra
215. he intersection geographic center These should be moving seconds to help ensure that there s at least one reading on each side of where Tru Traffic thinks is the center of the intersection The extra recording time helps account for the fact that the current readings may not be exactly at your true location and Tru Traffic and you may not perceive the center of the intersection to be at exactly the same location either due to GPS uncertainty and other possible sources of error Be generous with the extra recording time more is safer I usually start recording 1 or 2 minutes before I enter the artery and continue to record 1 or 2 minutes after I leave Trip logs grow at a slow rate one reading 24 bytes per 1 or 2 seconds depending on the type of GPS and the time wasted in processing unnecessary readings while subsequently generating plots or reports is usually negligible so the penalty for starting to record too early and continuing to record too late is essentially nothing compared to the penalty for starting the recording too late or ending it too early 197 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination To pass through an intersection is defined as getting close enough to the geographic center of the intersection The geographic center of an intersection is the average of all the measurements or GPS readings entered for that intersection This is taken to be the center of the intersection Be sure to add these me
216. he Trip Log crosses the intersection second intervals and color coded according to the instantaneous speed The Run begins here where the piecewise linear path of the Trip Log passes closest to the center of the red circle The Trip Log begins here where the first GPS point was recorded When you copy and paste trip When you disable or re enable m o 196 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 points within a trip log and e When you record another point for a trip log 5 In the end the order in which you collect your trip logs amp the geographic locations of the intersections does not matter Don t miss a deadline for collecting trip logs just because you don t yet have a network set up within Tru Traffic complete with geographic locations of the intersections Collect you trip logs when needed and when you re back in the office use Google Earth to collect the geographic locations of the intersections Tru Traffic will then calculate your runs 6 Anerror in the geographic locations of the intersections affects the accuracy of the Travel Time amp Delay Report Regenerate the report after correcting the geographic locations 7 You may add new intersections either within the artery or extending the artery and see the modified runs in the Travel Time amp Delay Report More Detailed View A trip log is mainly a series of consecutive GPS readings each consisting of geographic longitude amp latit
217. he drop down menu Gi button on the Tool Bar to add delete or select between timing plans Ideally parameters that are the same for all timing plans e g intersection geometry yellow amp all red clearance times etc would be stored in a separate file that would be accessible to all diagram files for those arteries You could change the parameters from within one diagram file and the changes would automatically be reflected in all diagram files that use the common parameters This utility gives the next best thing You can change the common parameters within one diagram file then use this utility to apply those changes to other diagram files y Copy TS PP Draft 5 0 Intersection Parameters Copy Selected TS PP Draft 5 0 Intersection Parameters From Diagram File MyChangedDiagram Dam oo To Diagram File M wDiagramT hatNeedsU pdating Dam o0 Selected Paranret iming Parameters that are the same for all Timing Plans Yellow and All Red Clearance Times Flashing Don t Walk Times Minimum Splits Check All Clear All T A cos D x Cancel Help nee Select source file here Select target file here Select parameters to be copied here Click here to copy the arameters from file to file Drag edge of window to get a better view P Using CopyFromDgmeFile Before using CopyFromDgmFile please keep a backup copy of the Dgm files you ll be modifying You ll want to have something to fall back
218. he foreground and which are displayed on bottom i e in the background The bands in the upper layers may partially obscure bands in the lower layers Drag the speed or band categories in the lists to the desired layer location This is option available only for Time Space diagrams Diagram Fonts Under the Fonts tab you may indicates the size and style of the character font used at different locations in drawing the diagram You may set different fonts for the Diagram Name or title the Intersection Names on Time Space and Time Location diagrams the Band Design Speed if you ve opted to Show the Band Speeds in the Layout page of the Preferences dialog or the Splits if you ve opted to Show the Splits Changing the font size of the diagram name or intersection names causes Tru Traffic to reset the Vertical Scale if it isn t locked to accommodate exactly the desired number of cycles on the diagram You can then override this Vertical Scale if you wish You may save the Fonts along with other basic Arterial Diagram Parameters in a Template which you may then apply to other diagrams to ensure a consistent appearance See page 162 for more information 109 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Intersection Parameters These are parameters which affect only a specific intersection for the currently selected Ci T timing plan They are displayed in the Intersection Parameters dialog box where you c
219. he intersection as discussed in Step 2 Add the measurements in pairs straddling the intersection It s usually best to walk the four comers of the intersection adding the GPS reading at each corner as a measurement If you prefer to do this while riding along in a vehicle be sure the vehicle is driving along the outside 234 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 lane in each direction 8 If the problem still persists and if you manually entered the geographic coordinates of the intersections then there are several likely errors a b c It might be that you took GPS measurements for the geographic coordinates of the intersections while traveling in one direction but forgot to match these with GPS measurements while traveling in the opposite direction If this is the case it should be evident in the display of the trip log on the Network View If the intersection coordinates are specified with just one GPS reading there will be an overall bias and trip logs in both directions of travel will probably be off to one side the same side of the node centers If this is the case you ll need to travel the artery in the opposite direction specifying the geographic coordinates of each intersection using the GPS receiver as discussed in Steps 2 and 6 Remember that it s best to add GPS readings in pairs that straddle the intersection center It might be that the geographic coordinates of the intersections are specified using a dif
220. he lane group Add Cut an Intersection The ability to add or cut an intersection is especially helpful when a new signal is being proposed on an artery using this option you can quickly determine whether the new signal will coordinate easily with the existing signals on the street using the current coordination parameters 2 f f Y Use the zl button in the Outline View to add a new Intersection to the current arterial timings diagram as follows 1 Expand the arterial diagram in which you wish to add a new intersection so that its intersections are visible then 2 Select the intersection after which you wish to add a new intersection or the arterial diagram if you want to add a new intersection before any current intersections then 3 Press the 2 button If you are adding an intersection an interior intersection Tru Traffic will ask you to enter the Distance from the Previous Intersection to the newly added one It then automatically calculates the Distance from the newly inserted intersection to the following one if any so the arterial length is unchanged If you re adding a boundary intersection Tru Traffic arbitrarily assigns the Distance and you must change it in the Intersection Parameters dialog In doing this Tru Traffic automatically recalculates the optimal Horizontal Scale if it is unlocked and the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin ti j Use the sil button in the Out
221. he option to make sounds to alert you that your vehicle is projected to arrive at the next signal near a red to green transition The accuracy of this projection is determined partly by the Synchronized Time and the Offsets and Splits at the downstream signal You may specify the number of seconds defined to be near the transition If this option is checked Tru Traffic will play a sound after you start tracking with the GPS receiver whenever you are projected to arrive at the next signal on the top most diagram window within the given number of seconds of a red to green transition assuming you maintain your current speed No sound is made if your current speed is less than about 11 miles per hour 18 km per hour There are four different possible sounds to indicate An early arrival near the beginning of green or A too early arrival before the beginning of green or A late arrival near the end of yellow or all red or A too late arrival after the end of yellow or all red Stern This can be useful if you re trying to stay within a theoretical green band but note that the sounds don t necessarily alert you when you are nearing the edge of the green band shown on the time space diagram Instead they alert you when you are nearing the edge of what might be called the acceptance band a band emerging upstream from the green time of the next signal with a slope determined by your current speed which may be varying Make sounds when a
222. he trip log s plotted trajectory on the diagram by a given number of seconds either positive or negative This time shift Ri does not affect Travel Time and Delay Reports or Trip Log Plots 7 The color of the trip log trajectory as plotted on the arterial timings diagram By default the color depends on the trip log type i e Before After or Neither but you may override this default for any trip log 8 The thickness of the trip log trajectory line on the arterial timings diagram 9 Which Timing Plan s the trip log applies to The trip log will be visible only when an applicable LAM Plan is currently selected 10 Also displayed but not available for direct editing is the status of a digital signature if any e g valid signature invalid signature or not signed Trip logs are digitally signed only if recorded by Tru Traffic starting with version 8 0 while attached to a GPS receiver Playback Trip Logs You may playback a trip log trip log like a movie as when recorded with the GPS receiver Right click on a trip log in the Trip Logs page of the GPS Receiver View to select the Playback Trip Log command from the pop up menu When you playback a trip log Tru Traffic displays a button palette to control the playback speed pause resume rewind skip and stop the playback If you wish to create a movie of the trip log playback you may prefer to export the trip log to a AVI video file This creates the movie faster a
223. height causes Tru Traffic to reset the Vertical Scale if it is not locked so that exactly the desired number of cycles are shown on the diagram The diagram is displayed in its window with the same aspect ratio height to width as you specify but compressed or expanded according to the Zoom Factor set on the Tool Bar This helps you manage diagrams too large to fit on the screen You may save the diagram Size along with other basic Arterial Diagram Parameters in a Template which you may then apply to other diagrams to ensure a consistent appearance See page 162 for more information Vertical Scale The Vertical Scale is measured in seconds per screen length unit inch or centimeter as specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box described on page 190 The Vertical Scale is accurate on the printed diagram The scale of the diagram window on the screen is modified by the Zoom Factor on the Tool Bar To help you take accurate measurements from the diagram Tru Traffic draws tic marks on the edges of the diagram or grid lines as selected in the Layout page of the Preferences dialog see page 176 marking off regular intervals determined by the Seconds Per Mark parameter In addition Tru Traffic prints out all of the necessary timings when you print out the parameters reports making most measurements unnecessary Next to the Vertical Scale edit field is a drop down list box which indicates whether the scale is
224. his check box indicates whether the Splits for the signal phases along the side streets are shown on the diagram along with a movement arrow or abbreviation for each intersection This option is available only if you ve also opted to Show the Arterial Splits When checked the Splits are displayed in the Split Units seconds or percent you have selected in the Units of Measure page Show Minimum Splits This check box indicates whether the Minimum Splits for the signal phases along the artery and optionally along side streets are shown on the diagram along with the phase number for each intersection This option is available only if you ve opted to Show the Arterial Splits Total Splits or Green Yellow Times Only or Green Times Only Use this set of radio buttons to specify what time to show for the Splits labels on the diagram This option is available only if you ve opted to Show the Arterial Splits Show Split Units This check box indicates whether the Splits Units should be displayed on the diagram along with the Splits and a movement arrow or abbreviation for the signal phases along the artery at each intersection This option is available only if you ve opted to Show the Arterial Splits on the diagram If you ve also opted to Show the Side Street Splits or to Show Minimum Splits the Splits Units 177 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination will be shown along with them as well Split Label This
225. hting factor for the reverse direction B is the bandwidth of the arterial wide through band in the forward direction of travel and B is the bandwidth of the arterial wide through band in the reverse direction of travel When the directional bandwidths are in the same ratio B B as the directional weighting factors Wy 1 wp this expression evaluates to 0 When the directional bandwidths differ for example when B B 55s 45s 10s while the directional weighting factors wp 1 wy are in the ratio 50 50 this expression evaluates to 10s the absolute difference between the bandwidths More generally the expression gives the amount of bandwidth that when half is subtracted from one band and the other half is added to the other band brings the two bandwidths to the same ratio as the directional weighting factors The default coefficient value is 1 so by default the excess directional asymmetry is subtracted in full from the base score The adjustment for Partial Arterial Bandwidth provides some credit for bandwidth that makes it partially albeit not entirely through the artery The adjustment is multiplied by the fraction of intersections that the bandwidth clears For example a band that makes it through 6 out of 10 intersections before losing 12 seconds to the effective red time at the seventh intersection carries a partial arterial bandwidth adjustment of 6 10 x 12s 7 2s The default coefficient value is 1 so th
226. iagrams in the currently open diagram date file 162 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Optimization Under the Optimize menu there are several commands for automatically attempting to improve the progression along the currently selected artery and the time required for timing plan transitions Optimize Arterial Offsets This command under the Optimize Menu sets the intersection Offsets to try to get good progression in both directions of travel The Offsets are set such that the midpoints of either the green phase or the red phase red time for serving the pedestrians or the side street are roughly simultaneous and the green phases straddle as close as possible the progression line I ve heard this called the Half Cycle Multiples method and it s described in more detail below in the context of the directional weighting factors You may optionally optimize for bands started from side street turning movements by setting the through Band Action p 137 to Stop and the side street turning Band Action to Start You may protect specific intersections offsets from modification in the optimization by locking the offsets p 124 Restrictions In the Restrictions page of the Optimize Arterial Offsets dialog you may specify the intersection with the stable offset The offsets of all other intersections will be adjusted to accommodate this one By default the stable offset intersection is one with a locked offset if there is one or
227. ialog page 194 for transferring speeds to Google Earth 10 View the Trip Log stops color coded according to the duration of the stop by right clicking on the Network View and checking the option Show Items Color coded Trip Log Stops or choose Properties The color duration bins are the same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog for transferring speeds to Google Earth 11 A View a legend with the color coding for trip log stops or trip log point speeds by right clicking on the Network View and checking the option Show Items Speed Color code Legend or Show Items Stop Color code Legend or choose Properties The color bins are the same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog for transferring speeds to Google Earth 12 Color code the links page 45 according to a summary of the average link speed of a selected set of Trip Logs by right clicking on the Network View and checking the option Show Items Speed Color coded Links or choose Properties The color speed bins are the same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog page 194 for transferring speeds to Google Earth Use the amp button on the Tool Bar or the Print command under the File Menu to print the Network View Adjusting the Network View If Geographic Coordinates from the GPS receiver are available for the intersections they are used to layout the Network View with high a
228. id coordinates Typically this occurs after importing from UTDF files which contain X Y grid coordinates but no geographic coordinates Extrapolate Clicking the ENS button will use th t intersection hic coordinates al g the utton will use the current intersection s geographic coordinates along with the X Y grid coordinates of this intersection and the other intersections to calculate their geographic coordinates This can save time collecting geographic coordinates but there can be some drawbacks Some initial tests suggest that the X Y grid coordinates are often considerably less accurate than GPS measurements The resulting inaccuracy will be carried into Travel Time and Delay reports Also with just the one calculated geographic coordinates the width and its standard deviation in GPS readings of these intersections is known with less certainty than when there is more than one measurement as discussed below e Download At present the button is available only for Garmin GPS receivers and only if the type of GPS receiver is set to Garmin Proprietary Click this button to download a list of all waypoints stored in the GPS receiver Once the list is downloaded you may assign each waypoint to an intersection You may import geographic coordinates from o any ofa variety of tables that is a CSV or TSV file a GIS shapefile or a block of cells copied and pasted from Excel into the GPS View o a GPS Exchange Format GP
229. ies to ignore false U turns it can still be fooled Disable the noisy points from the trip log using say the Trip Log Details Table Correct The trip logs passes smoothly through the red circles Incorrect GPS noise causes the trip log to bypass the red circle altogether The analysis will conclude that the trip log went around the intersection Disable the noisy points from the trip log using say the Trip Log Details Table l Open the Network View If you see the trip log plotted on the Network View as a thin line blue red or purple then skip to Step 4 2 Right click on the Network View If the command Layout Grid with Geographic Coordinates is grayed out then there is one or more intersections whose Geographic Coordinates have not yet been specified To display your trip logs on a diagram or the Network View Tru Traffic needs two pieces of information a your geographic position at a series of times and b where the intersections are geographically Comparing these two Tru Traffic can tell where you traveled in relation to the signals on the diagram and show your path The trip logs provide the first piece of information your geographic position at a series of times You must provide the second piece of information where the intersections are geographically The easiest way is using Google Earth as explained starting on page 201 Coordinates Alternatively you can enter them by clicking the butto
230. ile that you may have already opened and empty any unsaved arterial diagrams you may have created Use the File Close command to clear any data from Tru Traffic You may have the Network View GPS View and or the Outline View open but there shouldn t be any data in any of them 2 For maximum benefit ensure that each placemark in Google Earth has 1 Aname that gives the names of the two crossing streets something like Main St amp First Ave Be consistent in the street names throughout the network That is if you use the abbreviation St or Ave for a street in one placemark be sure you use the same abbreviation in all placemarks along that street Tru Traffic will think that Main Street Main St Main N Main and North Main all represent different streets 2 A d scuphon that includes the node ID number something like 25 3 When you open or paste or drag the KML file into the empty Tru Traffic window Tru Traffic displays the geographic locations as dots on a crude map and invites you to connect the dots to create routes But if Tru Traffic can distinguish the names of the crossing streets in the placemarks then instead of creating routes manually you can let Tru Traffic do it automatically by clicking the button Automatically Trace Routes This button 1s disabled if Tru Traffic cannot distinguish the names of the crossing streets in the placemarks 4 Once you ve finished tracing the
231. in Chapter 9 of the Highway Capacity Manual Use the associated Shared check box to indicate a shared lane When you change the number of through lanes Tru Traffic offers to apply this change to all intersections downstream once you exit the Intersection Parameters In preparing Travel Time and Delay Reports and Trip Log Plots Tru Traffic detects which intersections each trip log passes through by determining whether the trip passes close to the center of the intersection Close means roughly within the intersection s radius allowing some tolerance for error in the GPS measurements If there is no median the intersection s radius is the Number of Lanes multiplied by the Lane Width But if there 1s a wide median this calculation gives a width too narrow and Tru Traffic may incorrectly decide that a trip log bypasses an intersection it really passes through For this case multiple GPS measurements taken on the opposite sides of the median or on opposite corners allow Tru Traffic to estimate the intersection width including the median See How Trip Logs are Processed page 196 for more details Caution If the queue at an intersection backs up beyond the upstream intersection then usually the flow and queues on the Platoon Progression diagram will be inaccurate The flow and queue can still be accurate if the queue backs up into the upstream intersection 1 during the green time of the upstream intersection and 142 User s Manual
232. in the Lane Group Parameters dialog box as desired you may use the Controls for restricting the application of the Lane Group Parameters to apply some or all of these values to other lane groups on this or all approaches of this or all intersections along this are all arteries You may also opt to change only those parameters in the other lane groups whose initial i e pre edited values are identical These controls give you a great deal of flexibility in extending the Lane Group Parameters to other lane groups but please use them with caution They can make many changes throughout the network Use the Edit Undo command to recover from any unintended changes Volume Multiplier Lane Group Parameters Northbound Through p Volume amp Saturation Flow Adjustement Fa Apply all items Volume Multiplier 1 x E l Adj Factor checked items Peak Hour Factor 1 1 00 to this lane group Average Lane Width 12 feet 1 00 Heavy Vehicles 0 1 00 dioe id Conflicting Peds o hour Ve Grade 0x D all approaches Has On Street Parking E 9 this intersection Buses Stopping o fs 5 all intersections Central Business District Area Type along thi artery V Use Default Lane Utilization a all arteries Xx Cancel Help ea Previtih The Volume Multiplier for a particular lane group is used to multiply the volume
233. ing Diagram Windows To split a Diagram Window making separate diagrams for two shorter arteries use either e the Diagram Window e the amp Outline View or the EJ Network View 30 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 right click on the appropriate intersection and choose Split Artery into two Diagrams from the pop up menu The selected intersection will appear in both diagrams which will automatically be linked Tile Diagram Windows Use the Tile command of the Window menu to arrange all visible diagram windows setting their margins and sizes such that they fill the screen without overlap Editing in Diagram Windows You may edit some Arterial Diagram Parameters directly in the Diagram Window You may edit the Adjusted Cycle Lengths Offsets protected Turn Phase Sequences and Green Band Actions of the selected intersection while studying the diagram and noting the possible improvements This feature greatly simplifies the task of optimizing these parameters The following table lists the ways in which you may edit parameters directly on the Diagram Window Key Mouse Action Up Left drag Raise the Offset a moderate amount over signal Down Left drag Lower the Offset a moderate amount over signal Alt Up Left drag Raise the Offset a small amount over signal Alt Down Left drag Lower the Offset a small amount over signal Ctrl Up Left drag Raise the Offset a large amount
234. ing plans the background map of the Network View or whether offsets band offsets or band widths are locked etc in the current version cannot be saved in this file type Only the currently selected timing plan is saved in the file TSPPD 5 0 Diagram Files The native file type of version 5 0 of Tru Traffic Dgm 171 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination TSPPD 4 0 Diagram Files TSPPD 3 0 Diagram Files Diagram Text File UTDF 2006 AAP Files Bitmap Files This file type is downwardly compatible with the earlier version of Tru Traffic but some of the information trip log properties the Time Location diagram type the size position and zoom level of the Network View etc in the current version cannot be saved in this file type Only the currently selected timing plan is saved in the file The native file type of version 4 0 of Tru Traffic Dgm This file type is downwardly compatible with the earlier version of Tru Traffic but some of the information trip logs annotations geographic coordinates etc in the current version cannot be saved in this file type Only the currently selected timing plan is saved in the file The native file type of version 3 0 of Tru Traffic Dgm This file type is downwardly compatible with the previous version of Tru Traffic but some of the information phase numbers minimum splits all red amp yellow clearance times etc in the curre
235. ion Fill Coloring Style This set of radio buttons specifies how the flow band contours are color filled on Platoon Progression diagrams You may choose Single Colors Gradient Colors or Gradient Color to Black Filling with a single color is faster while filling with a gradient color looks smoother and tends to hide the sharp contour edges The Gradient Color to Black amounts to a compromise giving a smooth gradation appearance while still showing a sharp boundary at the contour edges When using either of the gradient fills in the Smooth Contour plotting mode you may specify the number of coloring substeps in the gradient Number of Gradient Fill Sub Colors This parameter specifies the number of substeps to use in the gradient color fills of the flow band contours on Platoon Progression diagrams This is applicable only when using either of the gradient fills in the Smooth Contour plotting mode A higher number yields a smoother gradient but is slower to render Platoon Flow Fill Style This set of radio buttons indicates the style of dot pattern used on Platoon Progression diagrams to depict the flow bands You may choose Dot Patterns in which the dot density is roughly proportional to the vehicle density or Solid Fills The Dot Patterns often look better on monochrome devices notably printers Default Header Footer Logos Use the controls on the Header Footer page of the Preferences dialog to specify a default set of images to
236. ion Names on the diagram You may set the number of lines or rows on which Tru Traffic shows the Intersection Names on the diagram in the Layout page of the Preferences dialog see page 176 Tru Traffic shows the names on alternating lines to reduce the chance of adjacent names overlapping Distance from Previous Intersection The Distance from the previous intersection is measured in the units specified in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog described on page 190 feet yards meters etc Get from Trip Logs Click the PCS button to determine the actual travel distance using one or more Trip Log runs page 51 This button is enabled only if there are trip logs involving travel between these two intersections You may select which trip log runs to use in the calculation from a list of all trip log runs that include these two intersections The figure below illustrates some of the features of the list of trip log runs If there are bends or an appreciable grade between the intersections the trip logs usually give more accurate calculation of the travel distance than using the Geographic Coordinates of the intersections 111 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Click column header o buttons to sort or group Drag column dividers runs on that column to resize columns Saia 06 0 125 Front St 125 ew el distance from 06 01 a ids dn of the trips A Trip L
237. ion and press Ctrl L to edit the Adjusted Cycle Length On Time Space and Time Location diagrams only If you have started a green band at the intersection then changing the Adjusted Cycle Length causes Tru Traffic to automatically reset e the New Green Band Offset if it isn t locked to the beginning of the green time plus the Start Up Lost Time and e the New Green Band Width if it isn t locked to the effective green time that is the Split minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and All Red Clearance Times plus the Green Extension Time for the through or left or right turn movement in the appropriate direction of travel 123 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Offset This measures the delay after time zero until a point is reached in the signal s cycle called the Offset Reference Point For example suppose at a certain intersection the Adjusted Cycle Length is 80 seconds there is no cross traffic turning movement in the southbound direction and there is a leading cross traffic turning movement in the northbound direction beginning 20 seconds after time zero If the Offset Reference Point is the start of the first through movement then the Offset is 25 and references the northbound through turning movement The Offset is measured in either seconds or percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length of the intersection as specified either locally for each intersection or by default in the Preferences Units of M
238. ip log you might make a mental note to check whether the trip log has a lot of noise and clean it if necessary but otherwise you may ignore the false alarms as they probably won t affect the trip log analysis Or if you prefer you may check the box below to make the sound just once at what is quite possibly a harmless false alarm crossing Sound just once per intersection even if GPS noise suggests multiple possible crossings there and the first one is probably a false alarm Check this box to ensure that the sound is made for just once crossing per intersection even if GPS noise makes it appear that there are multiple crossings and the first such crossing is probably a harmless false alarm Make sounds when tracking starts or trip log recording is interrupted This check box gives the option to make sounds to alert you when the GPS receiver has started tracking indicating that you may now start recording trip logs or collecting geographic coordinates or when the recording of a trip log is interrupted possibly due to a disconnected cable loss of power or poor reception from the satellites resulting in too long of a time without a good reading Use voice command recognition Check this box or click the button on the Toolbar to use speech recognition for controlling the operation with the GPS receiver If you are alone in the vehicle the only safe way to operate Tru Traffic is to pull off the road to a nearby parking space whenever y
239. ip log in the YE E 3 24 2009 45851AM Tue After Other 0345 222 diii A iv EERNERET NR 1 2 T Aft Oth 0 05 13 list and choose Rename Trip from m User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 the pop up menu Give the trip log a descriptive name such as EB moderate traffic before offset adjustment 18 Repeat steps 15 17 as often as desired 19 Click the button on the Tool Bar to create a Travel Time and Delay Report page 78 from the trip logs you ve recorded for the artery Click the button to make Plots of Speed vs Distance or Travel Time vs Distance page 92 You may choose which Trip Logs to include in the report or plot from a list of trip logs involving the selected arterial diagram See How Trip Logs are Processed page 196 for additional comments and definitions 23 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Diagram Windows A diagram window is a window which contains any type of arterial timings diagram It is the fundamental window of Tru Traffic To provide support for signalized networks or multiple intersecting arteries Tru Traffic allows you to have multiple diagram windows You may have virtually any number of diagram windows each containing a particular type of diagram for a particular artery The diagram windows have different sizes and horizontal and Vertical Scales or you may have Tru Traffic maintain synchronized scales acros
240. is checked for the Horizontal Scale then the Horizontal Scale will be something like 200 meters cm or 500 feet inch depending on the units of measurement diagram size and total Distance between intersections Otherwise it will be whatever scale is necessary to show all the intersections on the diagram with no wasted space 184 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Layout Trip Log Plots This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has several options for the appearance of Speed vs Distance or Time vs Distance Plots from trip logs Show Today s Date and Time in Plot Title Check this box to include today s date and time in the plot title Show List of Trip Logs in Plot Title The plot includes a Legend along the right hand side of the plot The legend gives a detailed list of each run of each trip log included in the plot showing which color and line style shows the corresponding trajectory e Title at the top of the plot The Title gives the name of the arterial timings diagram and optionally a list of all the trip logs but not the runs included in the plot Use this check box to indicate whether you d like this list of included trip logs in the plot title When there are many trip logs included in the plot unchecking the box reduces the clutter in the title But don t show the Trip Logs if there are more than In this box specify an upper limit to the number of trip logs listed in the plot title This prevents th
241. is rule occurs when the cross traffic Turn Phase Sequence is Lead Lag in which case there are two cross traffic turn phases one leading and one lagging the opposing through and each will have its own Split In this case you ll need to sum the two corresponding turn Splits before applying the rule A cross traffic turn is a left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 229 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination I can t connect to my GPS receiver through my USB to Serial adapter Version 5 0 had a problem working with at least some USB to Serial adapters but this problem was fixed in version 6 0 Although the different brands of USB to Serial adapters are not the same every one that I m aware of works with Tru Traffic I m not aware of any brands that don t work If it turns out that yours really doesn t work with Tru Traffic but works fine with other programs I ll swap you as I d like to get my hands on one that doesn t work so I can use it for testing and debugging If you don t want to swap let me know what model you have and I ll buy one for myself To date every time a user has reported this problem with versions 6 0 and above we ve tracked it down to something else e The wrong serial port was sel
242. ist of Links may be resorted by clicking on column headers Use the N button to edit the parameters of the selected Arterial Timings Diagram or Intersection ra T Use the zi button in the Outline View to add a new arterial diagram to the open diagram data file or to add a new Intersection to the current arterial diagram To add a new arterial diagram to the currently open diagram data file 1 Collapse the arterial diagram after which you wish to add a new arterial diagram so that its intersections are hidden then 2 Selected the arterial diagram after which you wish to add a new arterial diagram and click the button To add a new intersection to an arterial diagram 1 Expand the arterial diagram in which you wish to add a new intersection so that its intersections are visible then 2 Select the intersection after which you wish to add a new intersection or the arterial diagram if you want to add a new intersection before any current intersections then 3 Press the 4 button If you are adding an intersection an interior intersection Tru Traffic will ask you to enter the Distance from the Previous Intersection to the newly added one It then automatically calculates the distance from the newly inserted intersection to the following one if any so the arterial length is unchanged If you re adding a boundary intersection Tru Traffic arbitrarily assigns the Distance and you must change it in the Int
243. ithout unusual or complicating factors For example in determining the freeflow travel time you may want to use your best run ever rather than an average of multiple runs Maximum values The Maximum is the value from the run with the greatest value of all the runs Note that the various quantities in the report may have a maximum values given by possibly different runs That is the run that represents the greatest of the Travel Times is not necessarily the same run that represents the greatest number of Stops As a statistic the maximum can be more interesting than the average the mean because if there are runs with unusual and 187 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination complicating factors e g additional delay due to road construction or an incident then it s more likely to represents a pure value a value from one of the runs without unusual or complicating factors For example in determining the freeflow speed you may want to use your best run ever rather than an average of multiple runs e Standard Deviations from the Averages The Standard Deviation gives a measure of how much your runs spread about the average for any given MOE e g travel time delay etc It gives some indication of the reliability of your coordinated signal system how close to the mean or average we can predict any subsequent trips will be Assuming you have a statistically significant number of runs in the report then we
244. k boxes indicate whether Tru Traffic should ensure that the horizontal or Vertical Scale is consistent across all diagram windows When this is checked for one of the scales then changing that scale in any diagram window causes Tru Traffic to change that scale in all diagram windows Flow Baseline on Platoon Progression Diagrams These radio buttons determine the flow levels displayed on Platoon Progression diagrams The flow is depicted as a series of bands with dot patterns in which the dot density is proportional to the vehicle density and colors These bands indicate what percentage of a saturation flow uses the corresponding section of the artery at the corresponding time in the cycle The Saturation Flow Baseline determines which saturation flow is used as a reference for displaying these flow bands Choose between e Link Downstream Saturation Flow e Arterial Maximum Downstream Saturation Flow e Network wide Maximum Downstream Saturation Flow The default is Link Downstream Saturation Flow meaning the flow bands along each link reference that link s Downstream Saturation Flow As the downstream saturation flow can change from link to link as for example the Number of Lanes changes it can be difficult to fairly compare the flow between adjacent links using the default The second choice Arterial Maximum Downstream Saturation Flow uses a common saturation flow baseline for all links in a given direction of travel along the artery Thi
245. ks How to do this is described in the following chapters The software may be used for signal coordination and or travel time amp delay studies with a GPS receiver More specifically it s useful for drafting time space diagrams platoon progression diagrams time location diagrams and with data from runs with a GPS receiver speed distance plots and travel time distance plots Creating your first arterial timings diagram file Before starting it s helpful to decide whether you re going to use Tru Traffic just for signal coordination or just for travel time and delay study with a GPS or for both That can guide you to the simplest way to create your arterial timings diagram s Signal coordination only If you already have a Synchro file for your network then use File Save As to export that to csv and then open it in Tru Traffic Otherwise use one of the manual methods described below Travel time and delay study only 12 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 If you already have the network defined in Google Earth then copy and paste it into an empty Tru Traffic window Otherwise use one of the manual methods described below If you happen to have the Synchro file importing that may also save you some time but you ll still need to collect the geodetic coordinates of the intersection latitude amp longitude which is easiest to get from Google Earth Both signal coordination and travel time and delay study If you
246. l parameters 216 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 CollectCoordinates Utility CollectCoordinates is a utility program for Tru Traffic users Its purpose is to collect geographic coordinates typically for signalized intersections from a GPS receiver and save them to a Coordinates Text file Txt Subsequently you may import the Coordinates Text file into Tru Traffic and assign them to their respective intersections Using CollectCoordinates CollectCoordinates requires minimal interaction The figure below illustrates the basic procedures for using the utility CollectCoordinates shares the same GPS Setup parameters with Tru Traffic so you may change the GPS settings in either location and the same settings will be used by both programs The window is sizeable so you can drag the edge to enlarge it and get a better view of the settings Browse or enter the name of the Coordinates Text file you wish to save If you specify an existing Coordinates Text file the CollectCoordinates Utility appends GPS coordinates to the end of the file Once you browse for or enter the file name CollectCoordinates saves to the file any GPS coordinates already collected After clicking the button and once the GPS recevier has a fix then use the mouse or the tab key to give the input focus to either the List of Coordinates or to the Mark Spot button Thereafter each time you press a key any key on the keyboard CollectCoordinates Adds the current
247. le isn t installed by default To install this file choose the Custom setup option when you run the Tru Traffic Setup program Notes and Warnings A few notes concerning Tru Traffic s use of the UTDF files are in order 1 Some information in Tru Traffic such as the diagram Size Position Scales and Fonts and the intersection Green Band Action is not stored in the UTDF files Upon reading the files Tru Traffic either uses the Default Parameters or makes reasonable guesses to fill in the missing information But you should be aware that these parameters may not be set the way you expected 2 Tru Traffic doesn t specifically handle intersections with actuated signals It expects each signal to have or be modeled as having a fixed cycle length that is either equal to the network wide cycle length or half or twice that cycle length When Tru Traffic encounters an actuated signal in the UTDF files it will add up the splits or minimum splits if necessary and choose an adjusted cycle length that s nearest to the sum of splits 3 When reading UTDF files Tru Traffic calculates the travel distance between intersections as the sum of the length of straight lines drawn between the nodes including bends and unsignalized intersections This calculation excludes any hills or grades and it excludes any curves or turns between the intersections that aren t explicitly in the UTDF files as bends If your streets have any of these characteristics
248. line View to delete the currently selected intersection You may also delete an intersection and save it to the Windows Clipboard using the Cut command under the Edit Menu Cutting one of the interior intersections not one of the boundary intersections causes Tru Traffic to reset the Distance between the intersections on either side of the one deleted Cutting one of the boundary intersections of the diagram causes Tru Traffic to reset the optimal Horizontal Scale if it is unlocked and the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin Link Intersections An intersection link is an indication to Tru Traffic that some of the parameters between two or more intersections are related You may link everything between the intersections or all signal timings or the offsets only or on Time Space and Time Location diagrams the green bands only Tru Traffic maintains the relationship between the parameters in linked intersections even when you are editing one 159 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination of the intersections The fourtypes of links are discussed below Everything When you ve linked everything between two intersections Tru Traffic ensures that the Adjusted Cycle Length Offset Splits protected turn and pedestrian Phase Sequences with traffic turn on red option volumes and saturation flows and number of through lanes are all identical for the two intersections You can change any one of thes
249. ll use them in future sessions Click the Save button to save selected Preferences to a TSPPD Configuration file TsppdCfg for sharing with others When you load a TSPPD Configuration file by clicking the Merge button you have the option to select which types of Preferences in the file you wish to merge with your own Layout The parameters of the Layout page of the Preferences dialog determine the appearance of the E arterial timings diagram Speed vs Distance or Time vs Distance Plots from trip logs and the Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs The layout parameters are grouped in sub pages Offsets Splits Bands Time Grid Misc and Trip Log Plots Layout Offsets This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has options for the appearance of Offsets on the arterial timings diagram Show Offsets This set of radio buttons indicates whether the intersection Offsets are displayed on the diagram and if so where You may choose e Below the Intersection Names In this case you may specify the number of rows or lines used to display the Offsets on the diagram This is useful if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the offsets tend to run together e Next of Offset Reference Points In this case you may opt to label the offsets with the initials OS This is useful if you re also showing the splits on the diagram the label helps to distinguish the offset from the splits e Don
250. locked or if not how many cycles are shown on the diagram Selecting Locked locks the Vertical Scale so it is unaffected by any other changes you may make Selecting a value other than Locked such as 2 cycles 3 cycles or 8 cycles indicates that Tru Traffic should automatically reset the Vertical Scale to show the desired number of cycles each time a parameter is changed that would affect these scales In this case Tru Traffic automatically resets it whenever you change the Cycle Length Diagram Height or Font Size Depending on your settings in the Layout parameters Tru Traffic will ensure that this is a standard scale Choosing 4 cycles is especially useful on Platoon Progression diagrams when you are showing the flow on alternate pairs of cycles and on Time Location diagrams when you are not showing both rings on all cycles When it isn t locked you shouldn t set the Vertical Scale until after the Cycle Length has been set and only then if you need a different scale The cases where you need to change the Vertical Scale will probably be rare and restricted to those times when you need a standard scale such as 30 or 50 seconds per inch or when you need to see more cycles in the diagram You can easily reset the Vertical Scale to the default value by clicking on the drop down list box and selecting the desired number of cycles even 1f the number is already selected This always resets the scale if it isn t locked 1
251. low arrow you may determine that the yellow trap hazard is minimal and in this case you may want to suppress theses warnings altogether for the specified movement Start Up Lost Time The Start Up Lost Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is used on Platoon Progression diagrams for calculating the flow and on Time Space diagrams for calculating the default Offsets and Widths of any green bands associated with that movement Most accurately for Platoon Progression diagrams the Start Up Lost Time is the time in seconds at which a straight line drawn through the cumulative curve crosses the time axis The TRANSYT 7F manual describes it as the time from the start of green until the first vehicle crosses the stopline but this definition is not really correct For a lucid explanation of this and guidelines on how to measure it see R M Shanteau s Using Cumulative Curves to Measure Saturation Flow and Lost Time ITE Journal Oct 88 or MJO S T VA cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 151 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination For Time Space diagrams the Start Up Lost Time has a somewhat different definition as explained in the figures below which de
252. lt faxso6 g lt as L 72 DS N a S Dd N M 6 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Voice Command Recognition Tru Traffic can recognize voice commands for the operations most frequently used while driving a vehicle with the software connected to a GPS receiver This option is available under the GPS Options page You have some choice of which Microsoft Speech Recognition Engine to use either a SAPI 5 or SAPI 5 1 engine or a SAPI 5 3 or greater engine There are some differences to note however The version of the Microsoft Speech Recognition Engine SRE introduced with Windows Vista supports SAPI 5 3 and has the virtue that it doesn t require cooperation from any given application In particular Tru Traffic does not need to internally invoke the SRE and report the vocabulary of commands that it supports Instead the SRE infers the vocabulary of commands based entirely on the text on the controls that are currently visible on the screen including menus buttons edit boxes etc The advantage here is that with this version of the SRE you can speech control anything on the screen anything in any window within Tru Traffic or anywhere else on your screen The disadvantage is that you may speech control using only the text visible on the screen Any synonyms that Tru Traffic reports to the engine seem to be ignored and you re constrained to speak only the commands that you can read on the screen For example
253. luding the longitude and latitude of each point in the plotted average The instantaneous speeds are saved in the Google KML as color coded placemarks You may display these as a color coded map in Google Earth or watch as an animation You may set the color speed bins in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog Or Saving the plotted Average or Median Link Speeds as either a GIS shapefile a GPS Exchange Format GPX file a Google KML file or as a tab delimited text table including the longitude and latitude of each point in the plotted average The link speeds are saved in the Google KML as color coded lines or curves matching the shape of the links displayed in the Network View You may display these as a color coded map in Google Earth or watch as an animation You may set the color speed bins in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog Setting the Arterial Link Color on the Network View using one of the average link speed summaries for color coding the links The color speed bins are the same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog for transferring speeds to Google Earth page 194 If you observe any spurious points in the plot of any of the trip logs you may manually delete these points by carefully pointing to them with the mouse cursor then clicking Alt right button You may also use the Trip Log Details Table page 61 to manually identify and remove spurious points or the Trip Log Filter pag
254. m Data File Use this command in the File Menu to close the currently open diagram file without exiting Tru Traffic 174 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Printing the Diagram Use the 8 button on the Tool Bar or the Print command under the File Menu to print either the Network View or the diagram s currently open If you ve zoomed in on a section of the diagram so Tru Traffic is treating the diagram as split into pages you may select which page s to print If you have more than one arterial timings diagram in the currently open diagram file you may print all diagrams just the currently selected diagram or you may specify which diagrams to print Exit Tru Traffic Use the Exit command under the File menu to exit Tru Traffic Before exiting the program Tru Traffic detects whether the diagram currently in memory has been modified since the last time it was saved If so Tru Traffic offers to save the diagram before quitting 175 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Preferences The Preferences dialog box is accessible through the Preferences command under the View menu In the dialog you may specify various parameters that control the units of measurement layout of the arterial timings diagram trip log plots and Travel Time amp Delay Report diagram colors default parameters and default diagram data directories The Preferences are automatically saved in the Windows Registry so Tru Traffic wi
255. matically Optimize Arterial Offsets etc under the Optimize menu page 163 you may have the optimization algorithm consider the bands for more than one speed category using weighting factors to specify the relative import of the respective speed categories There are weighting factors for the Cars band which uses the Design Speed the Bus band the Light Rail band and the Bicycle band but there is not a separate weighting factor for the Posted Speed Limit band If you wish to coordinate the signals for the Posted Speed Limit then you should set the Design Speed to equal the posted speed limit To view or modify the light rail speed choose Light Rail Speed instead of Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Bus Speed or Bicycle Speed in the speed type selection box near the upper right corner of the tabbed page in the Intersection Parameters dialog When you change the light rail speed along the artery at an intersection the program offers to change all downstream bus speeds to match Bicycle Speed For this discussion we refer to Bicycle Speed as one of a number of speed and band categories that you may view on the time space diagram In addition to the Bicycle Speed you may view bands representing the Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Bus Speed and or Light Rail Speed Green bands for the Bicycle Speed or for any of these categories may be defined in terms of the Green Band Action Offset and Width In the special case of the Bus a
256. me space diagram In addition to the Bus Speed you may view bands representing the Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Light Rail Speed and or Bicycle Speed Green bands for the Bus Speed or for any of these categories may be defined in terms of the Green Band Action Offset and Width In the special case of the Bus and Light Rail categories you have additional options for specifying the time of day of their green bands for example according to the transit schedule the time interval between bands also according to the transit schedule and whether the band is constrained to start during effective green time of the signal which gives you a means of modeling a band for a preemptive transit system or a transit system that does not affect the normal traffic flow or its signal for example an exclusive rail or lane on say a bridge When using the option to automatically Optimize Arterial Offsets etc under the Optimize menu page 163 you may have the optimization algorithm consider the bands for more than one speed category using weighting factors to specify the relative import of the respective speed categories There are weighting factors for the Cars band which uses the Design Speed the Bus band the Light Rail band and the Bicycle band but there is not a separate weighting factor for the Posted Speed Limit band If you wish to coordinate the signals for the Posted Speed Limit then you should set the Design Speed to equal the posted spee
257. mmaries of these numbers averaged over all runs of all trip logs of each type Before After and Neither Finally it includes a Before amp After difference that is the difference between the average of the Befores and the average of the Afters shown as both absolute difference and percent difference The Before amp After difference shows how the average changes going from before to after Expect some of these numbers to be positive and some to be negative For example if the delay goes down a negative number then the average speed goes up a positive number See the section on Statistics in the Before and After Comparisons p 88 for further details At your option the averages in the report may be shown with their standard deviations This is the sample standard deviation using n 1 not the population standard deviation using n The standard deviation gives an indication of the reliability of runs through the artery More specifically it measures the predictive uncertainty in how close to the average a new run will fall For a normal distribution a bell curve about 68 3 of the runs will fall within one standard deviation of the average and about 95 4 of runs will be within two standard deviations of the average Some common measures of reliability the 90th and 95th percentiles are related to the standard deviation The 90th percentile is given by the average plus or minus 1 64 standard deviations while 95th percentile is
258. mounted microphone You ll may also want to get one with an ear piece so you can hear the audible sound Tru Traffic can make to acknowledge when a command has been recognized The speech recognition takes a few moments to identify the spoken command If you ve opted to play a sound to acknowledge a recognized command the moment the sound begins playing is the moment the command is processed Knowing this can help you learn the anticipation time required for time sensitive commands This time can vary depending on the speed of your computer the level of noise and how well your speech recognition engine has been trained The accuracy of the speech recognition engine is greatly improved with training sessions See the Speech Tools or the operating system s online help for more details The first time through the speech recognition training session took me about 10 minutes or so After that it got much faster Each time you do it the speech recognition becomes more reliable in the future 173 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination See the section Tips on Using the Speech Recognition Engine page 73 for additional tips on using the speech recognition engine with Tru Traffic At present there are 12 operations that Tru Traffic can perform in response to voice commands Each operation can be invoked by more than one spoken phrase listed below For each operation you may use whichever spoken phrase s you find most convenien
259. movement automatically changes the AWF Clearance Time of the other movement as well Tru Traffic will warn you if you should change the split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement to something less than the AWF Yellow and All Red Clearance Times for that phase Yellow Clearance Time The Yellow Clearance Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is used to determine the effective Offset of the intersection s signal for certain Offset Reference Points It is measured in seconds The default Yellow Clearance Time may be specified on the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog box page 192 When using split phasing page 127 changing the Yellow Clearance Time of either the through movement or the cross traffic turning movement automatically changes the Yellow Clearance Time of the other movement as well Tru Traffic will warn you if you should change the split for the signal phase associated with a particular movement to something less than the AWF Yellow All Red Clearance Times for that phase The Yellow Clearance Time may be viewed directly on the Diagram Window in the Color of your choice 150 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 All Red Clearance Time The All Red Clearance Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is used to determine the effective Offset of the intersection s signal for certain Offset Reference Points It is measured in seconds The default All Red
260. n probably mistakenly applied to this intersection instead e Maximum extent of the geographic coordinates measurements is large for the given number of lanes and lane width Effective intersection width or the radius of tolerance about the geographic coordinates encompasses the neighboring intersection e The straight line distance based on geographic coordinates between neighboring intersections exceeds the user declared travel distance e Intersections have the same ID number but a suspiciously large distance separates their geographic locations Trip Logs have an unverifiable source for example imported from a text file e Launching the Tutorial Wizard When working through tutorials the Tutorial Wizard can sometimes appear to get stuck on a step To avoid this problem please follow the tutorial instructions carefully File Folder amp UTDF Options The parameters on this page control some of the file management Tru Traffic The parameters include Diagram File Folder Used by Default upon Startup This specifies the default folder that Tru Traffic opens when you first use File Open or File Save after creating a new diagram data file Keep a Backup Copy when Overwriting Existing Files Tru Traffic keeps the backup copy if desired of the file it s overwriting in a subfolder called Backup of last saved files To recover a file from this backup folder you may open it directly using File Open but be sure t
261. n where n is the index of the trip log in the list You may specify a pattern including special codes for the trip log on the Options page The Size column of the trip log list shows the number of time position measurements contained in the given trip log A measurement is taken every 1 or 2 seconds depending on the type of your GPS receiver however Tru Traffic discards redundant measurements while you re not moving e g while you re waiting in a queue The Trip Logs are stored in the Diagram Data file See the topic Importing and Exporting Trip Logs page 58 for information on sharing trip logs through more generic files Trip Log Properties The Trip Log Properties dialog is accessible from the GPS Trip Logs Page by right clicking on a selected trip log and choosing Properties from the pop up menu In this dialog you may edit 1 The Name of the trip log 2 The Notes of any length associated with the trip log e g Lane 2 was closed due to construction work this day 3 The type of the trip log either Before After Neither or Atypical The type ofthe trip log is used for calculating averages and differences in the Travel Time and Delay Reports Neither type trip logs may be included in the report but they will not be included in the before and after comparison Atypical type trip logs are never included in the report You may exclude any trip log from the report by simply leaving the box next to it unchecked
262. n Direction This check box indicates whether on Time Space diagrams the green band for just one direction of travel 1s shown for each cycle with the forward direction in lower half of the diagram and reverse direction in upper half Show One Band Only This check box indicates whether on Time Space and Time Location diagrams just one green bands is shown for each direction of travel starting in the first or lowest cycle This can provide for a less cluttered appearance of the diagram allowing you to focus on just the one band A disadvantage is that it can be more difficult to see how the bands from the opposite directions of travel interact at each intersection which can be useful in deciding whether to change to a leading lead lag or lagging protected turn sequence When this box is checked only one green band is displayed on the diagram in each direction of travel If you have opted to show green bands from side street turning movements one band is shown for each movement This band begins in the first or lowest cycle on the diagram If you have opted to start a new green band at a particular intersection the new band starts in the first cycle independent of which cycle the upstream arrives in When this box is not checked a green band is displayed on the diagram in each cycle for each direction of travel Approximate Acceleration Curve on Bands from Side street This check box on the Layout Bands page of the Preferences
263. n a Google KML file 2 With a blank empty Tru Traffic import File Open or paste the table of geographic coordinates or the folder from Google Earth Tru Traffic displays the positions of the so far unconnected intersections in the Network View 16 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 3 Connect the dots to create arteries or routes Click on a dot to start a new artery or route Ctrl click on a dot to append it to the current artery or route If Tru Traffic can distinguish the names of the crossing streets then it can automatically trace the likely routes through the dots by matching common street names along the dots To use this option click the button Automatically Trace Routes in the dialog This button 1s enabled if your table of geographic positions has two separate columns for the names of the crossing streets or if the name of each intersection follows a form such as Main St amp First Ave using one of the words and or at or a common joining character such as amp or to combine the names of the two crossing streets Moo rn N EEEEE E Connect Dots to i ate teries m il x File Edit View Template Optimize Window Help beo Click a node on the Network View to start a new artery or route Ctrl Click nodes to extend the artery or route to those nodes When you ve finished tracing all the arteries dick Create Arteries a Virginia Beach Blvd amp
264. n in the Intersection Get GPS click the Measurement button to take the current GPS reading as a measurement of the 233 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 7i Add Position 3l gn Manually intersection s coordinates Otherwise you may click the button to manually enter z Import Coordinates or the button to import the geographic coordinates of the center of the intersection For the purposes of displaying recorded trip logs as trajectories on a diagram or on the Network View or for generating a Travel Time amp Delay Report it doesn t matter which order these two pieces of information are collected But for the purpose of seeing your current position displayed on the diagram or on the Network View while tracking with the GPS receiver the intersections Geographic Coordinates must be collected first 3 Right click on the Network View and choose Layout Grid with Geographic Coordinates This should make the trip logs visible on the Network View 4 Since the trip log is visible in the Network View we know that it s a least reasonably close to the declared coordinates of the center of the intersections The problem then is it s not quite close enough Make sure that the nodes in the Network View are roughly where you expect them with respect to the trip log If there s one outlying node then it s possible that the geographic coordinates of that intersection is incorrectly specified
265. na and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 180 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 To account for both extremes same slope along long links and different slope along short links Tru Traffic offers the option to approximate the acceleration curve for side street turning bands The acceleration curve is approximated only when the Startup Lost Time of the side street turning movement is greater than that of the arterial through movement and the characteristics of the acceleration curve are calculated based on that lost time difference Color Fill the Interior of the Band This check box indicates whether on Time Space and Time Location diagrams the green bands are color filled This makes the bands more prominent but results in slower screen refreshes When this box is checked the solid green bands are displayed with the color of your choosing When this box is not checked hollow green bands are displayed with only the starting and ending edges visible Layout Time Grid This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has options for the appearance of the Time Grid on the arterial timings diagram Time Marker This is a set of radio buttons specifying how regular time intervals determined by the Seconds Per Mark parameter are marked in drawing the diagram It may be set to Tick Marks or Grid Li
266. nals where the arteries are really one way they re declared as two way So for example when you re editing Splits you ll see phantom splits in the opposing direction The protected turn Phase Sequence in each direction should be None so you won t have to worry about the turning splits but you ll still see a phantom opposing through split Just set the phantom through split to match the through split in the one way direction and otherwise ignore that direction because it doesn t really exist o To see both sets of bands eastbound and westbound in the eastern two way section you must look at the Mostly Eastbound Artery not the Mostly Westbound Artery Similarly to see both sets of bands in the western two way section you must look at the Mostly Westbound Artery not the Mostly Eastbound Artery You could work around this by starting a new green band at that intersection but by default the new green band s Offset and Width would generally not be the same as those of the corresponding band in the other diagram so you will have to override the default band Offset and Width if you want the two diagrams to look the same in the common legs Method B The other method is to create just one diagram for the artery which is two way and has both of the two signals in the middle which are really on separate one way arteries one eastbound and one westbound At these signals we need to play a trick with the Green Band Action At the Eastbound
267. nce Times plus the Green Extension Time For a with traffic turning green band the default value of the Width is equal to the duration of the effective green time that is allotted to the through movement in the appropriate direction s of travel at this intersection 1 e the through Split minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and All Red Clearance Times plus the Green Extension Time You may edit the band offset and width directly on the arterial timings diagram for intersections where a green band is started i e where the band action is set to Start by simply dragging the band limits directly on the arterial timing diagram An associated check box labeled Locked allows you to protect the band width from being affected by changes to the splits or cycle length If the band width isn t locked then doing any of the following causes Tru Traffic to reset the width of the new green band to its default value 1 Changing the Start Up Lost Time or Green Extension Time 2 Changing the Yellow or All Red Clearance Times 3 Changing the Adjusted Cycle Length or Splits at the intersection Related to and obviating the Green Band Width is an option to let a downstream green band s offset and width be determined by an intersection in another diagram altogether Do this by linking the bands between the intersections of two diagrams dragging from the primary intersection to the secondary 141 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Si
268. nd Light Rail categories you have additional options for specifying the time of day of their green bands for example according to the transit schedule the time interval between bands also according to the transit schedule and whether the band is constrained to start during effective green time of the signal which gives you a means of modeling a band for a preemptive transit system or a transit system that does not affect the normal traffic flow or its signal for example an exclusive rail or lane on say a bridge When using the option to automatically Optimize Arterial Offsets etc under the Optimize menu page 163 you may have the optimization algorithm consider the bands for more than one speed category using weighting factors to specify the relative import of the respective speed categories There are weighting factors for the Cars band which uses the Design Speed the Bus band the Light Rail band and the Bicycle band but there is not a separate weighting factor for the Posted Speed Limit band If you wish to coordinate the signals for the Posted Speed Limit then you should set the Design Speed to equal the posted speed limit To view or modify the bicycle speed choose Bicycle Speed instead of Design Speed Posted Speed Limit Bus Speed or Light Rail Speed in the speed type selection box near the upper right corner of the tabbed page in the Intersection Parameters dialog When you change the bus speed along the artery a
269. nd you re sure the cable is attached properly then you may have the serial port declared incorrectly or your GPS receiver may be expecting to send data in a different format Many of the GPS receivers compatible with the NMEA 0183 Standard are also capable of sending data in other formats and will do so by default You ll need to adjust the settings of these receivers so they use an NMEA NMEA in out interface See the receiver s owner s manual for information on how to change the interface The original serial interface only DeLorme Earthmate will initially send data that looks something like y 5 UyE 12 B Q1 H01 98 vUS5 C 0406 08 98 i18 A 0003 AZ IN gt VO 9 1 lt ri 4 J s u QZ 6xu XEARTHA EARTHA yel y 4 i 6 106 6 12s68 D6 N A UD yyy X y y amp i 6 71 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Note the text strings EARTHA in the first few lines of this sample of raw data This text appears only in the first few lines after you click the Start GPS Tracking button Once tracking begins which can take several more minutes the raw data from the Earthmate will look something like yel 5 Ww y id yel 5 y B Every second another set of lines should arrive y 7 7 m ole amp iV y 7 7 beg yD 8 8 ug byyy amp yD 8 8 S g oO Eg
270. nes You may set the spacing between the time intervals with the Seconds Per Time Mark parameter and you may opt to label the time markers e g 1s 2s etc Additionally you may specify the line thickness of the major and minor if any time markers Seconds Per Time Marker This parameter determines the interval or spacing between the regular time markers in drawing the diagram Show Minor Time Mark Use this check box on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog to show a minor or secondary time marker in addition to the principal time marker If this box is checked you may specify the interval or spacing in seconds between the minor time markers in the diagram When the principal Time Marker is Tick Marks the minor time marker is shorter tick marks When the principal Time Marker is Grid Lines the minor time marker is dotted grid lines You may specify the line thickness of the minor and major time markers 181 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Layout Platoon Flows This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has options for the appearance of the flow bands on Platoon Progression diagrams Plotting Mode This set of radio buttons specifies how the flow band contour boundaries are calculated and plotted on Platoon Progression diagrams You may choose Smooth Contours which is slower but yields higher resolution or Time space Blocks which is faster to plot but at lower resolut
271. ng a value of 20 per hour for the Parking Maneuvers where parking exists and 0 per hour where there is no parking Buses Stopping The number of Buses Stopping buses per hour for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It determines the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for the blocking effect of local buses that stop within the intersection area When field data are not available the HCM recommends using a value of 0 buses per hour for the Buses Stopping Central Business District Area Type The Central Business District CBD Area Type check box for a particular lane group is used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group It determines the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for the area type CBD or otherwise Check this box if the intersection is in the CBD area and leave it unchecked otherwise Use Default Lane Utilization The Use Default Lane Utilization check box and the Highest Lane Volume vehicles per hour for a particular lane group are used in calculating the actual saturation flow rate for that lane group They determines the saturation flow rate adjustment factor for lane utilization 158 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 When field data are not available leave the Use Default Lane Utilization check box checked to cause Tru Traffic to use the value recommended by the HCM based on the lane group movement and number of lanes in t
272. ng too early Sah Stop Logging Trips _ Click the GPs View mcg button or say Stop Trip Gf voice Position Satellites Clocks Trip Logs Options Setup Diagnostics command recognition is enabled to Name Start Date Start Time Day Type Period Duration Size 4 NB US 401 Plani 2 3 24 2008 338 324M Tue After Other 0 03 55 222 end the current trip log I recommend V SB US 401 Plan 1 2 3 24 2008 3 57 07 AM Tue After Other 0 04 15 233 stopping the recording at least 6 to 8 7 NB US 401 Plan1 2 3 24 2009 40256AM Tue After Other 00336 214 V SB US 401 Plan1 2 3 24 2009 40807AM Tue After Other 00322 204 seconds after passing through the last weusamreni2 3 24 2009 41302AM Tue Afer Other 00330 186 V SB US 401 Plan 1 2 3 24 2008 4 18 06 AM Tue After Dther 0 03 06 188 intersection Even later to be safer V NB US 401 Plan 1 2 3 24 2008 4 22 42 AM Tue After Other 0 05 49 282 You ll see the newly recorded trip 7 SB US 401 Plan1 2 3 24 2009 43403AM Tue After Other 0 0329 211 V NB US 401 Plan 1 2 3 24 2008 4 38 50 AM Tue After Other 0 03 46 219 appear at the end of the list on the gssusamPeni 3 24 2009 44403AM Tue Afer Other 00326 208 V NB US 401 Plan1 2 3 24 2009 448 38AM Tue After Other 00349 217 Trip Log page V SB US 401 Plan 1 2 3 24 2009 4 5411AM Tue After Other 00327 208 Right click on the new tr
273. nk Average or Copy Link Median Choose Copy as Google KML In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder either press Ctrl V or right click and choose Paste to paste the trip log summary Use the settings on the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog to specify the color and size of the icons showing the average or median Trip Log points page 194 Here are a few ways you can use these features Confirm or Correct Intersection Coordinates 1 Follow the steps above to Transfer Intersection Locations from Tru Traffic to Google Earth 2 Double click on the new folder in Google Earth to zoom the map on the network 3 Scroll around the map and zoom as needed to ensure that each intersection has at least two placemarks straddling the center of the intersection I like to put one placemark on say the NE 205 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination corner of the intersection and one on the SW corner The centroid midpoint of the two placemarks should be at the center of the intersection If you find a placemark in the wrong location right click on it and choose Properties While the Properties dialog is open you may drag the placemark to the correct location If you find an intersection with only one placemark add a new one To do this I like to use a little trick to save a bit of time First duplicate the existing placemark by right clicking it and choosing Copy then pressing Ctrl V
274. nk Median Change the file type to Google KML In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then import using File Open 204 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 2 Windows Clipboard Right click on the Plot and choose Copy Summaries Copy Instantaneous te Trip Log Plot Plan 1 2 US 401 Main St Lillington 0630 0815 M F Fri 12 24 2010 10 35 AM Average Instantaneous Speed Before Median instantaneous Speed Before Average Instantaneous Speed After Median Instantaneous Speed After eanan Average Link Speed Before Median Link Speed Before Average Link Speed After Median Link Speed After Evene rr ee EE PES Plot Type H m Properties Alt Enter a ota i d Copy Plot Ctrl C peed mileshour Copy Summaries Copy Instananeous Averages Copy as Google KML Copy as GPX Save Copy Instananeous Medians Print Copy Link Averages Copy Link Medians Disable Point from Trip Log Split Trip Log at this Point H 4 A o d 4801 3 p00 4 000 5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000 11 000 Distance feet 06 1231 NC 210 1231 SLC 35 20 06 0125 Front St 125 06 0127 E W McNi06 0126 James St 126 0 2 000 1 000 06 0129 US 401 421 NC 27 210 129 SLC 45 35 20 Average or Copy Instantaneous Median or Copy Li
275. nking two different arteries at their common intersection Two way One way Designation This is a drop down list box indicating the direction s of travel allowed through this intersection Both Ways One Way Forward bound or One Way Reverse bound By default it is Both Ways but you may locally override it at any intersection to model arteries changing from two way to one way and back again 113 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Control Traffic This is a drop down list box indicating the direction s of travel controlled by the signal at this intersection Both Ways Forward bound only or Reverse bound only By default it is Both Ways but you may locally override it at any intersection to model embedded superstreets and divided arteries with a signal for only one direction of travel Geographic Coordinates The Geographic Coordinates are the East longitude and North latitude of the center of the intersection as reported by the GPS receiver The Geographic Coordinates are used when tracking your current location with the GPS receiver on the diagram window or displaying recorded Trip Logs page 51 in the diagram preparing Travel Time and Delay Reports page 78 creating Plots from Trip Logs page 92 measuring the distance between intersections using either trip logs or Geographic Coordinates directly measuring the average speed between intersections using trip logs and laying out the Network Vie
276. nloaded or imported from another source the trajectory may show the trip 56 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 log passing through the red time or waiting at a green signal You may use this parameter to override the trip log s recorded Signal Cycle Start Time setting it according to the timing plan effective at the recording time This time shift does not affect Travel Time and Delay Reports or Trip Log Plots If you ve already specified the Signal Cycle Start Times for your E Timing Plans by either synchronizing their clocks or setting them directly in the GPS Clocks page then you may set the Signal Cycle Start Time for a group of selected trip logs on the GPS Trip Logs Page by right clicking on the selection and choosing Signal Cycle Start Time from the pop up menu 6 The time shift on the diagram This number affects how the trip log trajectory is plotted on the arterial timings diagram and how the Start Up Lost Time is calculated from the Trip Log but nothing else If the GPS satellite and signal clocks were synchronized when the trip log was recorded each trip log trajectory on the diagram should show when in the signal cycle the trip entered the artery and passed through each intersection But if the signal timings have changed since the trip log was recorded or if the clocks weren t synchronized the trajectory may show the trip log passing through the red time or waiting at a green signal You may use this parameter to offset t
277. no vehicles arriving at the upstream intersection and there is no queue waiting at the upstream intersection These criteria are strict so a queue backing up into the upstream intersection usually indicates that you should not trust the diagram Unless you are sure these criteria are met you should either adjust the timing parameters of the diagram to prevent the back up adjust them to allow plenty of time for the backed up queue to clear or not use a Platoon Progression diagram at all for that artery Add Diagram Window re Use the zi button on the Outline View to create a new diagram window in which you can place a diagram of any type for any artery To add a new arterial diagram to the currently open diagram data file 1 Collapse the arterial diagram after which you wish to add a new arterial diagram so that its intersections are hidden then 2 Select the arterial diagram after which you wish to add a new arterial diagram and press the zi button 29 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Delete Diagram Window Use the E button on the Outline View to delete a diagram window You may also delete a diagram or an intersection and save it to the Windows Clipboard using the Cut command under the Edit Menu When you delete a diagram window Tru Traffic automatically breaks any links to intersections in that window Deleting one of the interior intersections not one of the boundary intersections cause
278. nt to the correct intersection Incorrect The red circle is off the artery The geographic points probably apply to the intersection of an adjacent artery Incorrect The intersection has no red circle You probably either collected no geographic positions or you assigned the ones you collected to the wrong intersection Collect a pair of points straddling the center of the intersection and bounding the intersection Or use Google Earth to add the pair of points Correct The point lies between the travel time runs and the red circle straddles the runs Adjusted Cycle Length The Adjusted Cycle Length is the cycle length at which the intersection s signal actually operates It is a drop down list box indicating the amount of the network Cycle Length that is used by the intersection e Full 1 x 122 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 e Half 1 2 x e Double 2 x e Two thirds 2 3 x e Three halves 3 2 x e One third 1 3 x Triple 3 x e Three fourths 3 4 x e Four thirds 4 3 x e One fourth 1 4 x e Quadruple 4 x e Uncoordinated implied e Uncoordinated specified Thus if the network Cycle Length is 90 seconds then Half indicates that the intersection operates at 45 seconds Double indicates that it operates at 180 seconds Two thirds indicates it operates at 60 seconds Three halves indicates it operates at 135 seconds One third operates at 30 seconds and Triple operates at 270 s
279. nt version cannot be saved in this file type Only the currently selected timing plan is saved in the file A text file which is used as a means of sharing information with TEAPAC through PRETSPPD both from Strong Concepts www StrongConcepts com This file format is likely to change in the future based on user feedback The Universal Traffic Data Format combined file CSV introduced with Synchro version 7 0 Helpful in sharing traffic signal information with other programs supporting the UTDF such as Synchro and traffic signal control systems from Naztec Gardner Eagle and Peek UTDF files are a convenient and often preferable way to share data with other The file type of AAPEX of the Arterial Analysis Package available through McTrans Helpful in transferring the arterial timings diagram parameters among TRANSYT 7F PASSER II 90 and other programs supporting the AAP file format See page 214 for further information about AAP files A graphics file convenient for sharing graphics with Bmp other Windows programs Tru Traffic can write Bitmap Files but cannot read them The Picture file can be a preferable format for this purpose 172 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Portable Network Graphics An operating system independent graphics file Files convenient for sharing graphics over the web or with other programs especially non Windows programs These files tend to be smaller than Bitmap files Picture Files
280. ntersection Parameters dialog Tru Traffic shows either the ideal Saturation Flow or the actual Saturation Flow depending on which Saturation Flow radio button is selected You may enter only the ideal Saturation Flow in this dialog the actual Saturation Flow is a calculated value You may select which type of flow is shown by default on the Desktop page of the Preferences dialog According to the HCM the actual saturation flow s is given by S so N fu fuv fa fo foh fa for fir Here so is the ideal per lane saturation flow N is the number of lanes in the lane group and the adjustment factors f reduce the actual saturation flow due to various conditions such as lane width heavy vehicles approach grade parking lanes bus blocking area type and left and right turns Tru Traffic lets you enter N and s in the Intersection Parameters dialog Tru Traffic calculates frr and fzr for you and the rest of the factors are entered in the Lane Group Parameters dialog The Highway Capacity Manual suggests using 1900 for so Whenever you change the ideal Saturation Flow of the through movements along the artery Tru Traffic sets the corresponding Downstream Saturation Flow to match the actual Saturation Flow Tru Traffic is assuming that the number of feeding lanes equals the number of receiving lanes See also R M Shanteau s Using Cumulative Curves to Measure Saturation Flow and Lost Time TE Journal Oct 88 for a lucid explanation of sat
281. ny spurious points in any of the trip logs you may manually delete these points by carefully pointing to them with the mouse cursor then clicking Alt right button Increasing the zoom level of the Network View can make it easier to spot spurious points in the trip logs You may also use the Trip Log Details Table page 61 to manually identify and remove spurious points or the Trip Log Filter page 62 to automatically do so View the effective extent of the intersections This is a circle centered at the intersection with a radius equal to the half width of the intersection A trip log must cross this region to count as passing through the intersection Viewing the extent makes it easier to diagnose why a trip log is either skipping User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Network Parameters Arterial Diagram Intersection View Diagram Split Artery into two Diagrams Layout Grid with Geographic Coordinates Stiffen Grid Background Map Show Items v Intersection Extents Create Annotation dlae dM ciscus Cycle Length Scroll to Neighbor gt Offsets Offset Reference Points Auto Scroll when Mouse is near Age Speed Color coded Links Disable Point from Trip Log Split Trip Log at this Point Trip Log Traces Speed Color coded Trip Log Points Properties Alt Enter Speed Color cog Legend Color coded Trip Log Stops Stop Color codf Legen
282. o notes in Trip Logs o period designations for trip logs o overrides of signal cycle start times for trip logs o font and title customizations to plots from trip logs o background color for annotations on the arterial timings diagram o annotations on the Network View o timing plan assignments to annotations on the arterial timings diagram or the Network View o Bezier curves on the links in the layout of the Network View o the overriding background color if any of the Network View and o the transparency level of the background map image if any for the Network View There may be a few other things I m not thinking of right now but I think that s the complete list Special procedures OK I ve got a GPS receiver Now what do I do with it See the tutorial on How to Perform a Travel Time and Delay Study page 20 for step by step instructions on how to operate with the GPS receiver In addition to these studies you can use recorded trip logs to e Take measurements of the geographic coordinates of intersections Plot trajectories on the diagram windows graphically showing where delay occurs which signals you ve stopped at and where you entered or left the green bands Prepare Travel Time and Delay Reports Make Plots of Speed vs Distance or Travel Time vs Distance e Measure the travel distance between intersections e Calculate the optimal relative offset between intersections for a given direction of travel
283. o use File Save As to resave the file in the main folder as otherwise you ll end up with a nested series of Backup of last saved files folders Keeping automatic backups of you files is especially helpful while recording a trip log If the power saving mode or screensaver on your system kicks in while recording a trip log the data connection is interrupted and the file can become corrupted during the automatic save 193 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination While a File is Open for Editing Lock it as Read only for all other Instances of Tru Traffic This option can be useful when your Tru Traffic data files are stored on a network drive where multiple Tru Traffic users may unwittingly open a file simultaneously In this case Tru Traffic can lock files as you open them by creating a small special text file with the extension lock containing information about which user opened the file and when so other users are alerted as needed that the file is currently in use If the users try to save the file while it s locked they will see a warning about the file already open They can override this warning if desired but the warning gives them a chance to negotiate with coworkers as needed The lock files can persist after the file is closed if Tru Traffic terminates abnormally In this case you may either delete the false alarm lock file or you may simply override the warning when you open and
284. of the UTDF files can be one of two different styles with different extensions as described in the table below UTDF File Extension Comma delimited These files are usually a bit smaller In the case of the variables Layout data this file style can contain the names of streets 210 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Column aligned These files are easier for a human to read in a word variables processor or text editor In the case of the Layout data this file style cannot contain the names of streets For most of the five different files in the set of UTDF files which of these styles or extensions you choose is really a matter of preference Spreadsheet or other programs often handle one of these file styles more easily than another But as noted in the table for the Layout file the choice makes another important difference the comma delimited Layout file can contain the names of streets whereas the column aligned cannot Therefore it is generally preferable to use the comma delimited style for the Layout file UTDF File Extension Description Type Either CSV or DAT Stores intersection locations and connections The but CSV is recommended CSV file can contain the names of streets but the DAT file cannot Therefore it is generally better to use the CSV style for the Layout file Either CSV or DAT Stores lane and fixed information Either CSV or DAT Stores timing plan information that varies by time of d
285. offset of the less important direction Depending on the splits phase sequences and the directional weighting factors this strategy does not necessarily ensure that the bandwidth survives in each direction You may want to tinker with the directional weighting factors as needed to get satisfactory bandwidths in both directions Use the Modal Weighting Factors 96 to specify the preference given to the various modes of transportation or speed categories e g cars buses light rail or bicycles as described on page 132 Analogous to its use of the Directional Weighting Factors for each mode of transportation the algorithm calculates the ideal offset In general the ideal offsets for each mode of transportation differ so the software must compromise It uses the modal weighting factors to choose the offset that s proportionally close to the ideal offset of the respective transportation modes When optimizing the cycle length for more than one mode of transportation the software lists the respective bandwidths as a percent of the cycle length for each mode of transportation You may select the cycle length you prefer The first columns in this list show the composite bandwidths considering 164 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 the bandwidths of all modes of transportation with their respective weighting factors The Scoring Adjustment Coefficients give you control over how the performances are compared for various combinations of phase s
286. ofthe Runs e Days of Week of the Runs Range of Starting Times of the Runs Include Table of Contents Links in the Details Report This check box on the Layout TT amp D Report page of the Ed fa Preferences dialog determines whether the Details pages of the IGI c Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs include a table of contents with hot links to the individual trip log run tables therein If you generally copy and paste the Details pages into Excel for further analysis you may prefer to uncheck this box and omit the table of contents altogether to make for a cleaner more predictably formatted set of tables Include Legend at the Top of the Report This check box on the Layout TT amp D Report page of the Preferences dialog determines whether the pages of the Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs include the legend at the top of the report defining the column header symbols 188 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 If you generally copy and paste the report into Excel for further analysis you may prefer to uncheck this box and omit the legend altogether to make for a cleaner more predictably formatted set of tables Report Columns Use this check list to choose which items to include as columns in the Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs Using the icons along the side of this check list you may also create new columns with user defined formulas page 84 save them to a file or import them from a file Prin
287. og Start Date Type Period Runt Travel distance 7 23 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 446 4434M Thu Before Other 1 810 feet 7 24 SB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 453324M Thu Before Other 1 796 feet 25 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 9 4 59 484M Thu Before Other 1 795 feet 26 SB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 5 05 134M Thu Before Other 1 785 feet 1 1 27 NB US 401 Plan 1 2 8 14 2008 5 11 03 AM Before 786 feet 28 SB US 401 Plan 2 3 8 14 2008 5 16 19 AM 29 SB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 12 40 38 PM Wed After Other 30 NB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 12 45 18 PM Wed After Other 31 SB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 1 30 34PM Wed After Other 7 32 NB US 401 Plan 3 2 3 11 2008 1 36 00PM Wed After Other 39 CD lic 4 1 Ol 27 3419 NNNNA 9 99 10 Dhd Th Afr Mba Average hd Cancel 2 Help 4 Check an S Uncheck an travel distance of 5 selected trip logs 805 feet Check uncheck the box to include exclude the run from the calculation Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple runs and narrow Choose type of statistic to the scope of subsequent summarize the selected runs operations e g Check average minimum All maximum or nth percentile Tru Traffic automatically resets the Horizontal Scale provided it is unlocked and the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin each time you change the Distance between t
288. ogether select one intersection in this list and drag it to the one to which you wish to link it The panel on the right side lists all intersection links in the diagram data file A thick red line indicates everything is linked a thin green line indicates only the offset is linked Arterial Outline Exa NB Central Pearl 4M EB WB Ross AM IntersKction Links E baie ut NB SB Lamar AM Everythindy NB SB Griffin AM os Intersection Arterial Diagram Commerce AM oung 157 of NB SB Griffin amp M amp 4 EB Young AM U 57 Griffin 57 of EB Young AM 80 Houston 62 Market 62 of Commerce AM f 81 Record U 62 Commerce 62 of NB Market 4M xo 82 Market 7 73 St Paul 873 of Commerce AM i 38 Lamar U 73 Commerce 73 of SB St Paul AM w 3 Griffin 81 Record 81 of EB Young AM 4p NB Market AM L 82 Market 82 of EB Young AM ELM 792 Market 1182 of EB Young AM EB WB Main AM U 22 Young 882 of NB Market AM 100 Main 100 of SB St Paul AM E H U 100 St Paul 100 of EB WB Main AM jJ 7112 Main 112 of NB Market AM F z U 112 Market 112 of EBAVB Main AM d You may show the Outline View by clicking on the in the Tool Bar or by selecting the Outline View command under the View Menu 35 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination You may rearrange the order of arterial diagrams using drag amp drop or the Move Up Down buttons The l
289. ol the GPS Receiver with the e GPS Receiver View In order to track your current location with the GPS receiver measure the geographic coordinates of an intersection or record Trip Logs to prepare Travel Time and Delay Reports you must start tracking with the GPS receiver To do this 1 Connect the GPS receiver to your computer with a serial port cable 2 Ensure that Tru Traffic knows the type of GPS receiver and serial port connection using the parameters on the Setup page of the e GPS Receiver View 48 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 tart GPS Tracki i 3 Click the O Stt GPS Tracking button on the M GPS Receiver View or right click on the view and choose the Start GPS Tracking command from the pop up menu or click the on the Tool Bar or say Start GPS if voice command recognition is enabled If these steps are all performed properly the status on the Position page will soon change from Not Connected to Tracking This may take anywhere from a few seconds to a few minutes depending on what type of GPS receiver you have how far you are from where you last used the GPS receiver and how long it has been since you last used it Once tracking is started you may e Take measurements of the Geographic Coordinates of intersections e Synchronize the network s signal clocks with the GPS satellites Monitor your current position and speed in Diagram Windows or the Network View e Play specific sounds to indicate
290. olumns e At your option p 108 in the Arterial Diagram Parameters you may view the bands on the E be Time Location diagram or you may show platoons flows on the LE amp J Platoon Progression diagram for either the design speed or the posted speed limit The same option determines which 8A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 135 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination speed is used to optionally display the travel times page 183 for each link below the intersection names p e You may view the green bands on the Time Space diagram for the posted speed limit or any of the speed and band categories including the design speed bus speed light rail speed or Te bicycle speed Note that the ic Time Location diagram is an exception as its display necessarily assumes just one speed Otherwise the posted speed limit is unused Upon reading diagram data files from previous versions Tru Traffic estimates the posted speed limit by rounding the Design Speed to a nearby multiple of 5 speed units with a small preference for rounding upward Bus Speed For this discussion we refer to Bus Speed as one of a number of speed and band categories that you may view on the ti
291. om the Preferences Layout TT amp D Report page to create or edit user defined columns for the Travel Time amp Delay Report The parameters for a user defined column are Description Up to 255 characters giving a detailed description of the definition of this column The description will appear along with the formula in the report legend after the column symbol Column Symbol Up to 15 characters giving a short symbol or label identifying this column The symbol may be used in the formulas of subsequently added user defined columns For this reason the symbol must be unique and it cannot be the name of any function that can be used in defining expressions The symbol will appear in the report legend followed by the description and the formula Number of Decimal Places The number of digits of precision after the decimal place with which this column will be shown in the report Accumulation Type The cumulative summary on the first tabbed page of the Travel Time amp Delay Report shows only columns that are accumulations columns with values that increase as the trip logs pass through each node in the artery Use this drop down list to declare whether this column should appear in the cumulative summary If your formula involves only addition and subtraction of columns which are either themselves fundamental quantities or are defined in terms of additions and subtractions of fundamental quantities 84 User s Manual rev 20
292. on from a list of all trip log runs that satisfy this criterion You should select only those runs for which the vehicle was stopped at the signal and was the first in the queue The figure below illustrates some of the features of the list of trip log runs 152 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Click column header 7 buttons to sort or group Drag column dividers runs on that column to resize columns ry TN N lub Road 161 Road TE fow to tHe summary of these trips Start Time Day Type Period Run Start Up Lost Time 7 Trip 75EB 7 5 2012 5 15 364M Thu After AM 1 6 3 E Trip 100 7 5 2012 4 57 534M Fii After AM 1 0 Trip 105 7 5 2002 6 11 07 4M Fri After Mid 6 7 7 6 2012 10 31 18 AM Fri After Noon 3 0 Tip 145 7 6 2012 12 05 28PM Fm After PM 0 8 T pii 7 7 10 2002 4 16 32AM Tue After AM Tip 18125 7 10 2002 4 26 054M Tue After AM Start Up Lost Time of 3 selected trip logs 2 5 seconds v OK X X Cancel f Check all Uncheck Al Check uncheck the box to Use Shift or Ctrl to select include exclude the run from multiple runs and narrow the calculation the scope of subsequent Choose type of statistic to operations e g Check All summarize the selected runs average minimum maximum or nth percentile The start up lost time calculated from a trip log is equal to the time elapsed from the beginning of green for the through movement at the intersecti
293. on of the Earthmate One can download COM Port Emulation Drivers for the USB Earthmate GPS Receiver from the DeLorme web site that should allow it to operate with Tru Traffic but I haven t verified this yet If you don t have a USB port DeLorme also sells a serial interface cable but I suspect that any serial to USB adaptor will work just as well See the discussion under GPS Setup Page for more information 240 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Arterial Analysis Package Tru Traffic provides you a means of cooperating with the Arterial Analysis Package AAP You can open and save AAP files directly in Tru Traffic This lets you look at and modify AAP data directly from within Tru Traffic and it gives you an easy way to transfer Tru Traffic diagram data to the AAP For a discussion on opening and saving files including AAP files see page 214 241 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Affecting amp Affected Parameters hanging this Will change this To this default value orizontal Scale Distance to first intersection from Such that the first intersection is just next to the left margin left margin ycle Length Vertical Scale if it isn t locked Such that exactly the desired number of Cycle Lengths are displayed on the diagram Width of the green band s if it The Split of the corresponding movement s isn t locked through or cross traffic turn minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and
294. on or say Synchronize Now if voice command recognition is enabled when you see the phase transition occur The moment you click the button the Synchronized Time is displayed in the controls at the top of the page You may also use these controls to fine tune the time This can be useful if you clicked the button a second or two too early or late or if the signals clocks have drifted since you last synchronized them The Synchronized Time is the satellites time adjusted for your local time zone based on extremely accurate atomic clocks so it is not dependent on your computer system s time If any of the intersections in any of diagrams is operating at double triple or 3 2 cycle length you should synchronize the clocks using a phase of one of those intersections The sal eel EUM button has a different behavior depending on whether you re tracking with the GPS receiver When tracking with the GPS receiver clicking the button will synchronize with the GPS satellite clocks otherwise it will synchronize with the computer system clock As it is usually much preferable to synchronize with the GPS satellite clocks which is accurate if possible over the computer system clock which may not be accurate a yellow warning message is displayed if applicable recommending that you connect with the GPS receiver and wait until it starts tracking before you click the button The yellow warning message disappears once the GPS starts tracking
295. on the Network View The iz Trip Log Speed button displays the average link speeds of the travel time runs passing through this link allowing you choose a link color based on the average link speeds of selected Runs and the speed color bins set in the Google KML page page 194 of the Preferences dialog To set the link colors along the entire artery at once first generate a Trip Log Plot with the desired Trip Logs then right click on the plot and choose Set Arterial Link Color to use one of the average link speed summaries for color coding the links Phase amp Movement Parameters These are parameters which affect only the signal phase associated with a particular movement for the currently selected M timing plan They are displayed in the Phase amp Movement Parameters dialog box where you can examine and change them at will Yv The CA timing plan dependent parameters in Tru Traffic appear in blue while the timing plan independent parameters appear in black To view the Phase amp Movement Parameters for a given movement of the selected intersection use one of the phase buttons e g eu on the Timings page of the Intersection Parameters dialog These buttons may be either flat or protruding depending on your preference in the Desktop page of the Preferences dialog If they re flat they protrude only when the mouse cursor is over them Changing the values of certain parameters alters the values of other paramet
296. on to the point a straight line drawn through the downstream constant speed section of the trip log run crosses the center of the intersection See illustration This is an accurate calculation of the true Start Up Lost Time only if the vehicle was stopped at the signal and was the first in the queue 153 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Merle Hay Road Trip Log Upstream extension of constant speed section of Trip Log Start Up Lost Time Constant speed section of Trip Lag 56 0 sec 13 4 sec Jordan Motars Johnston Dr Green Extension Time The Green Extension Time for the signal phase associated with a particular movement is used on Platoon Progression diagrams for calculating the flow and on Time Space and Time Location diagrams for calculating the default Widths of any green bands associated with the movement 154 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The Green Extension Time is the time in seconds during the Yellow All Red Clearance interval when the intersection continues to be effectively used by a movement The difference between the Yellow All Red Clearance Time and the Green Extension Time is the Clearance Lost Time The TRANSYT 7F manual defines the Clearance Lost Time as the time from when the last vehicle crosses the stopline until the start of red but this definition is not really correct For a lucid explanation of this and guidelines on how to measure it see R
297. onds Offset 8 default sec x gt e Locked Reference Point Start of second through movement 62 Y References Cross Street Movement it is safe to do so only if you re not driving the vehicle at the same time as you re operating the portable computer Using voice command recognition here improves safety and saves time Close the Intersection Parameters and open the Network View Right click anywhere on the Network View and choose Layout Grid with Geographic Coordinates from the pop up menu 21 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 13 14 15 16 17 At this point you may see a marker in both the Network View and on the top most diagram window indicating your current position along the artery however the time offset of this marker in the diagram will not be accurate until after you perform the next step Ps view Sloe Synchronize the traffic signals clocks with that of Pesiion satetites Clocks Tip Logs Options Setup Diagnostics 7 already ki the Signal Cycl 9 16 12 AM the GPS satellites using the controls on the Clocks 5 299 moa ia S17284M 9 18 44 AM Thursday January 05 2011 8 20 00 AM X page First specify the signal with the phase you ll be observing by choosing from the drop b don t yet know the Signal Cycle Start Time down lists the Artery and Intersection of the To roe terial eh a ind
298. one linked to a crossing artery if there is one or the first intersection in the diagram You may also opt to optimize the Protected Turning Phase Sequences In this case the turning phase sequences are set to roughly coincide with the interaction of the progression lines from the two directions of travel You may limit the phase sequence choices selectively by either Locking or Restricting the turning phase sequence on any given approach Locking a phase sequence prevents the automatic optimizer from making any change to the phase sequence on that approach while Restricting the phase sequences on this and the opposite approach allows Lead Lag to replace Lag Lead but not Lead Lead or Lag Lag and it similarly allows Lead Lead to replace Lag Lag but not Lead Lag or Lag Lead The optimization may also include a search for the optimal cycle length within a specified range and at selected intervals e g 5s In this case Tru Traffic will perform the band width maximization optimizing offsets and optionally turning phase sequences for every cycle length within the range using specified time increments It will then choose the cycle length that gives the widest green band in terms of fraction of the cycle length In the Phase and Movement Parameters dialog you may determine whether and how splits for individual movements are scaled when the cycle length changes splits may be either Freely Scaled Fixed Seconds Fixed Percentage See p 149 f
299. or any damage or injury that may occur as a result of your operating a computer while driving a vehicle 49 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination GPS Clocks Page The Clocks page of the 9 GPS Receiver View allows you to synchronize the traffic signal clocks for the currently selected Ci M ning plan with the GPS satellite clocks or if necessary with the computer system clock The synchronization effectively specifies the signal cycle start time or the master zero the point in the cycle that all intersections use as a reference for their offsets You may enter this time directly or you may perform the synchronization procedure in the field to infer the time See How Trip Logs are Processed page 196 for some definitions and comments on how this is used i Synchronize N To synchronize the clocks you must click the button at the moment you observe a given phase transition at a given signal First specify which phase transition you ll be observing by choosing from the drop down lists the Artery and Intersection of the signal you re watching Then indicate phase transition start of Green Flashing Don t Walk Yellow or Red and the phase and direction of travel at the signal This should be a phase and transition whose occurrence is not sensitive to whether a movement gaps out Typically this is the yield point of the synchronized phase Once these Synchronize Now are specified click the i butt
300. or details Scoring The Scoring page allows you to specify various weighting factors and coefficients used internally 163 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination to calculate the optimal offset and to compare the performance of various combinations of phase sequences and cycle lengths To perform an asymmetric optimization preferring one direction of travel over the other set the Directional Weighting Factors in percent with your preferred weighting The default 50 50 implies a symmetric optimization As Tru Traffic enforces a rule that the two weighting factors must sum to 100 you may enter just one of the weighting factors and allow the other to be automatically calculated A button next to the Directional Weighting Factors allows you to set them according to the per lane volume ratios at selected intersections The directional weighting factors say 50 50 do not necessarily ensure that same ratio in the directional bandwidths and indeed for a given set of splits and phase sequences directional bandwidths in that ratio may not even be possible An extreme and contrived case illustrates the point Consider an artery with just two signals each of which operates with 100s cycle length with phasing and splits as follows e 90s protected turning phase for the turns off the NB artery e 5s for the SB arterial through e 95s for the NB arterial through and e 5s for the cross street In this case it is not p
301. ort Relatively inexpensive under 200 with the data cable and mapping software included If you have a GPS receiver that is not supported by Tru Traffic please let me know and I will be happy to add it 1f possible You must specify which serial port usually COM1 or COM2 your GPS receiver is connected to If you don t have a serial port you may connect the GPS to the USB port with a serial to USB adapter Versions 6 0 and above of Tru Traffic is able to connect to the GPS through such an adapter but ver 5 0 had trouble with most adapters The NMEA compliant GPS receivers may support a number of different serial port connection speeds and settings For this reason Tru Traffic lets you specify other parameters associated with the connection The default settings have been found to work with all tested GPS receivers so you ll probably only need to change them if you wish to use a different serial port speed or if you have a receiver unlike any those that have been tested The Diagnostics page can help you troubleshoot the connection with the GPS receiver as it will show you the raw data that s arriving over the serial port GPS Diagnostics Page The Diagnostics page of the e GPS Receiver View allows you to view the raw data arriving over the serial port to which Tru Traffic is listening This can be useful in diagnosing problems with the connection to the GPS receiver If your GPS receiver is connected to the serial port and setup
302. osmetics When calculating fuel consumption and emissions using a modal FC amp E model such as CMEM or MICRO2 this noise is treated as spurious accelerations and braking artificially increasing the calculated fuel consumption and emissions When viewing the graph your eye can easily look past the noise and find a central trend line through the speed measurements But the modal FC amp E models assume that the given speed is measured accurately so they include the fuel consumption resulting from such erratic driving 53 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 40 Recorded by GPS 35 Downloaded to Tru Traffic _ Recorded by Tru Traffic 30 25 lt Q E 29 CO D Q 15 N 10 5 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Time sec Figure 4 A single Trip Log recorded twice on the same GPS receiver illustrates the noise introduced in the speed calculation for pre recorded downloaded trip logs Some Garmin GPS receivers offer a variety of ways to record a trip log taking readings at a fixed rate which you specify whenever a fixed distance is traveled again you specify the distance or whenever it thinks necessary according to its own internal rules I haven t tried all the options but for consistency with the trip logs recorded live I ve set mine to take readings at a fixed rate every 1 or 2 seconds The following figure illustrates some of the featur
303. ossible to set offsets such that the directional bandwidths are equal For most offset combinations disregarding the loss times the SB direction will have a bandwidth of just 5s while the NB bandwidth will be close to 95s This lopsidedness only increases when we take into account the loss times To find the offsets maximizing the bandwidth the software starts at what it identifies as the most constricting intersection and for each direction of travel it conceptually draws a central travel line through the center of the effective green and extending upstream and downstream with slopes determined by the respective upstream and downstream design speeds This travel line is extended to links further upstream and downstream using the respective design speeds of those links until it reaches the ends of the artery or the ends of an arterial section selected for optimization The point in the cycle where this line crosses each node determines the ideal offset at that signal for travel in the given direction it s the offset such that the local effective green time straddles the travel line In general of course the ideal offsets for the two directions of travel differ so the software must compromise and for a 50 50 directional weighting it chooses the midpoint between these two ideal offsets For a 75 25 directional weighting it chooses an offset that s three times closer to the ideal offset of the preferred direction than to the ideal
304. ou need to do interact with the computer For collecting trip logs this often presents minimal inconvenience but when collecting the geographic coordinates of the intersections this can take considerably more time Using voice command recognition gives you a fairly safe way to perform the most likely operations with Tru Traffic while driving a vehicle without touching or looking at the computer See the topic Voice Command Recognition for more information and a list of recognized commands See the section Tips on 67 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Using the Speech Recognition Engine page 73 for additional tips on using the speech recognition engine with Tru Traffic Audibly acknowledge recognized commands When using voice command recognition you may have Tru Traffic play an audible sound to acknowledge when a command has been recognized The moment the sound begins playing is the moment the command is processed Knowing this can help you learn the anticipation time required for time sensitive commands This time can vary depending on the speed of your computer the level of noise and how well your speech recognition engine has been trained Warning It is not safe to operate a computer including laptop and notebook computers while operating a vehicle If you wish to view or change the GPS options while moving in a vehicle have someone else drive the vehicle while you operate the computer You take full res
305. ous ways of managing the diagram data files new open merge save extract print etc New Diagram Use the ja button on the Tool Bar or the New command under the File Menu to clear the diagram data file from memory and start with a new diagram This is necessary before you can enter the parameters of a new diagram with a different number of intersection from the one currently open It is not necessary to clear the current diagram from memory before opening a new diagram data file the new one will automatically replace the current one Before clearing the diagram data from memory Tru Traffic detects whether it has been modified since the last time it was saved If so Tru Traffic offers to save the diagram before clearing it Open Diagram Data File Use the u button on the Tool Bar or the Open command under the File Menu to open a diagram data file or a UTDF 2006 combined file Click the right part of the this button to open a recently used arterial timings diagram file The Clear MRU List command at the bottom of this submenu clears the list of most recently used files Diagram Files The native and default file type This file type is upwardly Dgm compatible with future versions of Tru Traffic UTDF 2006 The Universal Traffic Data Format combined file introduced CSV with Synchro version 7 0 Helpful in sharing traffic signal information with other programs supporting the UTDF such as Synchro and traffic signal control s
306. outes or click the Automatically Trace Routes button d Click the Create Arterial Diagrams button 3 Select Intersection 1 then click Edit button a On Name etc Tab give the intersection a name and set offset b On Timing Tab assign correct phasing and timing values minimum split FDW yellow etc for each phase C On Green Bands Tab select desired Action for TS amp TL diagrams only and Speed Design Speed should not exceed posted speed limit d OPTIONAL On Lanes Tab select correct lane assignments e OPTIONAL for PP diagram only On Volumes Tab assign Volumes and Saturation Flows f Click OK 13 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 4 Repeat step 3 for each remaining intersection Tip Use Next button instead of OK to save a few clicks 5 Collect all intersection Coordinates required only if you used Method A above 1 a Use Google Earth 6 Record one trip log round trip to calculate the actual travel distance between intersections and to double check the Design Speed a When getting the speed from trip logs set the distance first before setting the speed b OPTIONAL Synchronize the signal controller clocks with the GPS satellite clock 7 Now you are ready to create timing plans record Before After trip logs and create Travel Time and Delay reports You can also view the plots of Time vs Distance and Speed vs Distance See the tutorials herein e g Creating a N
307. over signal Ctrl Down Left drag Lower the Offset a large amount over signal Ctri L Change the Adjusted Cycle Length Ctrl P Change the protected Turn Phase Sequence Ctrl F Change the forward or right bound Green Band Action Ctrl R Change the reverse or left bound Green Band Action Left drag Zoom in the horizontal scale of the arterial diagram to view the starting and selected signal s This creates a multi page diagram ending between signals Left drag in Zoom out the horizontal scale of the arterial diagram to view the reverse from entire artery This creates a single page diagram right to left Page Up Jump to the previous page of a multi page arterial diagram Page Down Jump to the next page of a multi page arterial diagram 31 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Key Mouse Action Left Click Left Click on Cycle Length upper left corner to open Network Parameters Left Click on Diagram Title top center to open Arterial Diagram Parameters Left Click on Intersection Name to open Intersection Parameters Right Click Use pop up menu to select the Type of Diagram Time Space Platoon Progression or Time Location or any of the above mentioned options as well as other options On Time Space or Time Location diagrams changing the Offsets protected Turn Phase Sequences or Adjusted Cycle Lengths can cause Tru Traffic to reset parameters of
308. ow Control Use DTR Tum DTR On J Use RTS Software Flow Control Require DSR None X 4 Require CTS 3 GB Star GPs Tracking 2 Help GPS View Lo ees Position Satellites Clocks Trip Logs Options Setup Diagnostics Status Tracking Latitude N 36 37 4587 Longitude W 121 55 3094 Height 70 feet Speed 0 22 miles hour m 7 8 9 10 11 12 This may take anywhere from a few seconds to a few minutes depending on what type of GPS receiver you have how far you are from where you last used the GPS receiver and how long it has been since you last used it While you re waiting for the GPS receiver to start tracking you may monitor the progress on the Satellite page which shows the current status of the signals from the GPS satellites currently visible in the sky and their current position Once the GPS receiver begins tracking Tru Traffic will check your computer systems clock and offer to update it if necessary This offer is merely a courtesy to you Nothing involved in tracking trips and preparing travel time and delay reports requires that your computer system have an accurate clock While there are easier ways to collect geographic User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 r Q GPs view Position Satellites Clocks Trip Logs Options Setup Diagnostics No Stat 25 NET 29 NET 12 NET 21 NET 5 NET 2 NET 10 NET 30 NET
309. owest speed color By default Tru Traffic uses this color for all speeds less than the upper speed threshold for a Stop in Travel Time amp Delay Report set on the Layout TT amp D Report page But you can change that threshold to a user specified speed or remove the overriding low speed rule altogether so icons are colored strictly by their associated speed bin defined in the table above Icon Scale i e relative size The size essentially in pixels of the speed or stop icons may be specified using this box In Google KML parlance the icon size is specified as the scale or the fraction of the default icon size whatever that may be Thus scale 1 is the full size of the default icon scale 0 5 is half the size and scale 2 is twice the size Include the Name of each Trip Log Point At your option the KML file may include or omit a name for each Trip Log Point Including the names can help distinguish trip logs in Google Earth when displaying more than one while omitting the names reduces clutter when viewing long trip logs in Google Earth See the chapter on Using Google Earth with Tru Traffic p 201 for step by step details 195 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination How Trip Logs are Processed Here are some general comments and definitions on how various items are determined from trip logs in generating for example Travel Time amp Delay Reports Overview Within Tru Traffic it s
310. partial bands which make it part way perhaps most of the way through the artery but not all the way These partial bands may not be served well by a timing plan that doesn t take them into account In this case it might help to optimize the artery in sections You may specify section by either declaring a maximum number of signals or by clicking the radio button Optimize in Selected Sections and using the check box list to indicate which sets of links constitute sections The check box list shows all links along the artery labeled by pairs of intersections A contiguous set of check marks defines a section Uncheck boxes to mark section boundaries The optimization process treats each section in turn optimizing the bands in that section while ignoring the rest of the artery When the box Optimize Artery in Sections of fixed size is checked the optimization process first treats the section of the artery with the most constricting signal the one with the least arterial green time and fewest phase sequence options and the specified number of neighboring signals straddling that signal and centered as much as possible on that signal It optimizes the bands in this section while ignoring the rest ofthe artery Then it works on surrounding sections of the artery each with one intersection overlapping the neighboring section It optimizes these in similar fashion with the constraint that offset at the intersection overlapping the neighboring sec
311. patible with Tru Traffic 9 0 are Tru Traffic 9 0 files backward compatible with Tru Traffic TS PP 8 0 and are Tru Traffic TS PP 8 0 files backward compatible with TS PP Draft 7 0 ves While the v7 v8 v9 and v10 files all differ somewhat in reading the file versions 7 0 8 0 and 9 0 just ignore anything that they don t understand Similarly ver 10 0 will ignore anything that it doesn t understand from future versions As a result if you open a v10 file using ver 7 0 you ll see all the v7 related parameters and probably won t even be aware that there were some v10 v9 and v8 specific parameters that are being ignored Going the other direction when you resave the v10 file from ver 7 0 and reopen it with ver 10 0 you may notice some differences as resaving from ver 7 0 will strip out any v10 v9 and v8 specific parameters you d set effectively reverting those to default The things that would get stripped include e Added in version 10 0 o green bands from multiple speed or green band categories e g buses light rail bicyles etc o the layering order for the bands in the various speed or green band categories o Timing Plan transition mode e g Dwell Add Subtract or Shortway both network wide and per interaction o optimization modal weighting factors and scoring adjustment coefficients o the new offset reference points Start of first protected turn movement or Start of second protected turn movement o th
312. perational options while tracking with the GPS receiver The GPS Options are stored in your personal preferences not in the Diagram Data file Mark Current GPS Position as This drop down list gives you a choice of the type of marker that displays the current position and time of the GPS receiver on the arterial timings diagram Size pixels For some of the types of GPS position markers you may specify the size in this box Mark now at all positions with a horizontal line This check box gives the option to draw a horizontal line on the diagram at the current time in the cycle to mark all positions The horizontal line can be useful in verifying that the traffic signal and GPS satellite clocks are synchronized You may specify the thickness in screen pixels color and style solid dashed dotted etc of the line Mark here at all times with a vertical line This check box gives the option to draw a vertical line on the diagram at the current position to mark all times The vertical line with the horizontal line forms cross hairs to quickly pinpoint the current time and position You may specify the thickness in screen pixels color and style solid dashed dotted etc of the line Show the current cycle time This check box gives the option to display the current time within the signal cycle in a moving box floating near the GPS position marker For this to be accurate you must have the traffic signal and GPS satelli
313. ponsibility and accept all liability for any damage or injury that may occur as a result of your operating a computer while driving a vehicle Automatically save file while recording trip logs after every GPS readings Use this option when recording a trip log to have Tru Traffic automatically save you file periodically after a specified number of GPS reports are received The GPS Options are stored in your personal preferences not in the Diagram Data file GPS Setup Page The Setup page of the L GPS Receiver View is where you specify the type of GPS receiver and its connection to your computer There are three types of GPS receivers supported e NMEA 0183 Standard Compatible e DeLorme Earthmate Garmin Proprietary The vast majority of GPS receivers comply with the NMEA National Marine Electronics Association www nmea org 0183 Standard Tru Traffic has been tested with GPS receivers from Magellan www magellan com au Garmin www garmin com and Pharos www pharosgps com and they all work fine The Earthmate from DeLorme www delorme com does not comply with the NMEA 0183 Standard but it is supported separately by Tru Traffic The newer USB interface Earthmate should work with Tru Traffic but you may need to download the COM Port Emulation Drivers for the USB Earthmate GPS Receiver from the DeLorme web site 68 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The table below lists some of the advantages and disadvantages of th
314. programs See page 210 for details Merge Diagram Data File Use the Merge command under the File menu to merge a diagram data file on the disk into the currently open diagram file You may merge any of the file types listed in Table 10 The Merge command is especially useful when you have more than one intersecting arteries each represented by a diagram in a different file After loading the first and merging the rest with it you may establish links between the common intersections see page 159 Save Diagram Data File Use the button on the Tool Bar or the Save command under the File Menu to save the diagram currently open If the diagram file does not yet have a name Tru Traffic asks you to enter in the name of the file where you want it stored By default it will save it as a Diagram File but you may choose from any of the file types listed in the table below The Universal Traffic Data Format combined file introduced with Synchro version 7 0 Helpful in sharing traffic signal information with other programs supporting the UTDF such as Synchro and traffic signal control systems from Naztec Gardner Eagle and Peek Diagram Files The native and default file type This file type is upwardly compatible with future versions of Tru Traffic TSPPD 6 0 Diagram Files The native file type of version 6 0 of Tru Traffic This file type is downwardly compatible with the earlier version of Tru Traffic but some of the information tim
315. pstream intersection by the average travel time The Offset may be edited in the Intersection Parameters dialog or directly on the Diagram Window by selecting an intersection and dragging the signal to a new Offset or by using the up and down cursor keys optionally while pressing the Ctrl or Alt keys to increase or decrease the Offset The latter method is usually the simplest for finding Offsets leading to the widest green bands Since the Offset is measured in percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length changing the adjusted the Cycle Length doubling or halving the Cycle Length will change the number of seconds corresponding to the Offset but the percent will remain unchanged You may link the Offsets of neighboring intersections so that any changes you make to the Offset of one intersection affect the Offsets of the linked intersections In order to change the Offset of an 125 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination intersection relative to its linked intersections you must temporarily break the link to that intersection On Time Space and Time Location diagrams only If you have started a new green band at the intersection changing the Offset causes Tru Traffic to reset the New Green Band Offset if it isn t locked that begins at that intersection to the beginning of the green time plus the Start Up Lost Time for the through or left or right turn movement in the appropriate direction of travel Offset Reference
316. r delete an intersection in each diagram to show the distinction The intersections in the middle of each diagram aren t linked to anything because they re exclusive to that diagram s leg If you re content to see just one direction s band in each diagram then at the east most intersection of the the Mostly Eastbound Artery set the Green Band Action in the westbound direction to Stop When prompted let this change apply to all intersections downstream i1 e all intersections Similarly at the west most intersection of the the Mostly Westbound Artery set the Green Band Action in the eastbound direction to Stop and apply this setting to all intersections Otherwise if you prefer to see both directions bands in at least part of both diagrams then in the Mostly Eastbound Artery at the East Splitting Intersection set the Green Band Action in the westbound direction to Stop Similarly In the Mostly Westbound Artery at the West Splitting Intersection set the Green Band Action in the eastbound direction to Stop The Green Band Action at each intersection downstream from the splitting intersections should be set to either Continue Stop Taper or Clip You probably don t want to set it to Start Taper Start or Clip Start because these will cause a new green band to start downstream that doesn t take the upstream or arriving band into account The biggest annoyances with this method are that o At the exclusive sig
317. r nee ra PUES DIN DI AE DU PMI DD UU Iu abre pK IeUR 182 Default Headei Footer Eo c esee pk ri exu beS DH Hu x Ra OK UK ei aaRS A KH re a ieaS Kur RUE 182 EVI ADULT NEST 183 Show Date and Time CRT TET OPNS 183 Show Intersection Names on EDT A PEE EE E E RC 183 Show Distances between Intersection sssseeeseseeseeseeessrreesseretsssretesestesesssrrerrerereeeressssss 183 Show Distances on o S 183 Show Travel Times between Doferge UR sascia GQu pa Ete pU x EE Eiai 183 Show Travel Times on LETTO E E EE E E RUN UN 184 Show the Actual Cycle Lengths of Signals cssisascccssessecanseaneesnandencosuasscsntenatspentensessnncsie 184 Show Signal Cycle Lengths on Enc er C M URN 184 Use Standard Rt LS NELSON a AEREA EE Ea a ANTO eai 184 Layout Trip Log Ploi crinrscansie i a a a r at 185 Show Today s Date and Time in Plot Title sioe precatio d RR EUR dur Pr raRE YR RAN 185 Show List of Trip Logs in Plot Diliges o eee er e ento Iren n Qux I n SPORT ER SVET FR AVE 185 But don t show the Trip Loss if there are more DAL ccsccsissscsssosiscedsaveressatooseavesescantanso ne 185 Show Date and or Time m each Trig Log Title Label eere errores 185 Show List of Trip Logs Runs in Plot Legend uiis emittere ruri re Rate base RR o Rex TUE 185 But don t show the Trip Log Runs if there aie more than eoo e eterni 186 Show Date and or Time in each Trip Log Run Legend Label 5 2 t 186 Always Show Run Numb
318. r of points Incorrect The red circle straddles the neighboring intersection You probably have a point from the neighboring intersection incorrectly assigned to this intersection pulling it south of its true position Move the point to the correct intersection Incorrect The red circle is off the artery The geographic points probably apply to the intersection of an adjacent artery Incorrect The intersection has no red circle You probably either collected no geographic positions or you assigned the ones you collected to the wrong intersection Collect a pair of points straddling the center of the intersection and bounding the intersection Or use Google Earth to add the pair of points Correct The point lies between the travel time runs and the red circle straddles the runs 232 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Incorrect The trip log doesn t pass the center of the red circle You probably either started recording the trip log too late or you stopped recording it too early tH mS Sometimes the only good solution is to re record the trip log Remember to start recording well be entering the first intersection and continue recording well after passing through the last Incorrect GPS noise in the trip log leads to an incorrect calculation of the travel distance In this case it also causes the trip log to pass through the red circle twice While the analysis tr
319. r reported this problem even though he already had a printer installed It turned out that when he selected a different printer as the default everything worked just fine We re not sure what was wrong with the original default printer Also when he installed a Postscript printer to a file and selected that as the default everything worked fine 238 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Notes on Compatibility Speech Recognition Engine Tru Traffic uses SAPI 5 Speech Application Programming Interface version 5 to interact with the speech recognition engine Various incarnations of MS Office XP include Speech Tools by default which has an SAPI 5 compatible speech recognition engine Speech Tools is accessible from the Control Panel See the operating system s online help for more details on installing and using the Speech Tools If you don t already have one the Tru Traffic installation CD also includes Microsoft s free SAPI 5 speech recognition engine This engine is a bit too large to include in the downloadable version of Tru Traffic but if you ask me I ll email it to you Mapping Software You can import and in some cases export the geographic coordinates of the intersection into mapping software The coordinates appear on the map as push pins or bubble labels For exporting coordinates you create the pushpins in the mapping software and label them Be sure to include the intersection ID Number near the beginning of the label Although
320. r the through movement or the cross traffic turning movement automatically changes the Split of the other movement as well Where there are no protected turning movements on the side street the through Splits along the side street are automatically determined by the difference between the Adjusted Cycle Length and the sum of the Splits of the through and turning movements on the artery You have the option of having Tru Traffic display the Splits associated with each phase directly on the Diagram Window See the Layout page of the Preferences dialog for more details page 176 Since the Splits are measured in percent of the Adjusted Cycle Length changing the Adjusted Cycle Length doubling or halving the Cycle Length will alter the number of seconds corresponding to each non fixed Split but the percents will remain unchanged If the arterial Design Speed for one of the directions of travel has been set to zero Tru Traffic assumes a one way street and does not display the Split for the nonexistent through movement On Time Space and Time Location diagrams only If you have started a new green band at the intersection then changing the Splits causes Tru Traffic to automatically reset the Offset and Width of the new green band s to their default values 131 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Speed or Green Band Categories The Speeds or Green Bands page in the Intersection Parameters allows you select among
321. r will appear called lt diagram data file name gt kml that has the Trip Log in it When you double click on that Trip Log the map view will zoom in on the trip log You may use controls in Google Earth to specify how wide of a time slice to view If you set wide 203 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination enough you ll see the entire trip log on the map If you set it to a briefer time interval then you may play the trip log in Google Earth as an animation As the animation progresses you ll see just the active points snaking along the arterial Use the settings on the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog to specify the color and size of the icons showing the Trip Log points page 194 Transfer Trip Log Stops from Tru Traffic to Google Earth l Google KML File In Tru Traffic right click on a Trip Log and choose Export Export Stops Change the file type to either Google KML or GPS Exchange Format GPX You probably want to prefer Google KML as that will also assign icon colors to each trip log stop based on its duration For transferring to most other programs other than Google Earth you usually want to use GPS Exchange Format GPX ver 1 0 as that includes a specification for transferring speed and heading whereas Google KML does not have speed or heading in its specification except by extension In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then import using File Open 2
322. raffic appear in blue while the timing plan independent parameters appear in black Some Arterial Diagram parameters are ignored by Tru Traffic depending on the Type of Diagram Tru Traffic disables these parameters i e shows them in grey or in some cases doesn t show them at all Changing the values of certain parameters alters the values of other parameters For example if you change the diagram Height or the Cycle Length Tru Traffic automatically changes the Vertical Scale so as to show the desired number cycles on the diagram As a result you shouldn t set the value of those parameters which will be altered by your later editing other parameters To facilitate this Tru Traffic positions as much as possible the affected parameters somewhere below the affecting parameters so generally if you work from top to bottom then Tru Traffic won t change any of your work The parameters which are affected by changes in other parameters are described herein along with the other Arterial Diagram parameters and for convenient reference a table of these parameters is given in the section Affecting amp Affected Parameters page 242 99 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Type of Diagram Use this set of radio buttons to indicate whether the arterial timings diagram is a Time Space diagram with green bands showing the approximate location of the platoon Platoon Progression diagram showing the
323. rameters dialog to Locked You can also have Tru Traffic recalculate the default scale at any time by setting the desired number of cycles On Time Space diagrams changing the Cycle Length also causes Tru Traffic to reset the Width of the Green Bands if it isn t locked to the effective green time of the through traffic at the intersection where the green band originates that is the Split minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and All Red Clearance Times plus the Green Extension Time Finally changing the Cycle Length resets the Adjusted Cycle Lengths when measured in seconds of all of the intersections in all diagram windows The ratio of these Cycle Lengths as specified in the Intersection Parameters dialog is unaltered When you change the Cycle Length Tru Traffic offers to change all the Design Speeds along the arteries in all diagram windows in order to preserve the signal coordination This is especially useful when you already have a satisfactory coordination plan for a set of arteries at a certain time of day and wish to use essentially the same coordination a another time of day during which the Design Speeds are different If the Design Speeds are say 10 greater at the new time of day simply reduce the Cycle Length by 10 and Tru Traffic offers to adjust all Design Speeds accordingly while maintaining the coordination Label the f 0 Lines by Time of Day This check box and its associated drop down list label the t 0 lin
324. rect The red circle straddles the neighboring intersection You probably have a point from the neighboring intersection incorrectly assigned to this intersection pulling it south of its true position Move the point to the correct intersection Incorrect The red circle is off the artery The geographic points probably apply to the intersection of an adjacent artery Incorrect The intersection has no red circle You probably either collected no geographic positions or you assigned the ones you collected to the wrong intersection Collect a pair of points straddling the center of the intersection and bounding the intersection Or use Google Earth to add the pair of points Correct The point lies between the travel time runs and the red circle straddles the runs 199 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 200 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Using Google Earth with Tru Traffic There are a number of ways Google Earth helps with Tru Traffic 8 0 First let s review how to share information with Google Earth then we ll discuss what you can do by sharing the information Transfer Intersection Locations to Google Earth l Google KML File Use File Save As and change the file type to Google KML In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then import using File Open You may export either a GPS Exchange Format GPX or a KML file 2 Windows Clipboard Use Edi
325. riorate After you say Stop Listening the SRE is still listening and learning it s just that Tru Traffic is ignoring any recognized commands except for the Start Listening one For long intervals it s best to turn off the SRE altogether toggle the button or uncheck the box Use voice command recognition As long as the SRE is running and the mike is on you re dealing with HAL in 2001 A Space Odyssey lf the button is still down and the box is still checked when you get back to the office the SRE is still listening and learning whenever you run Tru Traffic even though you no longer have the GPS connected or anything If the performance deteriorates to the point of being too unreliable create a new Speech Recognition profile delete your old one and work through the speech training sessions all over again T Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Travel Time and Delay Report You may preview and print out a report of the travel time and delay for logged trips along an arterial timings diagram using the button on the Tool Bar or the TT amp D Report command in the View Menu See the tutorial on How to Perform a Travel Time and Delay Study page 20 for step by step instructions on how to prepare a travel time and delay report from scratch You may choose which Trip Logs to include in the report from a list of trip logs involving the selected arterial timings diagram The following figure illustrates som
326. rips is filled in to show the platoons and queues as shown in Figure 3 The dot density corresponds to the vehicle density Drawing the platoons and queues is slower than drawing the green bands and can take a long time depending on the complexity of the artery and your computer system On Time Location diagrams the green bands are drawn as dotted horizontal lines and the Horizontal Scale has no meaning other than to indicate the sequence of the intersections This is accomplished by artificially offsetting each ring in the signal timing strip by the travel time from the upstream intersection in the direction of travel corresponding to that ring This effectively removes the meaning of Space in the Time Space diagram and the diagram is then collapsed so the intersections are displayed with a small uniform spacing independent of the true distance between intersections For this type of diagram it s best to choose a Vertical Scale such that at least 4 cycles are visible in the diagram The lower half of the diagram shows the signal rings and bands corresponding to the forward bound traffic from left to right on the screen and the upper half shows the rings and bands corresponding to the reverse bound traffic At your option the various band Speeds either Design Speed p 133 or Posted Speed Limit p 135 but not both p 108 may be shown explicitly 27 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Note that in Figure
327. rk cycle Offset 0 line This is also known as the Master Zero A related parameter the Signal Cycle Start Time discussed elsewhere herein specifies a time of day that a network cycle begins 3 Timer Markers regular tic marks or grid lines as specified in the Preferences Layout dialog 4 Intersection names and their corresponding offsets on alternating lines to reduce crowding 5 Red signal for arterial through traffic both directions green signal for side street 6 Red signal for right bound arterial through green for left bound through and cross traffic turners 7 Green signal for arterial through traffic in both directions along artery 8 Red signal for left bound arterial through green for right bound through and cross traffic turners 9 Green signal for arterial cross traffic turners both directions red for through traffic The size and weight of the character font for the various text on the diagram may be set along with other parameters in the Arterial Diagram Parameters dialog A cross traffic turn is a e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 25 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 90sec Example Time Space or Platoon Progression Diagram Sat 1 17 2009 11 40 AM
328. rmat a title and or logo to appear at the top of all Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs A set of buttons next to the box simplifies specifying the HTML formatting To use the buttons it s easiest to first select the text you wish to format before clicking the button 186 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Stop Definition These boxes on the Layout TT amp D Report page of the Preferences dialog specify the speed thresholds defining a Stop for the Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs The definition of a Stop is included in the Legend at the top of the Travel Time and Delay Report Critical Speed Thresholds These boxes on the Layout TT amp D Report page of the Preferences dialog specify the thresholds for the critical speeds in the Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs The speed thresholds are included in the Legend at the top of the Travel Time and Delay Report The critical speeds are used in some models for fuel consumption Options Included in the TT amp D Report Summary These check boxes on the Layout TT amp D Report page of the Preferences dialog specify what items to show in the Summaries in the Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs The Summaries gives statistics from all trip log runs included in the report You may show Median values or other specified Percentile values e g 85th Percentile The Median or 50th Percentile is the value from the middle run the run which separates the
329. ronization of the network s traffic signal clocks with the satellite clocks You may also control the trip logs the records of trips taken through the network in this window To quickly show the Arterial Diagram parameters for the selected diagram you may use e the oe button on the Tool Bar or the GPS Receiver command under the View Menu The GPS Receiver parameters grouped in the following tabbed pages Position Showing the status of the GPS receiver and its current position and speed The status of the GPS receiver is Not Connected until you start tracking with the GPS receiver Satellites Showing the status of the signals from the GPS satellites and their current position in the sky The status of the GPS satellites is not available until you start tracking with the GPS receiver Clocks Allows you to synchronize the traffic signal clocks with the GPS satellite clocks Trip Logs Providing control over the recording of trip logs Options Providing operational options while tracking with the GPS receiver Setup Providing control over the type of GPS receiver and its connection to your computer In order to track your current location with the GPS receiver measure the geographic coordinates of an fay intersection or record Trip Logs for Travel Time and Delay Reports or Plots of Speed or Travel Time vs Distance and other purposes you must start tracking with the GPS receiver Tracking with the GPS Receiver You may contr
330. routes either manually or automatically then click the button Create Arterial Diagrams If all goes as expected then you should now have a network within Tru Traffic with an arterial diagram window for each route complete with arterial names cross street names intersection ID numbers distances set according to straight line paths between the nodes forward directions set everywhere and arterial diagrams linked at their common intersections 202 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 g onnect Dots to Crea teries Sic m Click a node on the Network View to start a new artery or route o e amp Ctrl Click nodes to extend the artery or route to those nodes When you ve finished tracing all the arteries dick Create Arteries N View ES r 251 gw Virginia Beach Blvd amp Azalea Garden Rd ULL 203 Virginia Beach Blvd amp VA Natural Gas Ent 101 79 307 3242 VA Beach Blvd amp Kingwood Ave Norfolk Sq 102 449 Virginia Beach Blvd amp Ingleside Rd Va Beach Blvd amp Scott St 103 91 210 eae ESL gis 4 Artery 2 E Virginia Beach Blvd amp Newtown Rd po ER When you ve connected dots Newtown Rd amp Ethan allen Ln 302 dow 5 Newtown Rd amp Stoney Point Rd 08 ais d 201 INESSE Lo uam z sio 56 23213959 the button to Create their Newtown Rd amp Greenwich Rd I 44 rino 454 362 13868 207 Kempsville Rd amp Newtown Rd corresponding Arteri
331. rsection Parameters dialog box by using the left mouse button to drag the clearance interval of a given phase to the right or left to increase or decrease the split of that phase This is especially convenient because as you do so Tru Traffic adjusts the other non fixed splits to ensure that the splits add up to the Adjusted Cycle Length and in doing so it ensures that these splits are at least as great as their Minimum Splits the sum of their Yellow All Red Clearance Times and their Flashing Don t Walk Yellow All Red Clearance Times Clicking the Set V C Splits action in the Timings Action List balances the splits so the effective green times are proportional to the critical V C volume capacity ratios subject to the Minimum Splits and Clearance Times constraints 130 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 A checkbox at the bottom of the window gives the option to automatically assign leftover time to the arterial through split as you re editing the splits for other movements If there is no protected turning movement Tru Traffic does not allow you to adjust the turning Split Similarly if there is no exclusive pedestrian phase Tru Traffic does not allow you to adjust the exclusive pedestrian Split If there are two protected phases for a cross traffic turning movement the two turning Splits may be set independently To do this set the Turn Phase Sequence to Lead Lag When using split phasing page 127 changing the Split of eithe
332. rsections You can change any one of these parameters at either intersection and Tru Traffic makes the equivalent change at the other Linking all timings between two intersection indicates that the two intersections are operating off a common controller Offsets only When you link intersections Offsets only any changes you make to the Offset of one intersection will apply to the Offset of the other intersection This is especially useful for modeling nearby intersections that operate from a common signal controller such as diamond interchanges Once the Offsets of two or more intersections are linked you may adjust any one of the Offsets to adjust all of them simultaneously In order to change the Offset of an intersection relative to its linked intersections you must temporarily break the link to that intersection Remember that changing the Offset Reference Point of a linked intersection results in an effective change in Offset even though the value of the Offset itself is unchanged Forwardbound Band or Reversebound Band When you link green bands between diagrams Time Space or Time Location the offset A with traffic turn is a e right turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e left turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 160 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 and wid
333. rsion can only import the intersection coordinates it can t export One user has reported that other versions 2003 and 2000 are similarly restricted and the 2000 version could export but only in a proprietary file format Also connecting the GPS receiver to perform live navigation is not practical as the software accepts a GPS reading only once every 15 or 16 seconds DeLorme Street Atlas This one can both import and export the intersection geographic coordinates When you create points for exporting coordinates be sure to include the intersection ID Number in the label if there s more than one number in the label let the ID Number be the first This way Tru Traffic will be able to import the geographic coordinates I found the user interface for importing and exporting to be pretty non intuitive it was difficult to figure out how to do it at first The live navigation with a GPS receiver works well but the maps tend to be considerably less accurate than the Microsoft product GPS Receiver Compatible GPS receivers include any receiver that complies with the NMEA National Marine Electronics Association 0183 Standard and the serial cable version or the USB version of the Earthmate from DeLorme available for around 125 The majority of GPS receivers comply with the NMEA 0183 Standard Tru Traffic has been tested with GPS receivers from Magellan Garmin and Pharos and they all work great for the most part DeLorme has a USB versi
334. ry this is the median speed of all the trip log runs that pass through that location e Average Link Speed this is the average of the average link speeds of all the trip log runs along the givenlink The average link speed of a run is the total travel distance divided by the total travel time along the given link Median Link Speed this is the median of the average link speeds of all the trip log runs along the givenlink The average link speed of a run is the total travel distance divided by the total travel time along the given link e Averages amp Medians Only not the individual Trip Logs the plot can get a little cluttered when there are many trip logs included in such cases you may prefer to plot only the selected averages e Threshold Speeds for the Definition of a Stop e g 5 amp 10 mph which you may specify in the Preferences dialog on the Layout TT amp D Report General page e Speeds for Reporting Time Spent Below e g 15 amp 30 mph which you may specify in the Preferences dialog on the Layout TT amp D Report General page By default the plots are shown at an optimal scale a scale that shows all data with essentially no extra space left over You may zoom by left dragging a box around the region of interest Once zoomed you may right drag to scroll through the plot and see regions off the screen While zoomed Tru Traffic treats the plot as though it were divided into multiple pages You may use the
335. s Tru Traffic to reset the Distance between the intersections on either side of the one deleted so that the arterial length is unchanged Deleting one of the boundary intersections of the diagram causes Tru Traffic to reset the Offset Width and Design Speed of any green band that begins at that intersection Tru Traffic also recalculates the optimal Horizontal Scale if it is unlocked and the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin Duplicate Diagram Window Use the b button on the Outline View to duplicate the diagram from one diagram window and place it in another You may also copy a diagram to the Windows Clipboard using the Copy and Paste commands under the Edit Menu When you duplicate a diagram window Tru Traffic offers to link the duplicated intersections to TS the originals Answer Yes if you wish to maintain two different types of diagrams for a given artery in two separate diagram windows If you answer No Tru Traffic then offers to link any intersections in the original diagram window that are linked to intersections in other diagram windows Joining Diagram Windows To join two diagrams together making a single diagram for one longer artery use either the Outline View or the Bt Network View and drag a link from the appropriate endpoint intersection of one diagram to the endpoint intersection of the other diagram See the discussion on Linking Intersections page 159 for further details Splitt
336. s accounting for possibly nonuniform time resolution in the trip logs The DT data value gives the actual time interval between consecutive GPS points Evaluate at Each GPS Point and With formulas evaluated with instantaneous second by second values you have an option whether to accumulate the values at each GPS point since the previous Node crossing or to merely use the value as an instantaneous reference only An instantaneous reference only value is useful in defining intermediate quantities used only in defining the formulas for other columns evaluated with instantaneous values such as this formula for instantaneous acceleration measured in mph s FS IS 100 3600 DT 2 54 12 5280 Such intermediate quantities are not accrued from GPS point to point they themselves don t appear in the final TT amp D report and the column s whose formulas reference them expect these intermediate quantities to provide instantaneous values not accrued values Formula You may type directly or drag operators or previously defined column symbols to create the formula for this column If your formula uses division or functions you may want to use the if statement to avoid arithmetic errors with values out of range For example the if statement in 100 if TT 0 0 Delay TT which shows the delay as a percentage of travel time guards against division by zero 87 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Statistics in
337. s all diagram windows When you have two or more diagram windows representing intersecting arteries you should establish a link between the common intersection s so Tru Traffic can ensure that the intersection parameters remain consistent 80 sec 2 Market Avenue AM Plan Fri 11 3 00 3 06 PM East 30 0 sec 420 0 sec 35 0 sec th435 0 sec 30 0 sec t4 30 0 sec m peo 5 5 HO 49 0 sec W6 23 0 sec 4 T 17 0 sec m 6 28 0 sec 30 0 ie sec 50 0 sec 7 28 0 sec 31 0 sec 1 421 0 sec 20 0 sec pe 17 0 sec 20 0 sec 20 0 sec 9 5 3 2 30 0 sec 1 130 0 sec 35 0 sec TH435 0 sec 30 0 sec tH 430 0 sec sec 5 48 0 sec 2 23 0 17 0 sec Hs 2c 30 0 sec ue 428 0 sec 30 0 sec 30 0 sec 7 i 7 50 0 sec 7 28 0 sec 31 0 sec 1 421 0 sec 20 0 sec uc us 17 0 sec 20 0 sec 20 0 sec 5 9 Park Avenue Lincoln Blvd Oak Street Hd Ridge Drive 13 15 37 51 96 Figure 1 A sample diagram The numbered regions are discussed in the text With the belief that a picture is worth a thousand words we ll use Figure 1 to explain how Tru Traffic draws diagrams The numbered 7 regions are described below the figure 24 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 1 The arterial diagram name cycle length current time and date When there is uJ more than one C timing plan the Timing Plan Name also appears at the top of the drawn diagram after the arterial diagram name 2 Beginning of netwo
338. s baseline is the maximum of the intersections Downstream Saturation Flows in the given direction on the artery The third choice Network wide Maximum Downstream Saturation Flow uses a common saturation flow baseline for all links in all directions of travel along all arteries This baseline is the maximum of all intersections Downstream Saturation Flows in either direction on all arteries Header Footer Logos on Arterial Timings Diagrams Use the controls on the Header Footer Logos page of the Network Parameters dialog to insert view or edit the graphic images that appear in the header or footer of all Arterial Timings Diagrams in the network Choose a header footer location with the radio buttons left right or center top or bottom Click the Browse button to select an image for the selected header footer location and use the Height amp Width boxes to set the logo size You may use the Visible check box to hide an image while maintaining a record of the graphic and its size 98 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The Save Mainly by Reference check box stores in the diagram data file Dgm a reference to the image file in addition to the actual image so any changes to the image file external to Tru Traffic automatically affects the header footer in the arterial timings diagrams When the box is not checked changes to the image file do not affect the header footer in the arterial timings diagrams until you explicitly browse for and s
339. s have bends you ll want to correct those to be the travel distance Proceed to Step 19 Starting from a single diagram file for one of the arteries in the network 17 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 If you already have a diagram file representing an artery in the network open that file and use it as a starting point In this case you might want to use Save As in the File Menu and give the open diagram file a new name so you don t overwrite the original file Open the Outline View by f S Arterial Outline Ee JE esa b d Kidd eli qa H Forward Bands oss clicking on the Jin the 7 i D NB SB Lamar AM Reverse Bands Tool Bar or by selecting the 3 b wB Emam Outline View command a Sp Grin AM Commerce 4M H B SB Griffin under the View Menu 4EB Young AM U 57 Griffin 857 of EB Young AM t 80 Houston 52 Market 62 of Commerce AM Select the g first and only f 81 Record U 62 Commerce 62 of NB Market AM arterial diagram in the y 82 Market 7 73 StPaul tt73 of Commerce AM Us 38 L arterial outline list then Se 5 Un C 73 Commerce 73 of SB St Paul AM NB Market AM C 81 Record 81 of EB Young AM click the button to add de SB St Paul AM 82 Market 82 of EB Young AM c c 82 Market 882 of EB Young AM a new arterial diagram Be e aay iM U 82 Young 82 of
340. s that there are two turning phases in the cycle for the cross traffic turning movement one that leads the opposing through and one that lags In this case you will need to set the Splits separately for each turn phase Split Lead and Split Lag are special cases of Lead and Lag and for most purposes they work exactly the same However there are some special rules enforced to ensure split phasing When a turning phase is set to one of these the turning phase in the opposite direction is automatically set to the other and the Splits and Clearance Times for the through and cross traffic turn are automatically forced to be equal An associated dropdown list box allows you to Unlock Lock or Restrict the turning phase sequence on this approach These options determine how much liberty the automatic optimization process may take Locking a phase sequence prevents the automatic optimizer from making any change to the phase sequence on that approach while Restricting the phase sequences on this and the opposite approach allows Lead Lag to replace Lag Lead but not Lead Lead or Lag Lag and it similarly allows Lead Lead to replace Lag Lag but not Lead Lag or Lag Lead There is also an associated check box labeled Permitted with which you may specify whether cross traffic turns are permitted during the opposing through phase This is used on Platoon Progression diagrams only to determine the actual flow of the opposing through movement The
341. s the frames are created as fast as possible within Tru Traffic instead of in real time Note that you may also watch an animation of a trip log playback within Google Earth by either copying the trip log to the clipboard and pasting it into Google Earth or by exporting the trip log to a Google KML file and loading the file into Google Earth See the chapter on Using Google Earth with Tru Traffic p 201 for step by step details 57 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Managing Trip Logs You may import or export a trip log to TSPPD Trip Log file GPS Exchange Format GPX file a Google KML file a GIS shapefile or a text file with tab or comma separated variables for sharing with other software including Google Earth GIS software or Excel You may also export a trip log to a AVI video file for playback in say a PowerPoint presentation Right click on a trip log in the Trip Logs page ofthe GPS Receiver View to select the Import or Export command from the pop up menu You may save multiple trip logs in a single TSPPD Trip Log file Importing You may import trip logs from e any ofa variety of tables that is a CSV or TSV file a GIS shapefile or a block of cells copied and pasted from Excel into the GPS View e aGPS Exchange Format GPX file or aGoogle KML file When importing from a table Tru Traffic displays a preview of the contents of the table with controls to customize the forma
342. same is true for displaying trip logs on a diagram or the Network View with the exception that the your geographic position is not current At trip log is a recorded series of geographic coordinates each with a time stamp The GPS receiver provides the first piece of information where you are now geographically whenever you re tracking You must provide the second piece of information where the intersections are geographically by E Coordinates clicking the _ Coordinates button in the Intersection Parameters window or by importing coordinates from a file If you do this while you re tracking with the GPS receiver you may then click the y Bet GPS Measurement Vutton to take the current GPS reading as a measurement of the intersection s coordinates 230 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 7i 3j Add Position Import al nates Otherwise you may click the Manualy button to manually enter or the CaS button to import the geographic coordinates of the center of the intersection For the purposes of displaying recorded trip logs as trajectories on a diagram or on the Network View or for generating a Travel Time amp Delay Report it doesn t matter which order these two pieces of information are collected But for the purpose of seeing your current position displayed on the diagram or on the Network View while tracking with the GPS receiver the intersections Geographic Coordinates must be collected first I
343. save the file Exporting UTDF include Tru Traffic specific parameters e g geographic coordinates coordinated cycle length This option allows Tru Traffic to stores additional Tru Traffic specific parameters to the UTDF files This can be useful when exporting data from Tru Traffic modifying the data in other software then reimporting back into Tru Traffic as it allows Tru Traffic to retain some parameter values that would otherwise be lost and have to be reentered manually The additional parameters include the Geographic Coordinates of intersections and the network wide Cycle Length used for coordination The additional parameters in the UTDF files are quietly ignored by Synchro but they may cause problems for other software Label Approaches along Arteries in Exporting UTDF Files using In exporting UTDF files the approach labeling can be made especially clear to simplify the import process in other software if you export with Strictly Cardinal Directions N S E or W along Arteries This is the default and usually recommended especially for single arteries Using strictly cardinal directions unambiguously indicates which is the through movement at K intersections and can otherwise clarify what you d consider arteries in your network as the forward direction remains unchanged through angled intersections Using both Cardinal and Inter Cardinal Directions NE SW etc as appropriate for diagonal links is usually n
344. sed for reading files Tru Traffic considers the erratic file in Table 6 to be equivalent to the one given in Table 5 Of course Tru Traffic would never write such an unappealing file but you are free to do so and may still expect Tru Traffic to read it without complaint L Thru R N 153 638 84 Yeast 79 497 76 S 95 5527 89 west 83 411 65 Table 6 Illustrating that Tru Traffic tolerates sloppily formatted Volumes Text Files this erratic Volume Text File is equivalent to the one in Table 5 A TMC Volumes File is a Volumes File a file that contains the approach volumes hourly 15 minute or other interval for a single intersection The file is documented with Synchro 4 5 amp 6 An example TMC Volume File will serve to illustrate the format For an intersection with the volumes as shown in the figure above an applicable TMC Volume File is Turning Movement Count Date 3 15 2009 60 Minute Counts IntID 31 TIME NBL NBT NBR SBL SBT SBR EBL EBT EBR WBL WBT WBR 1600 95 552 89 153 038 84 83 411 65 79 497 76 Table 7 The contents of an example TMC Volumes File See text for more details The TMC file may include turning movement volume counts for a single intersection from multiple time periods The columns in the file are fixed width with each line representing a single time period The first line must say TURNING MOVEMENT COUNT case insensitive Subsequent lines list e the date of the counts
345. set of radio buttons and check boxes indicate how the Splits for the signal phases are labeled on the diagram with any combination of the following atwo letter or three letter abbreviation e g NT SL ET WL or NBT SBL EBT WBL etc amovement arrow and e the phase number for each intersection This option is available only if you ve also opted to Show the Arterial Splits Show Splits on Just One Cycle This check box indicates whether the Splits should be labeled on all cycles in the diagram or on just one cycle to reduce clutter This option is available only if you ve also opted to Show the Arterial Splits as labels on the diagram Layout Volumes This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has options for the appearance of Volumes on the arterial timings diagram Show Arterial Volumes This check box indicates whether the Volumes for the intersection movements along the artery are shown on the diagram along with a movement arrow or abbreviation for each intersection Show Side Street Volumes This check box indicates whether the Volumes for the intersection movements along the side streets are shown on the diagram along with a movement arrow or abbreviation for each intersection This option is available only if you ve also opted to Show the Arterial Volumes Show Volume Units This check box indicates whether the Volumes Units vph should be displayed on the diagram along with the Volumes and a movement
346. sets refer Thus changing the Offset Reference Point does shift the signals in time resulting in an effective change in offsets but the values of the offsets themselves are unchanged The Offset Reference Point does not affect the reference point of the offsets of the green band bands on Time Space diagrams These always refer to the point at which the green bands begin which will be near the front of the platoon if a queue has built up However since changing the Offset Reference Point does effectively shift the intersection signals in time this change will cause Tru Traffic to reset the offsets of all of the green bands both arterial and new if they re not locked to their default values Vehicle Length This is used on Platoon Progression diagrams only It is the average length occupied by a vehicle stopped along the artery and it is measured in units set in the Units of Measurement page of the Preferences dialog box feet yards meters etc described on page 190 feet yards meters etc The default is set in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog box page 192 but any diagram can override the default The Vehicle Length is used to calculate the length of the queues for a particular lane group so it applies only to the traffic in that lane group on the artery The queue length is calculated as NL n where N Number of vehicles in queue L Vehicle Length n Number of lanes in the lane group Caution If the queue at
347. sh to extract numbers from the trip log to include in a report formatted to local specifications For this purpose Tru Traffic makes it easy to copy and paste the report into spreadsheets e g Excel or word processing documents e g Word Click the amp processing document button to save the report in a file which can be imported into a spreadsheet or word Select the contents of the report and press Ctrl C or right click and use the pop up menu to copy the report to the clipboard for pasting into a spreadsheet or word processing document 83 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Click the _ Sein button to print the report Tru Traffic detects which intersections each trip log passes through by determining whether the trip passes close to the center of the intersection Close means roughly within the intersection s radius allowing some tolerance for error in the GPS measurements If there is no median the intersection s radius is the Number of Lanes multiplied by the Average Lane Width But if there is a wide median this calculation gives a width too narrow and Tru Traffic may incorrectly decide that a trip log bypasses an intersection it really passes through For this case multiple GPS measurements taken on the opposite sides of the median or on opposite corners allow Tru Traffic to estimate the intersection width including the median User defined Report Columns Use this dialog available fr
348. sing say the Trip Log Details Table 52 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Some GPS receivers double as data loggers they can record their own trip logs tracks which gives you options e You can take the GPS receiver in the field solo let it record the trip logs then import the trip logs into Tru Traffic when you return to the office For Garmin GPS receivers connected with a serial cable you can download directly into Tru Traffic otherwise you can use software that comes with the GPS receiver or that s freely available to save the trip logs to a file for importing into Tru Traffic Advantages of this include o convenience fewer cables and equipment to deal with and o expense no need to buy another laptop or license to Tru Traffic e You can connect the GPS receiver to a laptop running Tru Traffic and let the software record the trip logs for you With the basic GPS receivers that don t have a recording feature this is your only option Advantages of this include o higher accuracy in the speed on some GPS receivers which can otherwise have from 2 to 5 mph of random noise in the speed o the option to synchronize the signal controller clocks and satellite clocks if you don t already know the signal cycle start time o the option to view the moving now line on the arterial timings diagram to see where you are within the signal cycle o the ability to confirm that the timings within Tru Traffic agree with the timings
349. split plus the turn split 228 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Remember that the through Splits in the directions with Protected Turn Phases are the total through Split in those directions That is they should include the turn Split of any shared turning phases For example when you have a protected cross traffic turning movement in one direction and no protected cross traffic turn in the opposite direction you ll get this warning if you forget to include the turn Split in the through Split In this case the through Split in the one direction should be equal to the opposing through Split plus the turn Split You can use the rule Equal cross sums While viewing the Splits in the intersection parameters dialog the through and turn Splits for opposing directions of travel are displayed in the four corners of a box Regardless of the turning Phase Sequences Lead Lag or None the sums of the Splits in opposing corners of the box should always be equal Actually an exception to this rule occurs when the cross traffic Turn Phase Sequence is Lead Lag in which case there are two cross traffic turn phases one leading and one lagging the opposing through and each will have its own Split In this case you ll need to sum the two corresponding turn Splits before applying the rule 3 You intend to operate your signal out of coordination i e with a Cycle Length not closely harmonically related to the network wide Cycle Length but the Adjusted
350. street Prevents you from changing the cross traffic Turn Phase Sequences or the Green Band Action at an intersection in the nonexistent direction of travel e Does not show the Split for the nonexistent through movement on the report of the diagram parameters For Speed use Use this drop down list box to specify the speed type for the green bands and flow density bands displayed on the arterial timings diagram Choose either Design Speed p 133 or Posted n peed Limit p 135 The precise effect of the choice depends somewhat on the Type of Diagram as follows Time Space diagram The all clipped bands if specified are all displayed at the selected speed e Platoon Progression diagram The flow density bands and the all clipped bands if specified are displayed at the selected speed Time Location The Time Location diagram is drawn at the selected speed Show Flow on Cycles This is a drop down list box indicating the cycles on which the flow is shown on a Platoon Progression diagram For each direction of travel the flow may be shown on all cycles alternating cycles alternate two cycles or no cycles When the flow is shown on alternating cycles it starts with the first bottom most cycle for right bound traffic and with the second cycle for left bound traffic When the flow is shown on alternate two cycles it starts with the first bottom most pair of cycles for right bound traffic and with
351. t Batteries last for only a few hours the cigarette lighter power adapter is practically mandatory Usually takes several minutes to initialize and start tracking The cigarette lighter power adapter is prone to breaking A wire in the cigarette lighter connector is cut too short and once assembled it s under constant tension Thus it s likely to break If you have a soldering iron you can replace this wire with a longer one for more reliable operation Works only with Garmin GPS receivers and it may not work with some older models Tend to be more expensive typically 200 300 although the basic Garmin eTrex and it s data cable are about 160 total Doesn t necessarily include map navigation software although it can use it if you buy it separately The downloaded trip logs don t provide any speed or heading measurements These have to be inferred This affects the accuracy of Speed vs Distance plots page 92 and the effectiveness of the Trip Log Filter page 62 Figure 4 page 54 illustrates this compromise in downloaded pre recorded Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination GPS Receiver Type Disadvantages Trip Logs Does not provide any satellite information position or signal strength Pharos 1360 USB Reports the position and speed Can function only when connected to a configuration to Tru Traffic once every computer or other device second Takes power from the USB p
352. t Copy Geographic Coordinates Geographic Coordinates as Google KML In Google Earth select My Places so it acts as as the root folder then paste using Ctrl V or right click and choose Paste Either way in Google Earth a new folder will appear called diagram data file name gt kml When you double click on that folder the map view will zoom in on the network Transfer Intersection Locations from Google Earth In collecting coordinates of intersections from Google Earth you may either set placemarks at or drag paths around the intersections Either way it s best to create a folder in Google Earth where you store the set of placemarks or paths Thereafter you may select the folder to transfer its entire contents to Tru Traffic as follows l Google KML File Right click on the folder and choose Save Place As to save the folder to a KML File In Tru Traffic open the Intersection Parameters for any intersection click the Coordinates button then click the Import Coordinates icon in the list along the left edge to import the KML file 2 Windows Clipboard Right click on the folder and choose Copy In Tru Traffic use Edit Paste or press Ctrl V to paste the coordinates into the Network View the Outline View any diagram window or the geographic coordinates window of any intersection Either way when you either import or paste into Tru Traffic Tru Traffic displays the entire list of coordinates along with their tentative inters
353. t and you don t need to be consistent you may switch phrases at any time You ll probably want to use the spoken phrases that you find easiest to remember and that seem most reliably recognized and distinguished by the speech recognition engine I find that the recognition engine is sometimes more reliable when I speak some phrases quickly and slightly slurred rather than slowly and clearly enunciated Listen Start Listening When you first start voice command Listen recognition or after you give it the Stop Pay Attention Listening command Tru Traffic ignores Wake Up almost everything you say until you give it this command See Tips page 73 on using this command Stop Listening Stop Listening Give this command to effectively pause Don t Listen voice command recognition While paused Sleep Tru Traffic ignores almost everything you say until you give it the Listen command See Tips page 73 on using this command Save Diagram File Save File This is equivalent to clicking the button on Save Diagram the Tool Bar or the Save command under File Save the File Menu to save the diagram currently open This command works only if the diagram already has a file name so if you ve just created a new diagram file be sure to save it first giving it a name before attempting to use this voice command Start GPS Tracking Start Tracking This is equivalent to clicking the Start GPS GPS On o Start GPS Tracking on the GP
354. t Show Offsets In this case the offsets are not explicitly displayed anywhere on the diagram although you may still infer them using the grid or a scale If the offsets are shown on the diagram you may also opt to show the offset units using the Show Offset Units check box If the units are not shown the offset text uses a little less space on the diagram reducing clutter 176 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Show Offsets on Lines This parameter indicates the number of rows or lines which Tru Traffic uses to display the Intersection Offsets on the diagram if you have opted to Show the Offsets By default Tru Traffic shows the offsets on one line but you may increase this number if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the names tend to run together When showing the offsets on more than one line Tru Traffic alternates lines to reduce the likelihood that neighboring intersection s offsets will overlap Layout Splits This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has options for the appearance of Splits on the arterial timings diagram Show Arterial Splits This check box indicates whether the Splits for the signal phases along the artery are shown on the diagram along with a movement arrow or abbreviation for each intersection When checked the Splits are displayed in the Split Units seconds or percent you have selected in the Units of Measure page Show Side Street Splits T
355. t an intersection the program offers to change all downstream bus speeds to match Green Band Action E The Green Band Action is a drop down list box on Time Space and Time Location diagrams It indicates the action that the green band in a specified band category p 132 takes at a particular intersection for either direction of travel The Green Band Actions are given in Table 4 137 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination You may edit the Green Band Action directly on the diagram window by selecting the intersection and clicking the right mouse button and selecting Xbound Band from the pop up menu where X is the direction of travel of the band to be altered North South East or West You may also select the intersection and press Ctrl F or Ctrl R to edit the Band Action At the boundary intersections the Green Band Action for the green band beginning at that intersection must be either Start or Stop When you change the Green Band Action Tru Traffic offers to apply this change to all intersections downstream The default Green Band Action is set in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog but any intersection on any diagram can override the default If you have checked the One way box for one of the directions of travel then Tru Traffic assumes the artery is a one way street In this case you cannot specify the Green Band Action in the nonexistent direction of travel Starting new green
356. t and data parsing rules for importing the trip log When you import a trip log Tru Traffic internally marks the trip log as being imported from an unverifiable source file For text files there s an exception to this rule if the file includes a digital signature as explained below 58 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 a amp Import Trip Log SR 121 2009 11 19 csv No Header Lines 0 File Format Presets E some gece iim m Custom o EZ meiegstringDste mete 0 G Time Format HH mm ss UTC 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada N Latitude deg 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 ignored Date Time Longitude i Latitude Altitude Speed Heading SEU T LUTZ UT 40 405117 40 405027 40 404933 40 404845 40 40476 40 404688 40 40463 40 404587 40 404562 40 404552 40 40455 40 404552 40 404552 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 11 19 2009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 1171972009 In Hd w N CO 8 W Ni Ni N NINININI o o o o c ecjojojojojjojjoljojojojiojoms oo c c co FPN CO D D n Help Exporting 1 2 1 2 1 2 t N Latitude deg N Latitude d m s N Latitude dddmm mmmm N Latitude dddmmmmmm N Latitude rad S Latitude deg S Latitude d m s S Latitude dddmm mmmm S Latitude dddmmmmmm S Latitude rad 80 055533 8
357. t click on the selected annotation and choose the Delete Annotation command from the pop up menu or Delete the entire text of the annotation When the edit box is closed the entire annotation is deleted if it contains no text Click anywhere else on the Network View to close the selected annotation s edit box Color Coded Links on the Network View You can color code the links on the Network View according to the link average speed or link median speed of a selected set of Trip Logs as a percentage of the design speed Tr Traffic Coordination along Crossing Arteries Dom r cial ezm File Edit View Template Optimize Window Help D Hio iHS e B Em S eso 4 4 BEM 2 O z00m m0 ti Network View BA Trip Log Plot Plan 1 2 US 401 Main St Lillington 0630 0815 M F Mon 12 27 2010 10 45 AM D Qoo S amp h Speed miles hour N m Plot Type Properties Alt Enter Copy Plot Ctrl C i 2 Copy Summaries 6 000 7 000 8000 9 000 10 000 11 000 TTA feet 61231 nc 21 H Save 06 0127 E IC 27 210 129 06 0129 US 401 42 Set Arterial Link Color Average Link Speed ian Li amp Print Median Link Speed Set Colors of Arterial Lin e type Trip Logs Distance feet 365 4 Speed miles hour 129 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination You may set the color for a given link using
358. t every intersection where the Design Speed changes Show Speed or Band Categories This is a check box indicating whether on Time Space and Time Location diagrams the speed and band categories or transportation modes i e design speed posted speed limit bus light rail bicycle of the green bands are shown explicitly with the bands on the diagram When this is checked the speed category is displayed on the diagram at the beginning of the arterial green bands and at every intersection where the speed changes Show Band Widths This check box on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog indicates whether on Time Space and Time Location diagrams the widths seconds of the displayed green bands are shown explicitly on the diagram Depending on the green Band Action the band width can change throughout the diagram new bands can start or stop and bands can split into multiple sub bands Using this option lets you see the exactly how it changes since it shows you the width of every band drawn on every link in the diagram If you ve opted to show the band widths you may choose to have the band widths labeled with initials BW This can help distinguish the displayed band widths from any offsets or splits that may also be shown on the diagram You may also include the band width units seconds in the display of the band widths 179 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Separate the Bands in Cycles based o
359. t help on that item 15 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Creating a Network In Tru Traffic the fundamental concept is the arterial timings diagram which includes two or more signalized intersections Consequently Tru Traffic views a signalized network as a series of intersecting arteries each represented in its own diagram window Below are the steps to create a signalized network in Tru Traffic You may choose between four different possible starting points depending on what you already have nothing the geographic positions latitude amp longitude of your intersections in either some sort of table e g Excel or GIS shapefile or in a Google KML file asingle diagram file for one of the arteries in the network or e multiple diagram files each for a different artery in the network Starting from nothing 1 Click the ni button on the Tool Bar or the New command under the File Menu to create a blank diagram for the first artery You ll be prompted to enter the number of signalized intersections along this artery and the Forward Direction or Orientation of the diagram It isn t necessary for now to set the signal timing parameters at each intersection but you may do so in the Intersection Parameters window if you wish Proceed to Step 6 Starting from the geographic positions latitude amp longitude of your intersections in either some sort of table e g Excel or GIS shapefile or i
360. tail how it can be calculated from Trip Logs The default value is set in the Defaults page of the Preferences dialog page 192 but any diagram can override the default Driver Type Description Start Up Lost Time Clearance Lost Time Drivers avoid fast starts and or Conservative 4 sec 3 4 sec close headways Normal Average driver behavioral patterns 3 sec 2 sec Drivers typically make fast starts Aggressive follow closely and use most or all 2 sec 0 1 sec of the change period Table 9 The TRANSYT 7F recommended values for the Start Up and Clearance Lost Times Table 9 shows the TRANSYT 7F recommended values of the Start Up Lost Time for various driving conditions On Time Space and Time Location diagrams changing the Start Up Lost Time causes Tru Traffic to reset the Offset and Widths 1f they re not locked of any associated green bands to their default values Their default values are determined by the split for the corresponding movement through left or right turn at the intersection at which the green band originates Click the E button next to the Start Up Lost Time to determine the actual travel Start Up Lost Time using one or more Trip Log runs This button is enabled only if there are trip logs involving travel passing through this intersection and for which the calculated start up lost time is even plausible less than 8 seconds You may select which trip log runs to use in the calculati
361. tance before being stopped or nearly stopped at the first blockage The travel distance from the first blockage to the center of the next intersection this 1s an estimate of the length of the queue The travel time from the previous intersection to first blockage or link total travel time if there is no blockage The travel time from the first blockage to this intersection The average speed from the previous intersection to first blockage or average speed along the link if there is no blockage The average speed from the first blockage to this intersection or average speed along the link if there is no blockage The maximum speed from the previous intersection to first blockage or maximum speed along the link if there is no blockage The maximum speed from the first blockage to this intersection or maximum speed along the link if there is no blockage The time elapsed from presumed start of through green to vehicle startup as determined by the startup threshold speed in the definition of Stop or 0 if there is no blockage Note that because of this definition the effective startup time may be later than what you d expect so you may want to add about 3 seconds to this elapsed time to account for the difference if you re confident the vehicle came to a complete stop Note further that the presumed start of through green is accurate only if the signal timings are correct the signal cycle start time for the trip log 1s accurat
362. te clocks synchronized 64 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 When zoomed in and the GPS marker goes off screen These dropdown list boxes allow you specify whether and how the Arterial Timings Diagram and or the Network View should scroll when they re zoomed in and the GPS position marker goes off the edge of the window When recording trip logs tolerate interruptions from the GPS data stream The option to tolerate a certain number of seconds interruption in the GPS data stream when recording trip logs requires a little background GPS receivers will sometimes fail to provide an updated position for some interval of time This can be for various reasons including Loss of contact with a sufficient number of GPS satellites Disconnected or poorly connected serial data cable Loss of power to the GPS receiver Weak batteries in the GPS receiver A slow acquisition GPS receiver I ve worked with a Magellan that seems to be more flaky in this regard than the Garmins or the Earthmate that I ve tested it can go tens of seconds without updating the position information while it recovers from a lost fix While merely tracking with the GPS receiver this usually isn t a problem Tru Traffic just ignores the missing information and updates the position when it s available again But for recording trip logs a long gap in the recording is of more concern as it may lead to inaccurate Travel Time and Delay Reports The GPS receiver reports the
363. ters window D Get GPS Measurement geographically by clicking the If you do this while you re tracking with the GPS receiver you may then click the button to take the current GPS reading as a measurement of the intersection s coordinates 7i Qa Add Position Import all i T Otherwise you may click the Manually button to manually enter or the eee button to 236 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 import the geographic coordinates of the center of the intersection For the purposes of displaying recorded trip logs as trajectories on a diagram or on the Network View or for generating a Travel Time amp Delay Report it doesn t matter which order these two pieces of information are collected But for the purpose of seeing your current position displayed on the diagram or on the Network View while tracking with the GPS receiver the intersections Geographic Coordinates must be collected first Right click on the Network View and choose Layout Grid with Geographic Coordinates If this command is grayed out then there is one or more intersections whose Geographic Coordinates have not yet been specified See item 1 above When I import UTDF files my artery is split into two or more sub arteries What should I do know of several things that can cause this 1 Q G Make sure you re using the current version of Tru Traffic Version 4 0 0 11 fixed a problem that could occur at Y intersections in tracing the art
364. th of that green band are identical between the two diagrams with the secondary the dragged to intersection s band determined by the Green Band Action and offset and width of the primary intersection the dragged from intersection This can be useful if you split an embedded superstreet into two diagrams one WB and one EB linking together their common 2 way intersections which are near the edges With their green bands linked then the 2 way bands near the edges will be identical in both diagrams Otherwise the started band in one diagram won t resemble the calculated e g tapered band in the other diagram This also facilitates splitting a long artery into two shorter diagrams one for the east segment and one for the west segment Linking bands at the common intersection ensures that the bands in the downstream diagram reflect the clipping amp tapering information from the upstream intersections in the other diagram On Time Space and Time Location diagrams only If you have started a new green band at any of the linked intersections then changing the offset causes Tru Traffic to reset the New Green Band Offset that begins at that intersection to the beginning of the green time for the through or left or right turn movement in the appropriate direction of travel To link two intersections together or to join two diagrams at their endpoints you may either 1 Open the Outline View select one intersection in the arterial
365. that you re projected to arrive at the next signal near a red to green transition e Record Trip Logs with the L GPS Receiver View for preparing Travel Time and Delay Reports making Plots of Speed vs Distance or Travel Time vs Distance measuring the distance between intersections calculating the optimal relative offset between intersections for a given direction of travel calculating the Design Speed between intersections or calculating the start up lost time for the through movement along the artery at an intersection The Diagnostics page of the e GPS Receiver View can help you troubleshoot the connection with the GPS receiver as it will show you the raw data that s arriving over the serial port top GPS Tracki To stop GPS tracking click the _ Sop GPS Trackin button on the M GPS Receiver View or right click on the view and choose the Stop GPS Tracking command from the pop up menu or say Stop GPS if voice command recognition is enabled See also the tutorial on How to Perform a Travel Time and Delay Study page 20 for step by step instructions on how to operate Tru Traffic with the GPS receiver Warning It is not safe to operate a computer including laptop and notebook computers while operating a vehicle If you wish to perform any of the above procedures while in a moving vehicle have someone else drive the vehicle while you operate the computer You take full responsibility and accept all liability f
366. the East West vehicular movements Thus a leading North South EPP is similar to a lagging East West EPP In fact they are the same unless the Offset Reference Point is either Start of the arterial phase or Start of arterial phase yellow because these reference points include the EPP For example on a North South artery if the Offset Reference Point is Start of the arterial phase and there is a leading North South EPP then the Offset references the start of the EPP Similarly on a North South artery if the Offset Reference Point is Start of the arterial phase and there is a lagging East West EPP then the Offset references the end of the EPP Turn On Red This is a check box indicating whether checked or not unchecked a with traffic turn on red is permitted These are right turns where the Drive Rule is Right Hand Side North amp South America China and continental Europe left turns where the Drive Rule is Left Hand Side Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details about the Drive Rule The Turn on Red option is used on Platoon Progression diagrams only Tru Traffic uses the permitted movement model developed for TRANSYT 7F to determine the actual flow of the with traffic turners based on the flow of the opposing movements cross traffic turning and through A cross traffic turn is a 128 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Splits The Splits are the fraction of
367. the controls on the Link Colors page of the Intersection Parameters dialog for the intersection on the upstream side of the link To set the link colors along the entire artery at once currently the way to specify the set of Trip Logs whose average link speeds you wish to summarize as either an average or a median and use to color code the Network View you have to create a Plot from a Trip Log see page 92 Then right click on the plot and choose Set Arterial Link Color to choose the specific speed summary to use for the color coding The color speed bins are the same ones you may specify in the Google KML page of the Preferences dialog page 194 for transferring speeds to Google Earth 46 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Timings Report You may preview save or print out a report of all of the arterial diagram timing parameters using the button on the Tool Bar or the Timings Report command in the View Menu Before preparing the timings report Tru Traffic allows you to select which arterial timings diagrams to include in the report You may save the timings report in a variety of file formats including pdf html rtf or txt 47 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination GPS Receiver and Trip Tracking The GPS Global Positioning System Receiver View shows the status of the GPS receiver unit 1f any and contains parameters affecting the connection to and operation of the GPS receiver and the synch
368. the plot legend When there are many trip log runs included in the plot unchecking the box reduces the clutter in the labels Always Show Run Number in Legend Labels A single trip log can include more than one run through the artery Each run is displayed in the trip log plot Uncheck this box to include the run number in the trip log label only when the trip log includes more than one run through the artery When this box is checked the run number is always included in the label even when the trip log includes only one run This can give the labels a more uniform appearance Show List of Trip Logs in Plot Title The trip log plot includes a Legend along the right hand side of the plot The legend gives a detailed list of each run of each trip log included in the plot showing which color and line style shows the corresponding trajectory e Title at the top of the plot The Title gives the name of the arterial timings diagram and optionally a list of all the trip logs but not the runs included in the plot Use this check box to indicate whether you d like this list of included trip logs in the plot title When there are many trip logs included in the plot unchecking the box reduces the clutter in the title Layout TT amp D Reports Im This tab on the Layout page of the Preferences dialog has several options for the appearance of Travel Time and Delay Reports from trip logs Agency Title Use this box to specify in HTML fo
369. timing plan is checked 5 Repeat these steps as needed to associate the remaining trip logs with their corresponding timing plan s If you have trip logs collected for timing plans with different schedules based on day of the week such as on normal weekdays vs weekends and holidays then before you perform step 4 listed above left click on the Day column header This sorts all the trip logs by the day of week but leaves the already selected trip logs highlighted After that you may hold the Ctrl key down and left click on individual trip logs to exclude or include them into the mass selection When you filtered out the inapplicable trip logs you may perform step 4 right clicking on the remaining selection to associate those trip logs with their corresponding timing plan s When you ve completed these steps only the applicable trip logs will be visible in each timing plan As you toggle to different timing plans the trip logs previously visible will be hidden and the appropriate trip logs will automatically appear Some of the intersections are so closely spaced on the diagram that their text is overlapping and unreadable What can I do In most cases the best way to deal with this is to manipulate the Horizontal Scale and the Distance from the left margin to the first intersection to zoom in on the crowded section of the diagram Tru Traffic provides an easy way to do this Move the mouse cursor between two intersections and left dra
370. tion 1s held fixed If you have started a green band from any of the side street turning movements the progression of this band is not taken into account in selecting the offsets You may use the Fine Tune Offsets command to adjust the offsets taking into the progression of bands from the side street It is often helpful to follow the Optimize Arterial Offsets command with one or more applications of the Fine Tune Offsets command But these optimization and fine tuning techniques may not produce optimal timings according to everyone s way of thinking After using either command you may choose Undo from the Edit menu or press Ctrl Z to restore the previous timing settings The direct editing of timing parameters offsets amp turning phase sequences on the diagram window provide an easy way to manually optimize or fine tune the timings after or instead of the automatic optimization Fine Tune Offsets This command under the Optimize Menu adjusts the intersection Offsets to try to improve the progression in both directions of travel giving preference to the beginning of the band and strong preference to the possibly hypothetical band that makes it through the entire artery Partial credit is given 166 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 for bands that make it part way through the artery and credit is deducted for inequities in the progression quality between the two directions of travel If you have started a green band from any of th
371. tion and direction of travel at which the trip entered the artery The clock time and elapsed time since the start of the trip log at which the trip entered the artery starting the run The Name of each subsequent intersection in the artery through which the trip passes The clock time and elapsed time since the start of the run at which the trip crosses the intersection The ID of the each subsequent intersection in the artery through which the trip passes The direction of travel NB SB EB or WB in passing through each subsequent intersection 3A run begins at the point of entry onto the artery A trip log may have more than one run through an artery 79 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination e The travel time from the previous intersection e The cumulative travel time to this intersection from the point of entry onto the artery e The distance traveled to this intersection from the previous intersection e The cumulative distance traveled to this intersection from the point of entry onto the artery e The user specified Design Distance or expected travel distance from the previous intersection e The cumulative user specified Design Distance or expected travel distance from the previous intersection e This distance traveled before the declared Design Speed was reached The delay in traveling to this intersection from the previous intersection calculated as the difference between the actual
372. tions with Green Band Action page 137 set to Clip Clip Start or Clip amp Start ignoring intersections with the band action set to Continue In other words the Green Bands tab gives the width of a provisional band that departs from this intersection As that band propagates downstream its width including the width upstream all the way back to the starting intersection can get reduced by the effective green time of each succeeding intersection until it reaches an intersection where the action is not Clip or one of its variants or Continue Actually there are special somewhat more complicated rules when a downstream intersection is using Clip Start or Clip amp Start but the details of these rules probably don t matter for this discussion So the value you set for Width of Green Band serves as a maximum possible width you ll ever see departing from this intersection and that maximum width is realized only when the band arrives entirely within effective green time at each of the successive intersections that Clip the band You may start green bands from the side street left and right turning movements as well For a cross traffic turning green band the default value of the Width is equal to the duration of the effective green time that is allotted to the cross traffic turn movement in the appropriate direction s of travel at this intersection 1 e the cross traffic turn Split minus the Start Up Lost Time and Yellow and All Red Cleara
373. to Tru Traffic After adding the first placemark and assigning it the Intersection ID Number duplicate it by right clicking it and choosing Copy then pressing Ctrl V Then drag the newly pasted placemark to the correct location I like to put one placemark on say the NE corner of the intersection and one on the SW corner The centroid midpoint of the two placemarks should be at the center of the intersection As noted previously to drag it you have to first right click on it and choose Properties By duplicating the first placemark to add the second the Intersection ID Number gets copied to the duplicate so when you paste into Tru Traffic it will automatically assign it to the correct intersection When you ve finished follow the steps above to Transfer Intersection Locations from Google Earth to Tru Traffic View Trip Logs or Play it Like a Movie l 2 3 Follow the steps above to Transfer a Trip Log from Tru Traffic to Google Earth Use one of the KML options so the colors indicate the speeds Double click on the new folder in Google Earth to zoom the map on the trip log Find the Time Slider on the map in Google Earth Use the controls there to set the current viewing start time and end time The wider a time span you set the more points from your trip log you ll see at any moment 206 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 4 Click the Play button on the Time Slider to watch the trip log like a movie View Map of Instantaneo
374. to toggle between opaque and transparent backgrounds or to set the background color The edit box is always opaque so a change to a transparent background is not evident until you close the edit box You may specify that an annotation be visible on the diagram only when certain Ci Timing Plans are selected To do this right click on the edit box and choose Visible in Timing Plan An annotation may be visible in one or more selected timing plans or of course in all timing plans Double click on the selected annotation s edit box to move it by dragging the interior or resize it by dragging one of the edge controls Annotations may be pretty much any size To delete an annotation either e Right click on the selected annotation and choose the Delete Annotation command from the pop up menu or 33 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Delete the entire text of the annotation When the edit box is closed the entire annotation is deleted if it contains no text Click anywhere else on the diagram window to close the selected annotation s edit box 34 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Outline View The Outline View of the diagram data file shows all of the arterial diagrams and links between intersections in a pair of list boxes Next to each arterial diagram is a or sign on which you can double click to reveal or hide the intersections in the corresponding arterial diagram To link two intersections t
375. tory where you wish to install Tru Traffic and will include uninstall information to help you remove Tru Traffic and undo the changes made to your system After installing Tru Traffic you may run the program by double clicking using the left mouse button on the Tru Traffic icon There are a few things you ll want to do when you run Tru Traffic for the first time e You should enter your license information in the License Information dialog box available by selecting the About command from the Help menu then clicking the License button If there is no license information entered or if the information is invalid Tru Traffic will run in Demonstration Mode which means you will not be able to save any of your files import or export UTDF files or share files with TEAPAC e You should verify that the Drive Rule is set properly to either left hand side or right hand side depending on which side of a two way road traffic uses in your region in the Layout page of the Preferences dialog accessible from the View menu see page 191 The default is right hand side which is appropriate for North and South America China and continental Europe Iftraffic drives on the left in your region you should set the Drive Rule before creating any of your own diagrams e You may want to load the example diagram files using the Sample Diagram File command in the Help menu to inspect the parameters of the diagrams to get a feel for how Tru Traffic wor
376. tout The parameters on this page of the Preferences dialog determine the how the diagram prints The Printout parameters include e whether to Show the Diagram File Name and Today s Date amp Time e whether to Show the Vertical Scale e the diagram s Orientation on the page Show Diagram File Name This check box indicates whether Tru Traffic prints the name of the diagram file on the page when you print the diagram Ifthis is checked then Tru Traffic prints the name of the diagram data file and the current day date and time across the top of the page before printing the diagram Show the Vertical and or Horizontal Scale These check boxes indicate whether Tru Traffic prints the vertical and or horizontal scales of the diagram file on the page when you print the diagram If either of these is checked then Tru Traffic prints the vertical or horizontal scale as indicated along the right margin of the diagram before printing the diagram Orientation Use this set of radio buttons to set the default page orientation Portrait or Landscape the printer will use when you print diagrams You may override this default using either the Printer Setup command of the File Menu or by clicking the Settings button in the Printer dialog that appears after selecting the 8 button on the Tool Bar or the Print command under the File Menu 189 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Units of Measurement In the Units of M
377. traffic flow and queue length with dot density corresponding to vehicle density e Time Location I ve heard this also called a compressed time space diagram showing the green bands but in such a way that they re horizontal rather than slanted and the Horizontal Scale has no meaning other than to indicate the sequence of the intersections This is accomplished by artificially offsetting each ring in the signal timing strip by the travel time from the upstream intersection in the direction of travel corresponding to that ring This effectively removes the meaning of Space in the Time Space diagram and the diagram is then collapsed so the intersections are displayed with a small uniform spacing independent of the true distance between intersections For this type of diagram it s best to choose a Vertical Scale such that at least 4 cycles are visible in the diagram The lower half of the diagram shows the signal rings and bands corresponding to the forward bound traffic from left to right on the screen and the upper half shows the rings and bands corresponding to the reverse bound traffic You may also edit the type of diagram by T using the is button on the Tool Bar or directly on the Diagram Window by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Type of Diagram from the pop up menu or by simply pressing Ctrl T with the diagram in the foreground Diagram Position This specifies the position on the page of the printed dia
378. traffic turns or cross traffic turns They are not stored as for example volume of eastbound traffic turning North The result is that if you change the Drive Rule you will notice many parameter values switching sides left turn volumes will be found in the right turn volume locations and green bands started from the side street turning movement will progress in the opposite direction down the artery This can be pretty confusing and might lead to unexpected results For this reason you set this parameter once early on and then not change it again unless you need to work in a region with the other Drive Rule Colors In the Colors page of the Preferences dialog you may set the colors used by Tru Traffic in displaying the various regions of diagrams e g arterial red time time markers text green bands etc In the Diagram Region list box select the region whose color you wish to view or edit If you would like more than one region to share a common color you may select multiple regions by pressing the Shift or Ctrl key down while clicking regions Edit the color for the selected region s by clicking the Edit Color s button to pop up the Edit Color dialog 191 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Default Parameters In the Default page of the Preferences dialog you may set the default values of some parameters These are the Offset Reference Point page 103 Start Up Lost Time page 151 and Green
379. ty of image files including Portable Network Graphics JPEG Image File jpg or jpeg 43 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Icons Tru Traffic does not store the image in the diagram data file instead it stores only a reference to the image file Thus if you need to transfer the diagram data Dgm file to another computer you should include the image file for completeness If you already have the Network View laid out using say the geographic coordinates of the intersections then scaling the Background Map to match the overlying Network View layout is a two step process Typically you ll start by choosing two intersections that are spaced widely apart 1 The first step is to move the Background Map right click and choose Background Map Move Map Image until the image of one of those intersections in the underlying Background Map is positioned under the corresponding node in the Network View Call this intersection the anchor point 2 The second step is to resize the Background Map Right click on the Network View and choose Background Map Resize Map Image Left click once on the anchor point to hold that fixed then choose a point on the underlying Background Map near the other intersection and drag it to its corresponding node in the Network View Annotate Network View Use the Create Annotation command in the pop up menu after right clicking on the Network View where you wish the
380. ty of the averages that is if we were to go out and drive one more run how close we expect the new run s travel time to be to the measured average With this idea of the standard deviation being the error or uncertainty in the average we ll then use the standard formula for propagation of errors or uncertainties in the calculation of a function of independent variables each with uncertainty in its measurement This will require a bit of differential calculus The rule is given a function f x of independent variables x each with measured uncertainty Ax then the uncertainty Afin the calculation of f is given by AfY Ya s 10 90 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 The summation of squares here 1s telling us in effect that as we mix more and more uncertain variables into a calculation the overall uncertainty can only stay the same or increase it cannot decrease The two factors inthe y show us how to calculate how much each uncertain variable contributes to the overall uncertainty based on how much uncertainty there is in that variable and how that variable figures in our calculation We now apply this general rule to our specific case In our case the two independent variables are a and b and the function we re calculating is their difference f b d a b Since Of Qu and it follows that Od Ob Ad y Ab Y AB 11 Ql A A Al And since we re considering the predi
381. u enter the Splits in seconds and later changes the Cycle Length the Splits will assume new values in seconds maintaining their values in percent unchanged You can prevent this behavior for some splits by setting the Split Type to Fixed Seconds in the Phase and Movement Parameters dialog When a split is set to Fixed Seconds Tru Traffic will assure that its value in seconds remains unchanged even if the cycle length is changed Instead it will adjust all the non fixed splits proportionately See the discussion on p 149 for information about a related option setting the Split Type to Fixed Percentage e left turn in right hand Drive Rule regions North amp South America China and continental Europe e right turn in left hand Drive Rule regions Great Britain Australia New Zealand South Africa and much of Asia See page 191 for details 129 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination r 2 TE E Name etc Timinas Green Bands Lanes Volumes Splits seconds amp Phase Sequences RTOR V V Permitted 23 23 0 4 49 0 V Permitted Locked z e to the Arterial Through Splits Figure 5 The Timings Action List and Splits Bar on the Timings page provide simple means of editing splits and phase numbers You may also edit the Splits using either the Set V C Splits action in the Timings Action List or the Splits Bar on the Timings page of n Inte
382. ude altitude speed heading and time A trip log also includes a name or title and the time of day at which the signal cycle started or the master zero that is the time of day when the signal offset zero occurred This time is determined during the clock synchronization step A stop is counted when the speed drops to or below 5 mph 8 km hr after having exceeded 15 mph about 24 km hr You may change these threshold speeds in the Preferences Layout TT amp D Report page A run begins when the trip log enters the artery and it ends when the trip log leaves the artery A single trip log may include more than one run through an artery A trip log enters the artery when it passes through an intersection that s not the downstream neighbor of the previously passed through intersection if any It eaves the artery when it passes through an intersection that s not the upstream neighbor of the subsequently passed through intersection ifany Thus it is possible for runs to begin and or end inside the artery not just at the boundary intersections Generally you ll want runs to traverse the entire length of the artery so you ll enter at one boundary intersection and leave at the other boundary I recommend you start recording the trip logs at least 6 to 8 seconds before entering the first intersection and continue recording at least 6 to 8 seconds after passing through the final intersection to ensure that there are GPS readings straddling t
383. um or nth percentile list of trip log runs Use Shift or Ctrl to select operations e g Check All The average link speed from a trip log run is equal to the travel distance between the intersections 134 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 divided by the time elapsed between passing the centers of the intersections Ifthe trip log run includes a delay e g due to stopping at a queue the calculated speed is reduced accordingly To ensure that the slope of the green band on Time Space diagrams reflects the actual node to node travel time you should use the trip logs to calculate both the Design Speed and the Distance between the intersections When you change the Design Speed along the artery at an intersection the program offers to change all downstream Design Speeds to match The Design Speed along the artery determines the slope of the green bands for Time Space diagrams or the platoon density bands for Platoon Progression diagrams The Design Speed on the cross streets helps determine the flow of vehicles on permitted unprotected cross traffic turns The Design Speed also determines the actual Saturation Flow for each lane group See Phase Sequence page 127 for more information on permitted cross traffic turns In Travel Time and Delay Reports the Design Speed along the artery is used to calculate the delay in arrival to the next intersection and the distance traveled to reach the design speed The Design Sp
384. und turners are completing their movement The other protected turn Phase Sequences may be interpreted in a similar way If the protected turn Phase Sequences for both directions of travel are Lead or Lag the signal strip will have a section that is comprised of zig zag or hatched lines region 9 in Figure 1 These represent the interval of time during which the cross traffic turners on the artery complete their movement As a convenience these intervals are thus distinguished from those in which the cross street has its green time This feature is helpful in systems running on actuated controllers because if the turning volumes are small you may choose to optimize the signal timings with the assumption that the turning phases will gap out early In this case you need to be able to see the cross traffic turning intervals on the diagram If you wish Tru Traffic can display the Splits and optionally the Minimum Splits and Splits Units next to each phase along with a small arrow to indicate the movement using that phase See the Layout page of the Preferences dialog for more information page 176 On the diagram Tru Traffic draws horizontal lines labeled as 2 in Figure 1 representing the moments in time at which the Offset is zero for intersections not operating at double the network Cycle Length Thus the distance between these lines is equal to the network Cycle Length On the left and right edges of the diagram Tru Traffic draws tic
385. uniform speed not braking or accelerating around the time you click the button The figure below illustrates some of the features of the list of measurements You may also right click on the list or on a selected measurement for a pop up menu with additional options such as copying pasting editing deleting importing and exporting measurements 118 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Coordinates List Ww 78 57 7333 W 78 57 7508 N 35 o 4707 W 78 57 7545 N 35 0 4583 55 feet W 78 57 7404 N 35 0 4614 51 feet Curent GPS Location Not Connected Check Distances upon Advancing to Next Previous Intersection a Bess CZ X Gi 2 Heb su 119 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination Clicking the W Newt a uade button or pressing the PageDn PageUp key advances the window to the next previous intersection in the forward reverse direction unconditionally there is no error checking or offering to calculate the distance to the neighboring intersections unless you check the box Check Distances upon Advancing to Next Previous Intersection This prepares Tru Traffic to accept the geographic coordinates of the next intersection If voice command recognition is enabled you may say Next Intersection Previous Intersection instead of clicking this button If you have a remote control USB Bluetooth or infrared then the fast forward and fast rewind buttons should also per
386. uppose you have an North South artery with a diamond interchange Then at the first intersection at the eastbound on and off ramps set the Protected Turn Phase Sequence to None in the northbound direction and to Lead or Lag in the southbound direction If the signal is set so that the through traffic has a constant green after passing under the overpass then set the southbound through Split to 100 Similarly at the second intersection at the westbound on and off ramps set the protected cross traffic turn phase to Lead or Lag in the northbound direction and to None southbound direction and 1f appropriate set the northbound through Split to 100 Start by setting both Offsets to zero link the intersections Offsets only then set the Offset at either intersection to the correct value If the Offset Reference Point is set to Start of second through movement at the two intersections and one or both have a Lead protected cross traffic turn phase then start by setting the Offset equal to the cross traffic turn Split at whichever intersection s has have the Lead protected cross traffic turn phase before linking the intersections If you wish the nearby intersections can have other signal timings linked in addition to the Offsets Offset Reference Points Adjusted Cycle Length Splits and whether the splits are Fixed Protected Turn and Pedestrian Phase Sequences and With traffic Turn on Red options In this case Tru
387. uration flow and guidelines on how to measure it Downstream Saturation Flow This is the number of vehicles that can travel in an hour on the artery downstream from the intersection 146 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 assuming a constant demand This is the total saturation flow not a per lane average This number will be different from the actual saturation flow of the through movement when the number of feeding lanes does not equal the number of receiving lanes This often occurs when the through movement shares a lane with a turning movement Tru Traffic assumes that in most cases these lane numbers are equal so it resets the downstream saturation flow whenever the corresponding saturation flow or Number of Lanes is changed Tru Traffic uses this for Platoon Progression diagrams to determine the dot density on the screen The dot density is a measure of the degree of saturation on the artery corresponding to N S where N The vehicle flow vehicles hour on the artery at a certain time S The downstream Saturation Flow Baseline of the artery The Highway Capacity Manual suggests using 1900 vphg for each lane See Flow Baseline on Platoon Progression Diagrams page 98 for more details on how the intersection s Downstream Saturation Flow is used to determine the saturation flow baseline Downstream Link Color Use the Color Downstream Link on Network View check box and its associated color box to color the downstream link s
388. us intersection by voice command To use this command you must first manually open the Intersection Parameters window and click the button This can be equivalent to clicking the button on the geographic coordinates window to advance the window to next previous intersection in the forward reverse direction Whether it s Next or Previous and whether it does anything at all depends on the orientation of the diagram That is if you say North then the Forward Direction must be either North or South for this operation to take effect This is equivalent to clicking the Synchronize Now Clocks Page to synchronize the traffic signal clocks with the GPS satellite clocks button on the GPS Any of the spoken phrases can include please at the end but Tru Traffic responds even without hearing the magic word Tips on Using the Speech Recognition Engine The following tips come in handy in using Voice Commands to control the data collection through a GPS receiver 76 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Use a head mounted microphone The proximity to your mouth increases the signal to noise ratio 1 e it reduces background noise I m told it s important to use a high quality microphone For me this advice is almost too vague to be of value I don t know how to choose a high quality mike I know how to choose a high priced mike but does that give me a high quality mike I can only hope so One thing I do
389. us Average or Instantaneous Median or Link Average or Link Median Speed l Follow the steps above to Transfer Instantaneous Average of Trip Logs from Tru Traffic to Google Earth 2 Double click on the new folder in Google Earth to zoom the map on the average of trip logs 3 Color coded icons along the artery indicate the speeds 4 In Tru Traffic you may navigate to View Preferences Google KML to specify the colors and their corresponding speed thresholds 5 Click on a point in Google Earth to see a description of the point including the travel time speed and contributing trip logs 207 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination ES Google Earth DENRRNEUCUEKGSENTERE Paste into My Y Search Places the speed o summary that you copied from Fiy to e g Tokyo Japan Tru Traffic ES Coordination along Crossin El Coordination along Cross 8 a EJ Coordination along Cross O e Earth Gallery gt gt iE m S Primary Database To see the a Borders and Labels MG Places instantaneous speed 7 Photos V ES Roads 3D Buildings along the entire route E drag both the duration El Steet Vie slider the start time and the time slider ORD ie the end time to opposite ends of the timeline The instantaneous speed displays as a set of dots color coded to indicate percentage of the design speed
390. use trip logs to calculate the actual travel distance Tru Traffic won t offer to supply the calculated distance if it thinks the declared distance is more accurate but you can trick it into making this offer by first setting the distance to a number absurdly too small then clicking _ Coordinates button followed by the vx button Download Click the button on the list of Geographic Coordinates to download a list of all waypoints stored in the GPS receiver At present this option is available only for Garmin GPS receivers and only if the type of GPS receiver is set to Garmin Proprietary The downloaded list is displayed in the Assign Downloaded Waypoints dialog which you may use to assign each waypoint to an intersection More generally whenever you Import geographic coordinates into Tru Traffic from a Coordinates Text file or Paste them copied from say Google Earth as detailed on p 201 or Download them from a GPS receiver Tru Traffic displays this window to allow you assign or reassign the coordinates to their respective intersections If the coordinates already have an intersection ID associated with them the window shows tentative assignments of the waypoints but you may override those assignments here In Google Earth 120 put the ID number with the label ID or in either the placemark name or the placemark description e g ID 153 or 153 See p 201 for details User s Manual rev 2015 0
391. uses only the first line to appear Tru Traffic identifies these lines by looking for the text UTC or Local If that text appears on the line including the parentheses then Tru Traffic expects the starting date and time to follow the colon character The next line includes text labels identifying the columns enclosed in quotes and separated by tabs or commas This line makes the table easier to read in Excel or a text editor but it s otherwise ignored by Tru Traffic The remaining lines are the raw data of the trip log The angles are in degrees the speed and distances are assumed to be in the user specified units of measure Again the columns are separated by tabs or commas Tru Traffic reads the numbers with the assumption that the columns appear in the order shown above When Tru Traffic exports a trip log to a text file it puts a digital signature at the end of the file This allows Tru Traffic to verify that the file has not been altered should you later wish to import the trip log into Tru Traffic If the digital signature is not at the end of the file or if the digital signature is not valid then Tru Traffic internally marks the trip log as being imported from an unverifiable source file For information on downloading Trip Logs from the GPS receiver see GPS Trip Logs Page page 51 In particular Figure 4 page 54 illustrates some compromises in downloaded pre recorded Trip Logs See also the FAQ on page 223 for additional
392. ust standing still and the random errors that occur in GPS readings might artificially introduce an apparent speed or acceleration that are unrealistic With this assumption the conservative approach is to preserve the readings in this case although it may not matter much if you should prefer to delete these points 62 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 since by definition they are having a mostly negligible affect on the trip log anyway You get to specify the Minimum Distance as the testing threshold 2 Speed The speed is calculated from the difference in the position and time from reading A to reading B For trip logs recorded live i e not downloaded readings A and B include the speed as a separate measurement by the GPS receiver independent of the position information The speed and heading are measured by the Doppler shift in the frequency The measured speed should be a good indication of the instantaneous speed at each reading whereas the calculated speed is a pretty fair estimate of the average speed over the time interval between the two readings I believe that the measured speed if available 1s usually more accurate but two are generally comparable for short time intervals The Filter will compare this measured speed to the calculated speed and if the difference exceeds a given value point B is marked as bad You get to specify the Maximum Speed Difference as the criterion for a bad reading For trip logs downloa
393. utter on the screen somewhat If they protrude it s more obvious that they re there available to display associated parameters You may choose whether to use a strict test of the Splits of both rings summing to the Cycle Length or to allow the splits of just one ring to sum to the Cycle Length Whichever test you use the strict test or the more lenient test Tru Traffic will issue a warning to you if the test isn t passed And you may select the icon set used to indicate Start Stop Recording Trip Log This affects the appearance of the buttons on the Tool Bar and on the Trip Logs page of the GPS View Warnings Use the list of check boxes on the Warnings page to specify what types of warnings Tru Traffic will issue when appropriate The types of warnings include e Splits sum is not equal to the cycle length Total Yellow All Red clearance time exceeds the split e Walk Flashing Don t Walk Yellow All Red clearance time exceeds the split e Split is less than the minimum split 192 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 All splits are fixed seconds e The splits are a combination of fixed seconds and fixed percentage with no splits freely scaled e A permitted turning phase is followed by a lagging protected turning phase in the oncoming approach Yellow Trap Hazard Movements with the same phase number have different clearance times Geographic coordinate measurements are closer to the centroid of neighboring intersectio
394. w Coordinates Click the _ coordinates button to view or modify the list of measurements used to determine the geographic coordinates There are a number of ways to enter the geographic coordinates 1 Usually the easiest way to collect and enter the geographic coordinates is to drop placemarks in Google Earth then copy and paste them into Tru Traffic pasting them into either the Geographic Coordinates window for any intersection or into the Network View the Outline View or an Arterial Diagram window To paste the geographic coordinates from Google Earth create in Google Earth a folder of placemarks then copy the entire folder to the clipboard see page 201 for more details When you paste into Tru Traffic Tru Traffic displays the entire list of pasted coordinates along with their tentative intersection assignments You may assign the unassigned coordinates to intersections change the assignments or skip coordinates by not assigning them to any intersection before clicking OK to accept the list In Google Earth if you include in the placemark name or description the intersection ID numbers preceded with either the text ID or then Tru Traffic will tentatively assign those placemarks accordingly when you paste them from the clipboard See the chapter on Using Google Earth with Tru Traffic p 201 for step by step details y Get GPS 2 To add the current GPS coordinates as a measurement click the
395. w Date and Time This is a check box indicating whether the date and time are placed at the top in drawing the diagram Show Intersection Names on Lines This parameter indicates the number of rows or lines which Tru Traffic uses to display the Intersection Names on the diagram By default Tru Traffic shows the names on two lines alternating to reduce the likelihood that neighboring intersection s names will overlap You may increase this number if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the names tend to run together Show Distances between Intersection This check box indicates whether the Distances between intersections are placed along the bottom of the diagram below the intersection names If the Distances are shown you may select the number of rows or lines Tru Traffic uses to display the Distances on the diagram This is useful if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the distances tend to run together Show Distances on Lines This parameter indicates the number of rows or lines which Tru Traffic uses to display the Distances between Intersections on the diagram if you have opted to Show the Distances By default Tru Traffic shows the distances on one line but you may increase this number if you have closely spaced intersections or so many intersections that the distances tend to run together When showing the distances on more than one line Tru Traf
396. ween the two compared readings gets large the calculation of the speed the average over the time interval may legitimately show a large discrepancy from the measured instantaneous speed This makes the speed test more likely to catch points including false alarms That is based on the speed criterion the Filter may falsely identify subsequent points as bad You might want to raise the Maximum Speed Difference when comparing to the last good point to reduce this risk When comparing to the last good point the acceleration tests become weaker so they won t catch as many points but any points they catch are more likely to be truly bad You might want to try the Filter both ways comparing to the last point or the last good point to see what points it catches in each case before committing to removing any marked points When the Filter is finished it displays a prunable list to you of the points it caught You get final approval before any points are removed 63 Tru Traffic 10 0 Quality Assured Traffic Signal Coordination You may manually filter spurious points you see from trip logs in the arterial timings diagram window the trip log plots page 92 or the Network View by carefully pointing to them with the mouse cursor then using Alt right click You may also use the Trip Log Details Table page 61 to manually identify and remove spurious points GPS Options Page The Options page of the e GPS Receiver View provides o
397. while driving a vehicle The figure below illustrates some common errors in recorded trip logs errors which cause problems in generating the Travel Time amp Delay Report and Plots from Trip Logs The game here is that a run must pass through a red circle in order for the software to conclude that the run passed through an intersection Furthermore a run must pass through at least two consecutive red circles to be counted as having entered the artery Incorrect The trip log doesn t pass the center of the red circle You probably either started recording the trip log too late or you stopped recording it too early ETT Sometimes the only good solution is to re record the trip log Remember to start recording well be entering the first intersection and continue recording well after passing through the last Incorrect GPS noise in the trip log leads to an incorrect calculation of the travel distance In this case it also causes the trip log to pass through the red circle twice While the analysis tries to ignore false U turns it can still be fooled Disable the noisy points from the trip log using say the Trip Log Details Table Correct The trip logs passes smoothly through the red circles Incorrect GPS noise causes the trip log to bypass the red circle altogether The analysis will conclude that the trip log went around the intersection Disable the noisy points from the trip log u
398. wo intersections Add an intersection or Delete one of the boundary intersections Consequently you should refrain from setting the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin until after you set the Distances between the other intersections and only then if you need the first intersection located at some position other than the left margin For example you can zoom in on certain sections of the artery by setting the Horizontal Scale to a small value thereby magnifying the artery then setting the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin to whatever value is necessary to position the desired section on the diagram For this purpose the Distance to the first intersection from the left margin can be negative shifting the artery off of the diagram to the left This zooming is most easily accomplished by dragging directly on the diagram to select one or more intersections 112 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 Note that locating the first intersection further in on the screen will push the last intersection off of the screen unless you have first set the Horizontal Scale to account for this You can prevent the automatic resetting of the Horizontal Scale by not checking the Unlocked check box parameter described on page 102 to No You can also have Tru Traffic recalculate the default scale at any time by checking the Unlocked check box ID Number This is a number you can use to identify the intersection Tru Tra
399. work View you may use Zoom drag arrow key panning and mouse panning by letting the mouse hover near an edge of the map The Zoom Factor drop down list box on the Tool Bar applies to the Network View as well as the Arterial Diagram but with a special meaning In the Network View the base scale or 100 zoom level is the same as Zoom To Fit it means sufficient to display the entire artery or network in the current window size with only a thin margin A 20096 zoom level then makes the displayed network about twice the current size of the Network View so you have to scroll to see the hidden parts of the network and resizing the window always changes the effective zoom level Zooming the Network View can make it easier to spot spurious points in trip logs for deletion When zoomed in Shift Arrow scrolls to the nearby intersection if any and right drag scrolls the Network View When changing the scale if the mouse is over the Network View its position is used as an anchor point With the Network View you may 1 2 Edit the Arterial Diagram Parameters by selecting an intersection along the artery and either Hr clicking the e button on the Tool Bar choosing the Arterial Diagram command under the View Menu or by clicking the right mouse button and choosing the Arterial Diagram command from the pop up menu Edit the Intersection Parameters by double clicking on the intersection by selecting the intersection alon
400. ystems from Naztec Gardner Eagle and Peek AAP Files The file type of AAPEX of the Arterial Analysis Package AAP available through McTrans Helpful in transferring the arterial timings diagram parameters among TRANSYT 7F PASSER II 90 and other programs supporting the AAP file format See page 214 for further information about AAP files Diagram Text File A text file which is used as a means of sharing information with DgT TEAPAC through PRETSPPD both from Strong Concepts www StrongConcepts com This file format is likely to change in the future based on user feedback Table 10 File types which Tru Traffic can Open and Merge 170 User s Manual rev 2015 03 30 By default diagram data files have the extension Dgm but you can change the extension if you wish You may also select the type of file choosing among the file types listed in Table 10 The newly open diagram will replace the one currently in memory To prevent mishaps Tru Traffic detects whether the diagram currently in memory has been modified without having been saved and if so offers to save the diagram before opening the new one By default Tru Traffic enforces that a file be open only once for editing and for read only thereafter until it s closed for editing To skip locking the file check the Open as Read only box on the Open File dialog The UTDF files are another convenient and often preferable way to share data with other

User`s Manual - Tru

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents